Yamaha PSR-6000 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-6000

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: de handleiding

English

Owner’s Manual

Deutsch

Bedienungsanleitung

Français

Mode d’emploi

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard. The Yamaha

PSR-6000 PortaTone combines the most advanced AWM tone generation technol-

ogy with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound

quality with maximum musical enjoyment. The Interactive Accompaniment and

One Touch Setting features, in particular, are brilliant examples of how advanced

technology can significantly expand your musical horizons. A new large-size

graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of

this advanced instrument.

In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and vast performance

potential, we urge you to read the manuals thoroughly while trying out the various

features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Taking Care of Your PortaTone 2

Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive.......... 3

Nomenclature 4

Connections & Music Stand 6

The Demonstration 8

The Demo Play Modes ........................9

The PSR-6000 Display &

Help Function 10

The Display & Multi-function

Controls ................................................10

■ The [MIXER] Button ........................10

■ The [LIST HOLD] Button .................11

■ The [CONTRAST] Control...............11

The Help Function.............................. 11

Playing the PSR-6000 12

Selecting & Playing Voices ............. 12

Keyboard Percussion .......................14

USER SET Voice Assignment.........15

Changing the Split Point ..................16

Transposition, Tuning, Octave

Change, & Key Velocity 17

TRANSPOSE & TUNE........................17

OCTAVE CHANGE..............................18

KEY VELOCITY ................................... 18

Using the Accompaniment Section

■ Accompaniment Volume .................25

■ Rhythm-only Accompaniment .........25

USER SET Style Assignment.......... 26

Interactive Accompaniment ............27

■ Auto Solo.........................................27

Using Disk Styles on Optional Data

Disks

...................................................... 28

■ Selecting a DISK Style ....................28

One Touch Setting 29

Expression & Effects 31

■ Harmony.......................................... 31

■ Sustain ............................................31

■ Reverb.............................................31

■ Effects .............................................31

■ Left Hold ..........................................32

■ Pitch Bend Wheel............................ 32

■ Modulation/Effect Wheel .................32

Using the Pads 33

The MULTI Mode................................. 33

The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4)...... 33

■ Recording Phrases.......................... 34

■ Phrase Playback .............................34

The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8) ....... 35

■ Recording Chords ...........................35

■ Chord Playback ...............................36

■ MULTI Pad Repeat Playback..........36

The PERC Mode..................................37

■ Assigning Different Instruments

To the PERC Pads.......................... 37

■ Playing the Percussion Pads .......... 38

■ The PERC BREAK Function ...........38

The TEMPO Mode...............................39

■ The TEMPO SYNCHRO

Function ..........................................40

Panel Registration 41

Registering the Panel Settings ........41

Recall the Registered Panel

Settings.............................................. 42

The Freeze Function .........................42

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra

Collection)

& General MIDI

Music Software Disks 43

Disk Orchestra Collection Disk

Playback

...............................................43

■ Volume Control ............................... 45

■ Muting Specific Parts ...................... 46

■ Octave, Transpose, and Tune ........ 46

■ Other Controls That Function

In the DOC Mode ............................ 46

General MIDI Disk Playback ............ 47

■ Volume Control ............................... 47

■ Muting Specific Tracks .................... 48

■ Octave .............................................48

■ Other Controls That Function

In the General MIDI Mode............... 48

The Sequencer 49

Recording ............................................. 49

Deleting Tracks ................................... 52

Playback ............................................... 53

Sequence Editing ...............................54

■ CONDITION/VOLUME —

CONDITION ....................................54

● METRONOME ............................54

● HARMONY .................................. 54

● RECORDING TYPE .................... 55

■ CONDITION/VOLUME —

TRACK VOLUME............................55

■ EDIT — TRACK COPY/MIX............ 56

■ REMOVE EVENT............................ 57

■ DELETE MEASURE ....................... 58

■ CREATE MEASURE ....................... 58

■ QUANTIZE ......................................59

■ ERASE ............................................ 60

■ NOTE SHIFT ................................... 60

■ SONG CLEAR................................. 61

Contents

The Custom Accompaniment

Programmer 62

Basic Programming Procedure

(Normal section)

.................................62

Creating Intro, Fill-In, &

Ending Sections

.................................66

Programming a Preset Intro,

Fill-in, or Ending Section.................. 66

Editing a Previously Saved User

Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section........ 67

Creating a New Intro, Fill-in, or

Ending Section From Scratch.......... 67

Custom Accompaniment Editing

......68

■ RECORD — NAME/SECTION........68

● NAME ..........................................68

● SECTION .................................... 68

■ RECORD — MEASURE/BEAT.......69

■ RECORD — TRACK VOLUME....... 69

■ RECORD — FADER ASSIGN ........70

■ EDIT — QUANTIZE ........................70

■ EDIT — COPY ................................71

■ EDIT — REMOVE EVENT ..............72

■ STORE ............................................72

■ I/F/E Select...................................... 73

Exiting From the Custom

Accompaniment Programmer ........ 74

Selecting & Using a Custom

Accompaniment Style

.......................74

The PSR-6000 “Functions” 75

General Function Selection &

Editing Procedure ..............................75

■ The [EXIT] Button............................ 76

F1: Custom Voice Edit 77

Standard Voice Edit Functions

(voice groups 1 through 10)

............77

■ NAME/CONTROL ...........................77

● NAME ..........................................77

● CONTROLLER............................ 78

1 TOUCH SENS.......................... 78

2 PITCH BEND............................78

■ COMMON ....................................... 78

1 OCTAVE...................................78

2 PAN .......................................... 78

● MODULATION ............................ 79

3 DEPTH .....................................79

4 SPEED .....................................79

● TONE .......................................... 79

5 BRILLIANCE ............................ 79

6 RESONANCE .......................... 79

■ ENVELOPE .....................................80

1 ATTACK ...................................80

2 DECAY ..................................... 80

3 RELEASE.................................80

4 SUSTAIN.................................. 80

Dual Voice Edit Functions

(voice group 11)

..................................81

■ NAME/VOICE.................................. 81

● NAME ..........................................81

● VOICE ......................................... 81

■ OCT/PAN/VOL./DETUNE ...............82

● OCTAVE .....................................82

● PAN ............................................. 82

● VOLUME ..................................... 82

● DETUNE .....................................82

Drum Voice Edit Functions

(Voice group 12)

................................. 83

■ NAME/PAN/PITCH/SOFTNESS .....83

● NAME ..........................................83

● PAN ............................................. 83

● PITCH .........................................83

● SOFTNESS ................................. 83

F2: Reverb/Effect 84

■ REVERB TYPE & DEPTH ..............84

● REVERB TYPE ........................... 84

● REVERB DEPTH ........................ 84

■ EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH ...............85

● EFFECT TYPE ............................ 85

● EFFECT DEPTH ......................... 85

F3: Controller 86

■ FOOT CONTROLLER..................... 86

■

MODULATION/EFFECT WHEEL

...... 86

■ SUSTAIN PEDAL &

PITCH BEND WHEEL..................... 87

● SUSTAIN PEDAL ........................ 87

● PITCH BEND WHEEL................. 87

■ FOOT SWITCH...............................88

F4: One Touch Setting/IA 89

■ ONE TOUCH SETTING

SYNCHRO CHANGE...................... 89

■ INTERACTIVE

ACCOMPANIMENT ........................ 89

F5: Harmony Type 90

F6: Disk 91

■ The [TO DISK] Button .....................91

■ The [FROM DISK] Button................ 93

■ The F6: DISK Functions.................. 94

● 1 FROM DISK .............................94

● 2 TO DISK ................................... 95

● 3 RENAME FILE ......................... 97

● 4 DELETE FILE........................... 98

● 5 FORMAT DISK......................... 98

● 6 DISK FREE AREA ...................99

F7: Utility 100

■ MEMORY BACKUP &

REGISTRATION FREEZE ............ 100

● MEMORY BACKUP .................. 100

● REGISTRATION FREEZE ........ 101

■ RECALL PRESET DATA ..............101

F8: MIDI 102

■ THE NORMAL PLAY MODE......... 102

■ THE DOC MODE ..........................102

■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM)

MODE ........................................... 103

● Initial General MIDI Mode

Settings .....................................103

MIDI Channel &

Multi Part Settings

............................104

■ Normal Play Mode......................... 104

● CH. SETTING............................ 104

TRANSMIT ................................ 104

RECEIVE................................... 104

SPLIT TRANSMIT ..................... 104

RHYTHM RECEIVE .................. 104

● SEQ. TRACK CH. ..................... 105

● MULTI PART .............................105

■ DOC/GM Mode ............................. 106

● KEYBOARD CHANNEL ............107

● LOCAL CONTROL ....................107

● TRANSPOSE ............................ 107

MIDI Switch, System Settings, &

Data Transmission

...........................107

■ MIDI SWITCH (Normal Play

Mode Only).................................... 107

■ MIDI SYSTEM (Normal Play

Mode Only).................................... 108

● CLOCK ...................................... 108

● LOCAL CONTROL ....................108

● TRANSPOSE ............................ 108

● SPLIT SEND ............................. 108

■ DATA TRANSMIT (Normal Play

Mode Only).................................... 109

● MIDI Bulk Dump Reception

(Memory Data Receive) ............110

● Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump

Request Messages ...................110

● Bulk Dump Error Messages ......110

Error Messages 111

■ Sequencer Errors ..........................111

■ Custom Accompaniment

Programmer Errors ....................... 111

■ Disk Errors .................................... 111

■ MIDI Errors....................................112

■ DOC/GM Mode Errors...................112

■ Other Messages............................112

Troubleshooting 113

Index 114

Voice List ............................................ 116

■ Keyboard Percussion List ............. 118

Style List .............................................119

Normal Play Mode

MIDI Percussion Map ...................... 120

GM/DOC Mode

Percussion Map

................................121

Fingering Chart ................................. 122

MIDI Function Tree........................... 128

MIDI Messages ..................................133

MIDI Implementation Chart............ 140

Specifications.................................... 141

Taking Care of Your PortaTone

Your PortaTone will give you years of playing pleasure if you follow

the simple rules given below:

■ Location

Do not expose the instrument to the following conditions

to avoid deformation, discoloration, or more serious

damage.

● Direct sunlight (e.g. near a window).

● High temperatures (e.g. near a heat source, outside,

or in a car during the daytime).

● Excessive humidity.

● Excessive dust.

● Strong vibration.

■ Power Supply

● Turn the power switch OFF when the instrument is

not in use.

● The power supply cord should be unplugged from the

AC outlet if the instrument is not to be used for an

extended period of time.

● Unplug the instrument during electric storms.

● Avoid plugging the instrument into the same AC

outlet as appliances with high power consumption,

such as electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid using

multi-plug adapters since these can result in reduced

sound quality, operation errors, and possibly damage.

■ Turn Power OFF When Making

Connections

● To avoid damage to the instrument and other devices

to which it is connected (a sound system, for exam-

ple), turn the power switches of all related devices

OFF prior to connecting or disconnecting audio and

MIDI cables.

■ Handling and Transport

● Never apply excessive force to the controls, connec-

tors or other parts of the instrument.

● Always unplug cables by gripping the plug firmly,

not by pulling on the cable.

● Disconnect all cables before moving the instrument.

● Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or

placing heavy objects on the instrument can result in

scratches and more serious damage.

■ Cleaning

● Clean the cabinet and panel with a dry soft cloth.

● A slightly damp cloth may be used to remove stub-

born grime and dirt.

● Never use cleaners such as alcohol or thinner.

● Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instrument

(vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface).

■ Electrical Interference

● This instrument contains digital circuitry and may

cause interference if placed too close to radio or

television receivers. If this occurs, move the instru-

ment further away from the affected equipment.

■ Data Backup

● Internal data (e.g. sequencer data) is retained in

memory even if the power switch is turned OFF. If the

power is not turned ON for periods longer than about

a week, however, memory data will be lost. Save all

important data to disk before turning off for longer

periods.

● Internal memory data can be corrupted due to incor-

rect operation. Be sure to “save” important data to a

floppy disk frequently so you have a backup to revert

to if something happens to damage the data in memory.

Also note that magnetic fields can damage data on the

disk, so it is advisable to make a second back-up copy

of disks that contain very important data, and keep

backup disks in a safe place away from stray mag-

netic fields (i.e. away from speakers, appliances

containing motors, etc.).

■ Service and Modification

● The PSR-6000 contains no user serviceable parts.

Opening it or tampering with it in anyway can lead to

irreparable damage and possibly electric shock. Re-

fer all servicing to qualified YAMAHA personnel.

Taking Care of Your PortaTone

Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive

■ Type of Disk

Use only 3.5-inch 2DD floppy disks.

■ Disk Insertion & Removal

● To insert a floppy disk in the disk drive, hold the disk

with the label side facing up and the sliding shutter

facing the disk drive door, then insert carefully until

the disk clicks into place.

■ Floppy Disk Handling & Storage

The actual recording medium inside a floppy disk has a

fine coating of magnetic particles in which the data is

“stored”. To protect this coating as well as the disk

drive’s delicate read-write head, please observe the fol-

lowing:

● Always keep floppy disks in their plastic case when

they are not in use. Never place heavy objects on a

disk or bend the disk in any way. Also keep disks

away from liquids and dust.

● Never open the disk’s shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the disk.

● Keep floppy disks away from strong magnetic fields

such as those produced by television sets, speakers,

motors, etc.

● Never leave floppy disks in areas exposed to strong

direct sunlight, excessively high or low temperature,

or high humidity.

● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are

attached in the proper location.

■ Protecting Your data

● To prevent accidental erasure of important data you

have saved to floppy disk, be sure to slide the disk’s

write-protect tab to the “write protect” position (the

tab window should be open). When this is done the

disk cannot be written to.

● To remove a floppy disk from the disk drive, make

sure the disk drive “in use” light is not lit and press the

disk eject button firmly as far as it will go and then,

when the disk is full ejected, remove it by hand.

If the eject button is only partially pressed or pressed

too quickly the eject mechanism may not function

properly, leaving the disk stuck halfway. Do not

attempt to remove the disk forcefully if this happens,

since excess force can damage the disk and/or the

drive mechanism. Try either pressing the eject button

carefully again, or push the disk all the way back into

the drive and repeat the eject procedure.

● Never attempt to remove a floppy disk during a

record or playback operation!! This can corrupt the

data on the disk, and actually damage the disk drive!

● Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data read/write errors.

■ Clean the Read/Write Head Regularly

This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/

write head which, after an extended period of use, will

pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used

that will eventually cause read and write errors. To

maintain the disk drive in optimum working order we

recommend that you use a commercially-available Dry-

type Head Cleaning Disk to clean the head about once a

month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the available of

head-cleaning disks.

● Make regular backup copies of important data to a

separate floppy disk, and keep your backup disks in

a separate, safe place.

● To ensure the safety of your data (and of the disk drive

itself) always use floppy disks from a well-known,

reliable manufacturer. “No-brand” disks can cause

trouble.

YAMAHA is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling or operation.

Write protected Write enabled

Nomenclature

MAX

MIN

MODULATION/

EFFECT

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOPCHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRA

Tap StartTempo Change

PHONES

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

DOWN

PITCH BEND

MIN

MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

HELP/

LANGUAGE

EXITFUNCTIONCONTRAST

INTERACTIVE

ACCOMPANIMENT

AUTO BASS

CHORD

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

+–

TEMPO

MIXER

LIST HOLD

5 6 7 8

0 !

$ %

)

E R

410

511

612

THRU ––––––––– OUT –––––––

––

––––

MIDIFOOT CONTROLLER SUSTAIN FOOT SWITCH

1 POWER Button ........................................ [page 8]

2 DEMO Button........................................... [page 8]

3 DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI

Button..................................................... [page 43]

4 MASTER VOLUME Control...................... [page 8]

5 CONTRAST Control............................... [page 11]

6 FUNCTION Button ................................. [page 75]

7 HELP/LANGUAGE Button ..................... [page 11]

8 EXIT Button........................................ [page 9, 11]

9 STYLE Buttons .............. [page 21, 26, 28, 62, 64]

PRESET, USER SET, CUSTOM A,

CUSTOM B, Style Group [1] – [12] Buttons

0 INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT

Button..................................................... [page 27]

! AUTO BASS CHORD Button ................. [page 19]

@ ONE TOUCH SETTING Buttons............ [page 29]

VERSE A, VERSE B, CHORUS A, CHORUS B

# TEMPO [–], [+] Buttons and

Beat Display ........................................... [page 22]

$ Fill-in, Intro, and Ending Buttons [page 22, 23, 25]

FILL INj (INTRO 1), FILL INn (INTRO 2),

ENDING/rit. (INTRO 3)

% Verse, Chorus, and Solo Buttons ........... [page 24]

VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1,

CHORUS 2, SOLO

^ Accompaniment Control Buttons [page 22, 23, 25]

SYNCHRO START, START/RE-START, STOP

& Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .............. [page 8, 10]

* LCD Buttons....................................... [page 8, 10]

( LCD Dials........................................... [page 9, 10]

) MIXER Button ........................................ [page 10]

q LIST HOLD Button ................................. [page 11]

w PAD Buttons........................................... [page 33]

PAD MODE SELECT Buttons,

REC/STOP, 1-8

Nomenclature

CANCEL

PAD

CHORD

Tempo l a tempofasteraccel. slower rit.

876543

POWER

DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI

DEMO

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

ORCHESTRA VOICE

WOODWIND

PIANO/E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN/

ACCORDION

BASS

STRINGS/CHOIR SYNTH

WORLD/

PERCUSSIVE

BRASS

DUAL VOICE/

SOUND

EFFECT

ORCH. 1

ORCH. 2

VOICE PART

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM VOICE

ORCH.

2 1

ORCH.

2+1

ORCHESTRATION

ORCH.

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

DISK IN USE

FROM

DISK

PANEL REGISTRATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

12345678

(

t y u i o p

BANK

MALLET DRUMS

410

511

612

ABCD

L/L+R

––

AUX OUT

––

R L/L+R

––

AUX IN

––

e SEQUENCER/CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT

PROGRAMMER Buttons ................. [page 49, 62]

SEQUENCER, CUSTOM ACCOMP.

Sequencer Track/Custom Accompaniment

Programmer Track Buttons

1 through 6/CHORD 1 through 6, 7/BASS,

ACCOMP./RHYTHM

Sequencer/Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Control Buttons

RECORD, DELETE, EDIT, p (Top),

r (Rewind), f (Forward)

r ORCHESTRA VOICE Buttons ... [page 13, 15, 77]

VOICE PART ORCH.1, VOICE PART ORCH.2,

PRESET, USER SET, CUSTOM VOICE,

Voice Group [1] – [12] Buttons

t ORCHESTRATION Buttons ................... [page 12]

ORCH. 1, ORCH. 2+1, ORCH. 2v1

y LEFT HOLD Button................................ [page 32]

u HARMONY Button ................................. [page 31]

i SUSTAIN Button .................................... [page 31]

o REVERB Button..................................... [page 31]

p EFFECT Button...................................... [page 31]

Q DISK IN USE Buttons ...................... [page 91, 93]

FROM DISK, TO DISK

W PANEL REGISTRATION Buttons........... [page 41]

MEMORY, FREEZE, 1-8, BANK

E PITCH BEND Wheel .............................. [page 32]

R MODULATION/EFFECT Wheel ............. [page 32]

T Disk Drive..................................... [page 3, 28, 43]

Y Disk Eject Button................................ [page 3, 45]

Connections & Music Stand

PHONES

▼

1 The PHONES Jack......................................................................................................................................................................

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for

private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker

system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is

plugged into the PHONES jack.

3 AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks................................................................................................................................................

These jacks are intended primarily for use with external audio

sources such as tone generators, drum machines, CD players, and

similar equipment. The signal received via the AUX IN L and R jacks

is reproduced via the PSR-6000’s internal stereo amplifier and

speaker system. If you will be connecting a monaural source to the

PSR-6000, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the

L/L+R jack only, the monaural input signal is fed to both the left and

right channels of the PSR-6000 stereo sound system. Please note that

the PSR-6000 MASTER VOLUME control does not affect the level

of the signal delivered to external equipment.

The rear-panel AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output

of the PSR-6000 for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound

system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If you will be connecting

the PSR-6000 to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack.

When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and right-

channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so

you don’t lose any of the PSR-6000 sound.

CAUTION

• To prevent damage to the internal circuitry, the AUX OUT jack signal

must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly or

through external equipment.

2 The AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks.............................................................................................................................

AUX OUT

L/L+RR

Stereo System

AUX IN

L/L+RR

Tone Generator

FOOT

SWITCH

FOOT

SWITCH

SUSTAIN

FOOT

CONTROLLER

MIDI

OUT THRUIN

AUX OUT AUX IN

L/L+RL/L+RRR

2 3 7

4 5 6

The Music Stand

The PSR-6000 is supplied with a music stand that can

be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at

the rear of the control panel.

4 FOOT SWITCH Jack..................................................................................................................................................................

An optional Yamaha FC5 footswitch connected to this jack can be

used to control a range of important functions. Refer to the “FOOT

SWITCH SELECT” function described on page 86.

7 MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors ......................................................................................................................

The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external

MIDI device (such as a MIDI sequencer) which can be used to

control the PSR-6000. The MIDI THRU connector re-transmits any

data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of

several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI OUT connec-

tor transmits MIDI data generated by the PSR-6000 (e.g. note and

velocity data produced by playing the keyboard). More details on

MIDI are provided on page 102.

MIDI

OUT THRUIN

6 FOOT CONTROLLER Jack ................................................................................................................................................

An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller can be connected to this

jack to allow foot expression (swell) or effect control. Please note

that when the foot controller is used for expression control, no sound

will be produced if it is set to the minimum position.

5 SUSTAIN Jack.................................................................................................................................................................................

An optional FC5 footswitch can be connected here for foot

sustain control. The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on a

piano — press for sustain, release for normal sound.

SUSTAIN

FOOT

CONTROLLER

Tone Generator

Music

Computer

Connections & Music Stand

The Demonstration

Z Switch ON............................................................................................................................................................................................

To give you an idea of the PSR-6000’s sophisticated capabilities, it

is programmed with 21 demonstration sequences which can be played

in a number of ways.

Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC

outlet, then press the [POWER] button to turn the

PSR-6000 ON.

NOTES

• The demonstration sequences have been specially programmed for demon-

stration purposes — it is not possible to reproduce the demonstration

sequences 100% using the PSR-6000 sequencer functions.

X Set an Initial Volume Level................................................................................................................................................

Set the [MASTER VOLUME] control to a

position about half way toward the highest setting.

You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] con-

trol for the most comfortable overall volume level

after playback begins.

C Press the [DEMO] Button...................................................................................................................................................

Press the [DEMO] button and the PSR-6000

demo display will appear.

DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI

DEMO

B Exit When Done ..........................................................................................................

Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT]

button to exit from the demo mode and return to the

normal play-mode display when you’ve finished

playing the demo songs.

MIN

MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI

DEMO

EXIT

POWER

V Start & Stop Playback as Required

Press the START LCD button to start playback of

all demo songs. Press the STOP LCD button when

you want to stop playback.

NOTES

• The default demo play mode is RANDOM.

• Demo playback can also be started and

stopped by using the [START/RE-START]

and [STOP] buttons on the PSR-6000

panel.

The Demo Play Modes

If you play the demo as described above, you’ll hear all 21 demo songs, one after another. Note that the demo

songs are arranged into 7 groups of three songs each. By selecting an appropriate play mode, you can also play back

all the songs in sequence, in random order, or a single specified song.

The Demonstration

Exit When Done.............................................................................................................................................................................

Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT]

button to exit from the demo mode and return to the

normal play-mode display when you’ve finished

playing the demo songs.

DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI

DEMO

EXIT

V Start & Stop Playback as Required.........................................................................................................................

Press the START LCD button to start playback of

the selected demo song(s). Press the STOP LCD

button when you want to stop playback.

C Turn the Repeat Mode ON or OFF....

Use the REP. LCD dial to turn repeat playback

ON or OFF as required (when ON, the selected song

or sequence of songs will be repeated until the STOP

LCD button is pressed)

Z Select a Play Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................

With demo playback stopped, use any of the

three LCD dials under PLAY MODE on the display

to select one of the available play modes.

ALL SONGS All 21 demo songs are played back in

sequence.

RANDOM All 21 demo songs are played back in

random order. This is the default mode.

SINGLE SONG Only the selected song is played.

X Select a Song ..................................................................................................................................................................................

If you’ve selected the SINGLE SONG play

mode, press the LCD button corresponding to the

demo group you want to play (DANCE, ROCK, etc.)

and use the same LCD button to select the desired

song (a new song within the group is selected each

time it is pressed). If you’ve selected the ALL

SONGS or RANDOM play mode, you can use the

LCD buttons to select the first song to be played

back. You can also use either of the LCD dials under

SONG on the display to select any of the 21 demo

songs.

The PSR-6000 Display & Help Function

The Display & Multi-function Controls

■ The [MIXER] Button..................................................................................................................................................................

The lower section of the normal play mode

display, shown above, provides individual volume

controls for the PSR-6000’s rhythm, bass, chord 1,

chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 parts. This is

essentially a “mixer” that you will use the achieve

the best overall balance for your musical needs. The

mixer controls will disappear when functions which

have different displays are selected, but can be

instantly recalled without exiting from the current

display mode by pressing the [MIXER] button.

Pressing the [MIXER] button a second time (or the

[EXIT] button) causes the mixer controls to disap-

pear.

The PSR-6000 makes general operation and program-

ming easier than ever with a large backlit LCD display

panel and multi-function controls. The 8 LCD buttons —

four on either side of the display panel — and 8 LCD dials

below the display perform the function indicated by the

adjacent section of the display. In the example display

shown here, for example, the two LCD dials immediately

below TEMPO on the display can be used to adjust the

tempo (in this case both dials perform the same function).

In the same way, the LCD button immediately to the right

of KEY VELOCITY on the display is used to turn key

velocity ON or OFF.

MIXER

LIST HOLD

The PSR-6000 Display & Help Function

■ The [LIST HOLD] Button......................................................................................................................................................

When selecting voices (page 13) or accompani-

ment styles (page 21), the voice or style list will

appear on the display, but will automatically disap-

pear after a few seconds if no selections are made.

The voice/style list can be kept on the display for as

long as required by pressing the [LIST HOLD]

button so that its LED lights. Press [LIST HOLD]

a second time (the LED will go out) to disengage the

list hold function.

NOTES

• If the [LIST HOLD] button is engaged when the voice

or style list is not showing, the list will not appear even

when a voice or style group button is pressed.

If you’re ever in doubt about a display or button, the

PSR-6000 HELP function is available. Simply press the

[HELP/LANGUAGE] button to get information about

the current display, or press [HELP/LANGUAGE] and

then any panel button for information about that button

and its function. If more that one help display page is

available for the selected topic, use the [

] and [ ]

LCD buttons to change pages. Help is provided in five

languages — English, German, French, Spanish, and

Italian — that you can select by using any of the LCD

dials.

Exit from the HELP function by pressing either the

[HELP/LANGUAGE] or [EXIT] button.

NOTES

• The HELP function will be automatically exited if a disk is

inserted or ejected.

The Help Function

HELP/

LANGUAGE

EXITFUNCTIONCONTRAST

■ The [CONTRAST] Control..................................................................................................................................................

The PSR-6000 display panel is a liquid-crystal

type which can be easier or more difficult to read

from different angles. Use the [CONTRAST] con-

trol to set the display for optimum legibility at your

viewing angle.

CONTRAST HELP/

LANGUAGE

EXITFUNCTION

MIXER

LIST HOLD

■ Before You Begin

Before playing your PSR-6000 for the first time,

it might be a good idea to re-initialize it to the

original factory settings just in case these have been

changed at some point before you receive the instru-

ment. To do this, turn the [POWER] switch ON

while holding the [EXIT] and [DEMO] buttons.

When the display shown to the right appears, use

the LCD dials to select the language you want the

HELP text and messages to be displayed in, then

press the OK LCD button.

CAUTION

• When the above initialization procedure is carried

out, all sequencer and custom accompaniment

data will also be initialized and therefore lost!

Z Turn Power On and Set Initial Volume Levels...............................................................................................

Press the [POWER] button to turn the power

ON, and set the [MASTER VOLUME] control

about half way toward its highest setting. Also make

sure that the RHY, BASS, CHD2, CHD1, ORC2,

and ORC1 volume levels on the LCD are set to their

maximum “100” levels (use the corresponding LCD

dials to set these volume levels if necessary). You

can set the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the

most comfortable overall volume level after begin-

ning to play.

NOTES

• No sound will be produced if all volume levels other

than the [MASTER VOLUME] control are set to their

minimum values.

X Select the Orchestration .....................................................................................................................................................

ORCH.

2 1

ORCH.

2+1

ORCHESTRATION

ORCH.

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

The PSR-6000 has three orchestration modes,

selected by the corresponding ORCHESTRATION

buttons. The corresponding ORCHESTRATION LED

will light.

Selecting & Playing Voices

Playing the PSR-6000

MIN

MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

POWER

EXIT

DEMO

ORCH. 1 In this mode a single voice — the ORCH. 1 voice — can be played across the entire keyboard.

ORCH. 2+1 This is a “dual” mode in which two voices — ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 — can be played simultaneously

across the entire keyboard.

ORCH. 2v1 This is a “split” mode in which the ORCH. 2 voice is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard

(to the left of the “split point” — see “NOTES” below), while the ORCH. 1 voice is played on the right-

hand section of the keyboard.

Right-hand Section

Left-hand Section

Split Point (F#2)

• The lowest key on the keyboard is C1.

NOTES

• The split point for the PSR-6000 is initially set at F

This means that when the “ORCH. 2

1” mode is

selected, the ORCH. 2 voice will be played by all keys

to the left of and including F

2, while the ORCH. 1 voice

will be played on all keys to the right of F

2. You can

change the split point to any key desired as described

on page 16.

• Since two voices are played simultaneously in the dual

and split modes, the total number of notes that can be

played on the keyboard at the same time is reduced.

• When the “ORCH.2+1” mode is selected and the same

voice is selected for both ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2, the

sound may be slightly different from the normal voice.

• When the “ORCH.2

1” mode is selected, the ORCH.

2 voice will automatically be transposed up one octave.

C Select a Voice or Voices........................................................................................................................................................

ORCHESTRA VOICE

WOODWIND

PIANO/E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN/

ACCORDION

BASS

STRINGS/CHOIR SYNTH

WORLD/

PERCUSSIVE

BRASS

DUAL VOICE/

SOUND

EFFECT

ORCH. 1

ORCH. 2

VOICE PART

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM VOICE

MALLET DRUMS

410

511

612

Before selecting a preset voice, make sure that

the ORCHESTRA VOICE control section [PRE-

SET] button LED is lit (if it isn’t press the [PRE-

SET] button so that it does light).

The PSR-6000 has 128 preset voices organized

in 12 voice groups (see page 116 for a complete

voice list).

Press the [ORCH. 1] or [ORCH. 2] VOICE

PART button, depending on which voice you want

to select. The corresponding VOICE PART LED

will light.

Use the voice group buttons to select the group

from which you want to select a voice. The corre-

sponding voice display will appear.

NOTES

• The display will automatically revert to the main display

after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not

engaged (page 11).

Playing the PSR-6000

ORCHESTRA VOICE

WOODWIND

PIANO/E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN/

ACCORDION

BASS

STRINGS/CHOIR SYNTH

WORLD/

PERCUSSIVE

BRASS

DUAL VOICE/

SOUND

EFFECT

ORCH. 1

ORCH. 2

VOICE PART

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM VOICE

MALLET DRUMS

410

511

612

▼

Use the PAGE LCD dials the select the page

containing the voice you want if more than one page

is available, then press the LCD button correspond-

ing to the desired voice. You can also use either of

the SELECT LCD dials to select any of the voices

within the selected group.

V Play & Adjust Volume .............................................................................................................................................................

You can now play the selected voice or voices

with the selected orchestration. Use the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume

level, and the ORC1 and ORC2 LCD dials can be

used to set the desired balance between the ORCH.

1 and ORCH. 2 voices when either the dual or split

orchestration mode is used.

NOTES

• Voices in the DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT group

are actually combinations of two voices, so the total

number of simultaneous notes that can be played when

these voices are selected is less than when any of the

other voices are selected.

Keyboard Percussion

When either of the DRUMS voices is selected —

Drum Kit or Pop Drum Kit, you can play 59 different

drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The

drums and percussion instruments played by the various

keys are marked by symbols above the keys. Some of the

instruments in the Drum Kit and Pop Drum Kit voices

sound different even though they have the same name,

while others are essentially the same.

Playing the PSR-6000

NOTES

• The Transpose, Tune, Sustain, Harmony, Left Hold, Modu-

lation, and Octave Change functions do not affect the key-

board percussion sound.

• The pitch bend wheel can be used to bend the pitch of the

keyboard percussion voices to create unique musical ef-

fects, but it has little effect on some percussion sounds.

• See page 118 for a complete listing of the keyboard percus-

sion drum instrument assignments.

USER SET Voice Assignment

The PSR-6000 USER SET voice selection mode lets you assign any 12 voices — preset or custom (page 13, 77)

— to the 12 voice select buttons so you can select them directly without having to select a category, page, and then

a voice. This is particularly useful for the performer who want direct access to the voices he needs for a song or set.

Playing the PSR-6000

X Select a Voice Button..............................................................................................................................................................

Press the voice group button to which you want

to assign a voice.

Z Select the USER SET Mode .............................................................................................................................................

Press the [USER SET] button so that its indica-

tor lights. The USER SET voice display will appear.

NOTES

• The display will automatically revert to the main display

after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not

engaged (page 11).

C Select a Voice ..................................................................................................................................................................................

Use the PAGE LCD dials, the SELECT LCD

dials, and the LCD buttons as required to select the

voice you want to assign to the currently selected

voice button. To assign a custom voice, press the

[CUSTOM VOICE] button so that its indicator

lights (when the CUSTOM VOICE LED is off the

preset voices are assigned).

That’s all there is to it, now the assigned voice

will instantly be recalled anytime you press the

same voice button while the USER SET mode is

engaged. Voice assignments can be changed at any

time in the same way.

ORCHESTRA VOICE

WOODWIND

PIANO/E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN/

ACCORDION

BASS

STRINGS/CHOIR SYNTH

WORLD/

PERCUSSIVE

BRASS

DUAL VOICE/

SOUND

EFFECT

ORCH. 1

ORCH. 2

VOICE PART

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM VOICE

MALLET DRUMS

410

511

612

ORCHESTRA VOICE

WOODWIND

PIANO/E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN/

ACCORDION

BASS

STRINGS/CHOIR SYNTH

WORLD/

PERCUSSIVE

BRASS

DUAL VOICE/

SOUND

EFFECT

ORCH. 1

ORCH. 2

VOICE PART

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM VOICE

MALLET DRUMS

410

511

612

Changing the Split Point

The PSR-6000 split point applies to both the ORCH. 2v1 split play mode, described in this section, and Auto

Bass Chord accompaniment described on page 19. The current split point is indicated on the display by the triangular

split marker (t) and the “split” in the graphic keyboard when the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected.

Here’s how you can change the split point to suit your own playing requirements.

Z Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD Button .....................................................................................

Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD

button. The ABC MODE and SPLIT POINT func-

tion displays will appear.

Playing the PSR-6000

X Set the Split Point.......................................................................................................................................................................

The split point can be set in two ways: either use

the SPLIT POINT LCD dials, or press the desired

key on the keyboard while holding the DIRECT

SETTING LCD button (or vice-versa). The new

split point will be indicated on the graphic keyboard

in the LCD.

C Return to the Main Display When Done..............................................................................................................

Press the VOLUME LCD button to return to the

main display when done.

Press a key while holding the DIRECT

SETTING LCD button.

Transposition, Tuning,

Octave Change, & Key Velocity

The most important and fundamental adjustment for any musical

instrument is tuning. The TRANSPOSE, TUNING, and OCTAVE

CHANGE functions described below let you control the pitch of the

PSR-6000 in a number of ways.

The Key Velocity function has also been included in this section

because it affects the way the PSR-6000 responds to notes played on

the keyboard.

TRANSPOSE & TUNE

These functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-6000 to be transposed up or down in semitone increments,

and fine-tuned in 0.5 Hertz increments.

Z Press the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD Button .....................................................................................................

Select the transpose and tune functions from the

normal play mode display by pressing the TRANS-

POSE/TUNE LCD button.

X Set the Transposition and/or Tuning As Required...................................................................................

Use the TRANSPOSE LCD dials to set the

desired degree of transposition, and the TUNE LCD

dials to set the desired degree of tuning.

The transpose range is from -6 to +6, allowing

a maximum upward or downward transposition of

1/2-octave. A setting of “0” produces the normal

pitch.

The tuning range is from 427.5 Hertz to

452.5 Hertz, adjustable in 0.5-Hertz increments.

A3 = 440.0 Hertz is “normal” pitch.

C Return to the Main Display When Done..............................................................................................................

Press the VOLUME LCD button to exit from the

transpose and tune functions and return to the main

display.

OCTAVE CHANGE

Transposition, Tuning, Octave Change, & Key Velocity

KEY VELOCITY

This function allows the ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 voices to be independently transposed up or down by one octave.

The OCTAVE LCD button to the right of the ORCH.1.

voice name changes the octave of the ORCH.1. voice,

while the OCTAVE LCD button to the right of the ORCH.2

voice affects the ORCH.2. voice. Pressing either of these

buttons changes the corresponding octave setting to “+1”,

“-1”, and then “0”, in sequence. “+1” shifts the voice up

one octave “-1” shifts the voice down one octave, and

“0” sets the voice to its normal octave.

NOTES

• Some voices may suddenly shift octaves when played at the

extreme ends of the keyboard if they are set to a lower or

higher octave than normal. This can also occur when the

PITCH BEND wheel is used on extremely low or high notes.

• If you change the transpose, octave change, or tuning

settings while playing one or more notes on the keyboard,

the new transpose and octave change settings will take

effect from the next notes played while tune settings take

effect immediately.

The key velocity function turns the PSR-6000’s key-

board velocity response on or off. Normally, key velocity

should be turned ON to allow normal dynamic control via

the keyboard (i.e. the harder the keys are played, the

louder the sound). In some cases, however, you might

want to turn key velocity OFF. For example, most organs

have no keyboard velocity response, so key velocity can

be turned OFF for greater realism when playing organ

type voices. Key Velocity can also be turned off to create

a constant-volume sound with any voice.

Use the KEY VELOCITY LCD button to turn key

velocity ON or OFF as required.

Using the Accompaniment Section

The PSR-6000 has 50+1 different accompaniment “styles” (includ-

ing preset IA style “New Age (No.12 button)”)that can be used to pro-

vide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. The PSR-

6000’s sophisticated Auto Bass Chord accompaniment system can

provide automated bass and chord backing that is perfectly matched

to the selected accompaniment style.

Z Turn ABC ON....................................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button so that

its indicator lights, thereby turning the ABC mode

on.

NOTES

• The maximum number of notes that can be played

simultaneously on the PSR-6000 keyboard is reduced

when the Auto Bass Chord feature is used.

INTERACTIVE

ACCOMPANIMENT

AUTO BASS

CHORD

VERSE

X Select the Desired ABC Mode.......................................................................................................................................

Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD

button to select the ABC MODE and SPLIT POINT

display, then use the ABC MODE LCD dials to

select the FINGERED CHORD, SINGLE FIN-

GER, or MANUAL BASS mode. If you select the

MANUAL BASS mode, the GRP. VOICE # LCD

dials can be used to specify the bass voice to be used.

Press the VOLUME LCD button to return to the

main display when done.

The FINGERED CHORD, SINGLE FINGER,

and MANUAL BASS modes function as follows:

● FINGERED CHORD

This is the default ABC mode. The Fingered

Chord mode lets you finger your own chords on the

left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the

left of and including the split-point key — normally

F#2), while the PSR-6000 supplies appropriately

orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompani-

ment in the selected style.

The Fingered Chord mode will accept the chord

types listed below (notes in parentheses may be

omitted).

Using the Accompaniment Section

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Major [M] ............................................................ 1-3-5*

Minor [m] ...........................................................1-b3-5*

Major seventh [M7] ....................................... 1-3-(5)-7*

Major sixth [6]....................................................1-3-5-6

Suspended fourth [sus4] .................................... 1-4-5*

Minor sixth [m6]............................................... 1-b3-5-6

Minor seventh [m7] .....................................1-b3-(5)-b7

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] ................ 1-b3-b5-b7

Minor major seventh [mM7] ........................ 1-b3-(5)-7*

Seventh [7].................................................. 1-3-(5)-b7*

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] .............................. 1-3-b5-b7

Seventh augmented [7aug]..........................1-3-#5-b7*

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] ............... 1-4-5-b7*

Seventh ninth [7(9)].................................. 1-2-3-(5)-b7*

Minor ninth [m(9)] ............................................ 1-2-b3-5

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] ................... 1-2-b3-(5)-b7*

Major ninth [M(9)] ..............................................1-2-3-5

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] .......................1-2-3-(5)-7*

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] ........ 1-2-b3-(5)-7*

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] ................... 1-b2-3-(5)-b7*

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] .................. 1-3-b5-7*

Augmented [aug]................................................ 1-3-#5

Diminished [dim]..........................................1-b3-b5-(6)

* Chords marked with an asterisk (*) can be played in

any inversion (i.e. the root of the chord does not have

to be the lowest note played).

* If you play any three adjacent keys (including black

keys), the chord sound will be cancelled and only the

rhythm instruments will continue playing (CHORD

CANCEL function).

● SINGLE FINGER

Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to

produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment

using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords

by pressing a minimum number of keys on the left-

hand section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord

fingerings described below are used:

■ For a major chord, press the root key only.

■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root

key and a black key to its left.

■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and a white key to its left.

■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press

the root key and both a white and black key to its

left.

CGF

Example for “C” chords

CmM

aug

Csus

C sus

Caug

(9)

Cdim

(9)

CmM

(9)

(b9)

( )

(9)

Using the Accompaniment Section

● MANUAL BASS

The Manual Bass mode provides an alternative

to the normal split keyboard. The bass voice as-

signed to the left-hand keyboard section is mono-

phonic, while a polyphonic ORCH. 1 voice is played

on the upper section of the keyboard. You can select

any of the PSR-6000’s normal voices to play on the

lower section of the keyboard — of course, it’s

normal to choose a bass voices for the left hand. No

automatic bass and chord accompaniment is pro-

duced, although the Interactive Accompaniment fea-

ture (page 27) does affect the rhythm sound.

NOTES

• Voices created using the PSR-6000 Custom Voice

feature (page 77) can also be selected for use with the

Manual Bass mode.

• The ABC mode cannot be changed when the sequencer

ACCOMP. track contains data.

Before selecting a preset style, make sure that the

STYLE control section [PRESET] button indicator

is lit (if it isn’t press the [PRESET] button so that it

does light).

The PSR-6000 has 50+1 preset styles (including

preset IA style “New Age (No.12 button)”) organ-

ized in 12 groups (see the “Style List” on page 119).

Use the style group buttons to select the group

from which you want to select a style. The corre-

sponding style display will appear.

NOTES

• The display will automatically revert to the main display

after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not

engaged (page 11).

Press the LCD button corresponding to the de-

sired style. You can also use either of the SELECT

LCD dials to select any of the styles within the

selected group.

Although you can select the ORCH. 1 voice you

intend to play on the right-hand section of the

keyboard and the ORCH. 2 voice if you use the split

mode, the PSR-6000 automatically determines the

voices to be used for the accompaniment bass and

chords according the accompaniment style you se-

lect.

NOTES

• Also see “USER SET Style Assignment” on page 26,

and “Custom Style” on page 62.

C Select a Style...................................................................................................................................................................................

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

410

511

612

Using the Accompaniment Section

V Set the Tempo .................................................................................................................................................................................

When you select a different style while the ac-

companiment is not playing, the “default” tempo for

that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed

on the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If

the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is

maintained even if you select a different style.

You can change the tempo to any value between

40 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the

TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons, or the TEMPO LCD

dials. This can be done either before the accompani-

ment is started or while it is playing. To use the [–]

and [+] buttons, press either button briefly to decre-

ment or increment the tempo value by one, or hold

the button for continuous decrementing or

incrementing.

NOTE

• The default tempo for the selected style can be re-

called at any time by pressing both the TEMPO [-] and

[+] buttons simultaneously.

B Start the Accompaniment..................................................................................................................................................

There are several ways to start the accompani-

ment:

● Straight start: Press the [START/RE-START]

button. If you press the [START/RE-START]

button, the rhythm will begin playing immedi-

ately without bass and chord accompaniment.

NOTE

• If you press the [START/RE-START] button while the

accompaniment is playing, playback will immediately

return to the first beat of the current accompaniment

pattern, making it possible to create measures with

odd time signatures.

• It is also possible to select one of the several sections

available prior to a straight start — refer to “7. Select

Sections as Required,” below.

● Start with an introduction followed by the

VERSE 1 section: press the [INTRO 1] but-

ton.

● Start with an introduction followed by the

VERSE 2 section: press the [INTRO 2] but-

ton.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOPSOLO

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

TEMPO

+–

Using the Accompaniment Section

● Start with an introduction followed by the CHO-

RUS 1 section: press the [INTRO 3] button.

● Synchronized start: Any of the above start types can

be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the

left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of

and including the split-point key — normally F#2) by

first pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button. Press-

ing the [SYNCHRO START] button alone causes a

straight start to occur when the first note or chord is

played. Press [SYNCHRO START] and then the ap-

propriate INTRO button for a synchronized introduc-

tion start. The first dot of the TEMPO display will flash

at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode

has been selected.

NOTES

• If you press the [SYNCHRO START] button while the accom-

paniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the

synchro start mode will be engaged.

• The four LED dots of the TEMPO display provide a visual

indication of the selected tempo as shown to the right. Several

LEDs will flash simultaneously on the first beat of odd-

numbered measures in all time signatures.

• A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into the rear panel FOOT

SWITCH jack can also be used to start the accompaniment if

the appropriate function is assigned to the footswitch using the

FOOT SWITCH SELECT function described on page 88.

N Play On the Left-hand Section Of the Keyboard.......................................................................................

As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-6000 can

“recognize” on the left-hand section of the keyboard in the

FINGERED CHORD mode (see fingering chart on page

122) or an abbreviated chord in the SINGLE FINGER

mode, the PSR-6000 will automatically begin to play the

chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate

bass line. The accompaniment will continue playing even

if you release the left-hand keys.

If the MANUAL BASS mode is selected only the rhythm

accompaniment will play automatically, and selected bass

voice can be played on the left-hand section of the key-

board.

NOTES

• The appropriate chord and bass note will sound if you play in

the left-hand section of the keyboard while the ABC function is

on but the accompaniment is stopped. Please note that the

Left Hold function (page 11) cannot be applied to these chord

and bass notes.

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOPSOLO

Melody Section

ABC Section

Split Point

TEMPO

4/4 Time

3/4 Time

1st Beat

2nd Beat

3rd Beat

4th Beat

▼

Using the Accompaniment Section

M Select Sections as Required...........................................................................................................................................

Each accompaniment style has a number of sections:

VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, and CHORUS 2. The

VERSE and CHORUS sections further have more com-

plex SOLO sections. There is also an ENDING section

which is described in step >. The INTRO section can be

used to start the accompaniment as described in the preceding

step. The remaining sections — VERSE 1, VERSE 2,

CHORUS 1, CHORUS 2, and the SOLO sections of these

— can be selected manually by pressing the corresponding

section button. It is also possible to select the section that

will follow the INTRO by pressing the appropriate section

button while the INTRO is playing or while the intro

synchro start mode is engaged.

NOTES

• Some INTRO, ENDING, and SOLO sections have their own

chord progressions which play in the current accompaniment

key — the key is shown below the style name in the LCD

display.

● The SOLO Sections

Although the SOLO sections can be selected manually,

they can also be activated automatically when INTERAC-

TIVE ACCOMPANIMENT is engaged (see page 27). If an

accompaniment is playing and nothing is played on the

keyboard for several measures, the SOLO mode is auto-

matically engaged to “fill out” the accompaniment. When

SOLO is on, not only are the sections more complex, but

they will automatically cycle (VERSE 1 m VERSE 2 m

CHORUS 1 m CHORUS 2 m VERSE 1, etc.). If the

SOLO mode is on, it will be automatically disengaged after

you begin playing on the keyboard.

This automatic switching of the solo mode can be

turned off via the Auto Solo function described on page 27.

NOTES

• The SOLO section will be automatically disengaged if it is

turned on prior to starting the accompaniment with an intro-

duction.

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

< Use Fill-ins..........................................................................................................................................................................................

The PSR-6000 provides two types of automatic breaks

or “fill-ins.”

Using the Accompaniment Section

● FILL IN j: Press the [FILL IN j] button to produce

a short fill and return to the same section.

● FILL IN n: Press the [FILL IN n] button to produce

a fill and then go to the corresponding chorus or verse:

VERSE 1 n CHORUS 1

VERSE 2 n CHORUS 2

It is possible to change the section that will play after

the fill-in by pressing the appropriate section button while

the fill-in is playing. If you hold one of the FILL IN buttons,

the fill-in will repeat until the button is released.

NOTES

• A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into the rear panel FOOT

SWITCH jack can also be used to activate fill-ins if the

appropriate function is assigned to the footswitch using the

FOOT SWITCH SELECT function described on page 88.

• The transitions between the verse and chorus are different

when SOLO is ON.

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

> Stop the Accompaniment ..................................................................................................................................................

The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by

pressing the [STOP] button. Press the [ENDING/rit.]

button if you want to go to the ending section and then stop.

Press the [ENDING/rit.] button while the ending section

is playing to produce a “ritardando” ending — i.e. the

tempo gradually slows down during the ending.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

■ Rhythm-only Accompaniment......................................................................................................................................

The AUTO BASS CHORD mode can be turned off at

any time — leaving the rhythm accompaniment only — by

pressing the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button so that its

indicator goes out.

INTERACTIVE

ACCOMPANIMENT

AUTO BASS

CHORD

VERSE

■ Accompaniment Volume......................................................................................................................................................

Use the RHY, BASS, CHD1, and CHD2 LCD dials

controls to set the best balance between the corresponding

accompaniment parts, and the optimum volume of the

accompaniment parts in relation to the ORCH. 1 and

ORCH. 2 voices.

Using the Accompaniment Section

USER SET Style Assignment

The PSR-6000 USER SET style selection mode lets you assign any 12 styles to the 12 style group buttons so you

can select them directly without having to select a category, page, and then a style. This is particularly useful for the

performer who want direct access to the styles he needs for a song or set.

Z Select the USER SET Mode .............................................................................................................................................

Press the STYLE control section [USER SET]

button so that its indicator lights. The USER SET

style display will appear.

NOTES

• The display will automatically revert to the main display

after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not

engaged (page 11).

X Select a Style Button...............................................................................................................................................................

Press the style group button to which you want to

assign a style.

C Select a Style...................................................................................................................................................................................

Use the PAGE LCD dials, the SELECT LCD

dials, and the LCD buttons as required to select the

style you want to assign to the currently selected

style button.

Now the assigned style will instantly be recalled

anytime you press the same style button while the

USER SET mode is engaged. Style assignments can

be changed at any time in the same way.

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

410

511

612

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

410

511

612

Using the Accompaniment Section

Interactive Accompaniment

Press the [INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT] button

so that its indicator lights to activate the Interactive Accompa-

niment mode. In this mode the PSR-6000 uses advanced tech-

nology to monitor the way you are playing on the keyboard and

automatically varies the rhythm or ABC accompaniment ac-

cordingly.

If you are playing with the VERSE 1 section, for example,

and you begin to build up the musical excitement on the key-

board (i.e. play more notes, faster, and/or harder) the PSR-6000

will automatically switch to the VERSE 2 section to better

support what you are playing. On the other hand, if you play

more mellow right-hand lines the PSR-6000 will automatically

“shift down” to the VERSE 1 section. The same applies to the

CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 sections.

NOTES

• The “sensitivity” of the Interactive Accompaniment mode can be

adjusted via the INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT Sensitivity

function described on page 89. Also note that automatic switching

between VERSE 1 and VERSE 2 or CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 will

not occur if the Interactive Accompaniment MUTE mode is selected

— see page 89.

■ Auto Solo .............................................................................................................................................................................................

When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON (ON is

the default setting — see page 89), the SOLO accompani-

ment sections will automatically be activated if nothing is

played on the keyboard for a few measures. Further, the

solo sections will automatically be de-activated from the

end of the current phrase after keyboard performance is

resumed.

ABC/IA Accompaniment Flow Diagram

INTERACTIVE

ACCOMPANIMENT

AUTO BASS

CHORD

VERSE

FILL INj

VERSE 1

VERSE 2

CHORUS 1

CHORUS 2

VERSE 1 SOLO

VERSE 2 SOLO

CHORUS 1 SOLO

CHORUS 2 SOLO

FILL INn

ENDING

FILL INj

INTRO 1

INTRO 2

INTRO 3

(ENDING 1)

(ENDING 2)

(ENDING 3)

VERSE 1

VERSE 2

CHORUS 1

CHORUS 2

Using the Accompaniment Section

Using Disk Styles on Optional Data Disks

Use the following procedure to assign the desired disk style from an optional Yamaha style disk to the [FOR

DISK IA] style button on the PSR-6000 panel.

Z Insert the Data Disk..................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the data disk into the PSR-6000 disk drive

(located below the right end of the keyboard) with

the disk shutter facing the drive slot and the label

side facing upward.

X Press [FROM DISK]...................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [FROM DISK] button. The display

shown to the right should appear.

C Select a Style File ..............................................

Use the left st LCD dials to select I/A-SET,

then use the right st dials to select the style you

want to load.

V Press the EXECUTE LCD Button ......

Press the EXECUTE LCD button. The “Are

you sure ?” confirmation prompt will appear.

Press the YES LCD button to begin loading the

selected file (or NO to cancel). “Do not remove

disk! ” will appear on the display while the data is

loading. “Completed.” will appear briefly when

the data has been successfully loaded, and the nor-

mal play mode will then be automatically engaged.

NOTES

• If an error message appears during the disk load

procedure, refer to page 111 for details.

• Disk style data that has been loaded into the PSR-

6000 can be saved to a different floppy disk. See page

95 for details.

■ Selecting a DISK Style...........................................................................................................................................................

Once loaded, the disk style can be selected and

used in the same way as the internal styles by

pressing the [FOR DISK IA] button.

NOTES

• The preset IA style “New Age” can be recalled by using

the “F7: RECALL PRESET DATA” function described

on page 101.

DISK IN USE

FROM

DISK

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

511

612

One Touch Setting

The PSR-6000’s 50+1 internal styles (including preset IA style

“New Age”) each have 4 different preset “panel setups” that can be

instantly selected via the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons — [VERSE

A], [VERSE B], [CHORUS A], and [CHORUS B] — to create different

musical textures. The ONE TOUCH SETTING setups include settings

for all of the following parameters:

X Adjust The Settings If Necessary ..............................................................................................................................

Any of the parameters set by the ONE TOUCH SET-

TING feature can be adjusted to create the desired sound

after a ONE TOUCH SETTING setup has been selected.

If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE param-

eter is turned ON and you change a ONE TOUCH SET-

TING setting, the corresponding ONE TOUCH SETTING

indicator will flash to indicate that a change has been made.

• Chord 2 Volume

• Rhythm Volume

• Orchestra 1 Octave

• Orchestra 2 Octave

• Harmony On/Off

• Harmony Type

• Left Hold On/Off

• Orchestration

• Orchestra 1 Voice

• Orchestra 2 Voice

• Orchestra 1 Volume

• Orchestra 2 Volume

• Bass Volume

• Chord 1 Volume

• Sustain On/Off

• Sustain Part Select

• Pitch Bend Select

• Reverb On/Off

• Reverb Type & Depth

• Effect On/Off

• Effect Type & Depth

Z Engage the One Touch Setting Feature..............................................................................................................

The ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be used either

while an accompaniment is playing or prior to starting an

accompaniment by simply pressing the appropriate ONE

TOUCH SETTING button so that its indicator lights:

[VERSE A] for a soft, mellow feel; [VERSE B] for a

slightly more active feel; [CHORUS A] for an even more

lively sound; [CHORUS B] for maximum presence and

animation.

If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE param-

eter (see page 89) is turned ON, selecting a different

accompaniment style while ONE TOUCH SETTING is

engaged will cause the ONE TOUCH SETTING settings

for that style to be selected automatically.

O BASS

HORD

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

–

O BASS

HORD

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

–

One Touch Setting

C Memorize the One Touch Settings If You Like..............................................................................................

Your One Touch Settings can be memorized by

pressing the VERSE [A] or [B] or CHORUS [A] or

[B] button while holding the Panel Registration

[MEMORY] button.

NOTES

• The initial One Touch Settings can be recalled by using

the RECALL PRESET DATA function described on

page 101.

• One Touch Settings can also be stored in the Panel

Registration memory.

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

MEMORY

FREEZE

V Turn One Touch Setting Off..............................................................................................................................................

ONE TOUCH SETTING is turned OFF by pressing the

currently engaged [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button a

second time so that its indicator goes out. If the ONE

TOUCH SETTING indicator is flashing because changes

have been made to the panel settings (and the SYNCHRO

CHANGE parameter is ON), pressing any [ONE TOUCH

SETTING] button twice turns ONE TOUCH SETTING

off.

NOTES

• If you turn the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter described on

page 89 ON, the ONE TOUCH SETTING setup will automati-

cally switch according to changes in the accompaniment

section.

• ONE TOUCH SETTING cannot be used with accompaniment

styles created using the Custom Accompaniment feature

described on page 62. The currently lit ONE TOUCH SET-

TING LED will automatically go out if a Custom Style is

selected.

• ONE TOUCH SETTING setup data can be saved to floppy

disk. See page 95 for details.

O BASS

HORD

ONE TOUCH SETTING

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

–

VERSE

ABAB

CHORUSVERSE CHORUS

Expression & Effects

■ Harmony................................................................................................................................................................................................

The harmony effect can only be used when the AUTO BASS CHORD

accompaniment mode is selected. Press the [HARMONY] button to

turn the HARMONY effect on or off. When HARMONY is on (indicator

lit), playing single notes or chords on the right-hand section of the

keyboard produces automatic harmony matched to the accompaniment

chords. The type of harmony produced can be selected via the HAR-

MONY TYPE function described on page 90.

NOTES

• The harmony is based on the top note of chords.

• Slight tempo delays may occur when harmony is used in conjunction with the

ABC Fingered Chord mode.

■ Sustain....................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the sustain effect on or off. When

on (indicator lit), extra sustain is applied to the selected voice. If a

footswitch connected to the rear-panel SUSTAIN jack is pressed in

order to apply sustain, however, the panel SUSTAIN function will be

automatically turned off.

NOTES

• Sustain can be applied to the ORCH. 1 voice only, the ORCH. 2 voice only,

or both voices via the SUSTAIN PEDAL ASSIGN function described on page

87.

■ Reverb.....................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [REVERB] button to apply the reverb effect specified by

the REVERB TYPE and DEPTH functions described on page 84 to the

ORCH. 1 and 2 voices as well as the chord and rhythm accompaniment

sound. The [REVERB] button alternately turns the reverb effect on

(indicator lit) or off (indicator out).

NOTES

• Reverb type changes will apply to the note currently being played, while

reverb ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next note played.

■ Effects .....................................................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [EFFECT] button to apply the effect specified by the

EFFECT TYPE and DEPTH functions described on page 85 to the

ORCH. 1 and 2 voices as well as the chord accompaniment sound. The

[EFFECT] button alternately turns the effect on (indicator lit) or off

(indicator out).

NOTES

• Effect type changes will apply to the note currently being played, while effect

ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next note played.

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

Expression & Effects

■ Left Hold................................................................................................................................................................................................

This function causes the left-hand (ORCH. 2) voice to be held even

when the keys are released when using the AUTO BASS CHORD and

ORCH. 2v1 orchestration modes. Non-decaying voices such as strings

are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more

slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).

NOTES

• The LEFT HOLD function works only while AUTO BASS CHORD accompa-

niment is running. Further, LEFT HOLD is temporarily disengaged during

ENDING sections and INTRO or SOLO sections that have their own chord

progressions.

• LEFT HOLD will not function during Multi Pad (Chord Pad) playback or

Sequencer ACCOMP. track playback even if the LEFT HOLD indicator is lit.

■ Pitch Bend Wheel........................................................................................................................................................................

The PITCH BEND wheel to the left of the keyboard lets you bend

the pitch of notes played on the keyboard up or down. Normal pitch is

restored when the PITCH BEND wheel is released. The maximum pitch

bend range is preset for each voice, but can be set as required for custom

voices by using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT feature described on page

77.

NOTES

• Pitch bend can be applied to the ORCH. 1 voice only, the ORCH. 2 voice only,

or both voices via the PITCH BEND WHEEL ASSIGN function described on

page 87. Also, pitch bend is applied to harmony notes on the basis of the

ORCH. 1 settings.

• The pitch bend wheel may have no effect when applied to notes at the upper

and lower extremes of the keyboard if a CUSTOM VOICE is used. Also,

sudden pitch changes may occur.

• Pitch bend cannot be applied to the ORCH. 2 voice when AUTO BASS

CHORD is ON and the ORCH. 2

1 orchestration mode is selected.

• Pitch bend can be applied to notes from C-1 to C7 (i.e. MIDI note numbers

12 through 108). Pitch can not be bent down below the lowest note or up

above the highest note in this range.

The MODULATION/EFFECT wheel to the left of the keyboard

lets you apply amplitude/pitch modulation or effects to notes played on

the keyboard. Rolling the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel upward

(away from you) increases the modulation depth or effect. Use the

WHEEL SELECT function described on page 86 to select modulation or

effect operation. The type of effect applied when effect operation is

selected is determined by the EFFECT TYPE function described on page

85.

The modulation effect mode is preset for each voice, but can be set

for custom voices by using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT feature de-

scribed on page 77.

NOTES

• Modulation is automatically applied to some voices, while to some it cannot

be applied even if the modulation wheel is operated.

■ Modulation/Effect Wheel .....................................................................................................................................................

LEFT

HOLD

SUSTAINHARMONY REVERB EFFECT

MAX

MIN

MODULATION/

EFFECT

DOWN

PITCH BEND

MAX

MIN

MODULATION/

EFFECT

DOWN

PITCH BEND

Using the Pads

The PSR-6000 features 8 “PADs” above the keyboard that can be used in a vari-

ety of ways:

● MULTI: When the MULTI mode is selected, the 4 pads marked “PHRASE” and the 4 pads

marked “CHORD” can be used to record and play back short sequences of notes and

chords, respectively.

● PERC: In the PERC mode the pads can be used to play 8 different drum and percussion

instruments selected from the PSR-6000’s drum voices — DRUM KIT and POP

DRUM KIT.

● TEMPO: In the TEMPO mode the pads are used to vary tempo in a number of ways, giving the

PSR-6000 unprecedented capability for creative tempo variations while playing.

NOTES

• Pad data can be saved to floppy disk. See page 95 for details.

The MULTI Mode

The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4)

Each PHRASE pad can record up to approximately 160 notes played using the ORCH. 1 voice

(only the ORCH. 1 voice is recorded even if the ORCH. 2+1 orchestration mode is selected).

The recorded phrases can then be played back at any time — even while playing on the keyboard,

with or without accompaniment. The PHRASE pads record the following data:

• Voice (Orch.1)

• Note On/Off (Orch.1)

• Modulation (when Modulation is On for Orchestra 1: see page 32)

• Orchestra 1 Volume

• Sustain On/Off (when Sustain is On for Orchestra 1: see page 31)

• Pitch Bend (when Pitch Bend is On for Orchestra 1: see page 32)

• Glide On/Off (when Glide is On for Orchestra 1: see page 88)

• Octave Change (Orch. 1)

NOTES

• The data listed above is also recorded if it is received via the PSR-6000 MIDI interface (page 102).

To engage the MULTI mode, press the [MODE SELECT]

button a few times until the MULTI indicator lights.

NOTES

• Preset data is initially recorded in pads 1 through 8.

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

PAD

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

CHORD

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change a tempofasteraccel. slower rit.

87654321

■ Recording Phrases....................................................................................................................................................................

Using the Pads

ZSelect a PHRASE Pad For Recording

Press the PHRASE pad you intend to record to while holding

the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/STOP indicator will flash,

indicating that the selected pad is ready to record.

XPlay a Phrase

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the

keyboard using the ORCHESTRA 1 voice (i.e. the right-hand

section of the keyboard if the split play mode or AUTO BASS

CHORD accompaniment is engaged), and the REC/STOP indica-

tor will light continuously as long as recording continues.

NOTES

• You can record phrases while AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment

is playing or stopped. In either case the phrase will be recorded in

relation to the currently set accompaniment tempo, so it is a good idea

to record phrases while monitoring the accompaniment to ensure that

they are reproduced at an appropriate tempo when played back with

accompaniment.

CStop Recording

Press the [REC/STOP] button to stop recording when you’ve

finished playing the phrase. The [REC/STOP] button indicator

will go out when recording ends.

NOTES

• Recording will stop automatically if the PHRASE pad memory be-

comes full (approximately 160 notes per pad), or if another pad is

pressed.

■ Phrase Playback...........................................................................................................................................................................

As long as the MULTI mode is selected, any recorded phrase

can be played back simply by pressing the corresponding PHRASE

pad. The phrase will play back whether the accompaniment is

playing or not, but will always play at the currently set tempo. The

MULTI PLAYING indicator will light while the phrase plays

back, and playback will end automatically as soon as the end of

the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing

by pressing either the [REC/STOP] button or the corresponding

pad button. It is also possible to play back several phrases at the

same time.

NOTES

• Although the note data played by the phrase pads can not be recorded

by the PSR-6000 sequencer (page 49), the phrase pad events (i.e.

the fact that a pad has been pressed) can be recorded. Phrase pad

data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 96), but can not be

memorized by the Panel Registration feature (page 41).

• Use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the playback volume of

the phrase pads.

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

Using the Pads

The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8)

Each CHORD pad can record up to approximately 80 chords played on the left-hand

section of the keyboard when the AUTO BASS CHORD feature is engaged. The recorded

chords can then be played back at any time.

■ Recording Chords......................................................................................................................................................................

ZSelect a CHORD Pad For Recording

Press the CHORD pad you intend to record to while holding

the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/STOP indicator will flash,

indicating that the selected pad is ready to record. If the accompa-

niment is stopped when the CHORD pad is selected for recording,

the SYNCHRO START mode will automatically be engaged.

NOTES

• If AUTO BASS CHORD is OFF when a CHORD pad is selected for

recording, it will automatically be turned ON. Further, if the MANUAL

BASS mode is selected, the FINGERED CHORD mode will automati-

cally be selected in its place.

XPlay the Required Chords

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a chord on

the left-hand section of the keyboard, and the REC/STOP indica-

tor will light continuously as long as recording continues.

CStop Recording

Press the [REC/STOP] button or the pad being recorded to

stop recording when you’ve finished playing the chords. The

[REC/STOP] button indicator will go out when recording ends.

NOTES

• Recording will stop automatically if the CHORD pad memory be-

comes full (approximately 80 chords per pad); if another pad is

pressed; or if the accompaniment [STOP], [START/RE-START], or

[SYNCHRO START] buttons is pressed.

REC/STOP

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

REC/STOP

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

■ Chord Playback.............................................................................................................................................................................

As long as the MULTI mode is selected and an AUTO BASS

CHORD accompaniment is playing, any recorded chord se-

quence can be played back simply by pressing the corresponding

CHORD pad. The phrase will play back at the currently set

tempo. The MULTI PLAYING indicator will light while the

chord sequence plays back, and playback will end automatically

as soon as the end of the sequence is reached. Only one chord

sequence can be played at a time.

During chord pad playback the ABC indicator will go out and

the left-hand section of the keyboard plays in the same way as the

right-hand section. To indicate that the end of the chord sequence

is approaching, the MULTI PLAYING indicator flashes during

the last two measures. A chord sequence that is playing can be

stopped by pressing the same chord pad again, or by pressing the

[REC/STOP] button.

NOTES

• If you press a CHORD pad while the accompaniment is stopped or

while the AUTO BASS CHORD function is off, “Engage ABC to play

the chord pads!” will appear on the display. Also, if AUTO BASS

CHORD is on but the Manual Bass mode is selected, “Select FC or

SF mode to play the chord pads!” will appear on the display, since

chord playback will not function in the Manual Bass mode.

• Chord pad playback can be recorded by the PSR-6000 sequencer.

• Chord pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 96, 97),

but can not be memorized by the Panel Registration feature (page

41).

• Playback occurs in measure units. Playback will continue until the end

of the measure even if recording was stopped prior to the end of that

measure.

Using the Pads

MULTI PLAYING

Tap S

Tempo Change

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

■ MULTI Pad Repeat Playback ...........................................................................................................................................

If you press the button immediately to the right of the pad

[MODE SELECT] button so that the indicator above it lights

while the MULTI mode is engaged, the MULTI REPEAT function

is engaged and phrase or chord playback will repeat continuously

until the [REC/STOP] button is pressed, the same pad is pressed

a second time, or the REPEAT mode is turned off by pressing the

button to the right of the [MODE SELECT] button again. In the

last case the phrase or chord sequence will play through to the end

and then stop.

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

■ Assigning Different Instruments To the PERC Pads ............................................................................

ZPress [REC/STOP]

Press the [REC/STOP] button so that its indica-

tor lights (make sure the PERC mode is selected

first). The PERCUSSION PAD ASSIGN display

will appear, listing the percussion instruments cur-

rently assigned to the pads.

XSelect a Drum Voice

The DRUM KIT voice is automatically selected

if you press the [REC/STOP] key while in the

PERC mode and a non-drum voice is selected. Use

the DRUM KIT/POP DRUM KIT LCD button to

select the drum voice which includes the percussion

instruments you want to assign.

CAssign the Instruments

A new drum/percussion instrument is assigned

to a pad simply by playing the key corresponding to

the desired instrument while holding the drum pad

to which it is to be assigned. The reverse also works:

press the pad while holding the key. The velocity at

which you play the key (how hard you press the key

= how loud the note sounds) is also recorded to the

specified pad.

NOTES

• Percussion voices created using the CUSTOM VOICE

EDIT functions described on page 83 cannot be as-

signed to the percussion pads.

The PERC Mode

To engage the PERC mode, press the [MODE SELECT] button a few times until the

PERC indicator lights.

The 8 pads are initially programmed with the following drum and percussion

instruments which can be played via the pads when the PERC mode is selected:

1. Kick 1

2. Snare 3

3. Tom 1 Low

4. Tom 1 Mid

5. Tom 1 Hi

6. Closed Hi-Hat 1

7. Open Hi-Hat 1

8. Crash Cymbal 2

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

Using the Pads

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

TempTap StartTempo Change

321

PAD

MULTI PLAYING

PHRASE

CHORD

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change a tempofasteraccel.

654321

VPress [REC/STOP] To End Assignment

When you’re finished making instrument assignments

to the PERC pads, press the [REC/STOP] button so that its

indicator goes out.

NOTES

• Percussion pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk

(page 95, 96), but can not be memorized by the Panel

Registration feature (page 41).

■ Playing the Percussion Pads .........................................................................................................................................

The PERC pads can be played at any time — whether

an accompaniment is playing or not — as long as the PERC

mode is selected. Depending on the assigned instrument,

some pads will play continuously as long as they are held.

NOTES

• The PERC pad sounds are not affected by the PSR-6000

PITCH BEND wheel or EFFECT settings.

■ The PERC BREAK Function............................................................................................................................................

If you press the button immediately to the right of the

pad [MODE SELECT] button so that the indicator above

it lights while the PERC mode is engaged, the PERC

BREAK function is engaged — playing on the PERC pads

causes the accompaniment rhythm to stop playing so you

can create your own fill-in. The accompaniment rhythm

begins playing from the beginning of the next measure

when you stop playing the percussion pads.

The BREAK mode is turned off by pressing the button

to the right of the [MODE SELECT] button again.

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

Using the Pads

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

TempTap StartTempo Change

321

PAD

MULTI PLAYING

PHRASE

CHORD

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change a tempofasteraccel.

654321

The TEMPO Mode

To engage the TEMPO mode, press the [MODE SELECT] button a few

times until the TEMPO indicator lights.

The functions of the pads in the TEMPO mode are indicated by labels

below each pad:

● Tempo Change

If you press this pad while holding the [REC/STOP] button, the tempo at

that instant is registered in memory. The registered tempo can then be recalled

at any time, regardless of the current tempo, simply by pressing the [Tempo

Change] pad.

NOTES

• If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando (described below), the

accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [Tempo Change] value takes

effect.

● Tap Start

While the accompaniment is stopped, or during the SYNCHRO START

mode before the accompaniment is started, the [Tap Start] pad can be used

to set any desired tempo (within the PSR-6000’s 40 to 280 beats per minute

range) by simply tapping on the pad at the required tempo. Tap 4 times for an

accompaniment with a 4/4 time signature, 3 times for 3/4, and 5 times for 5/

NOTES

• If the accompaniment is started before the required number of taps has been

entered, the Tap Start setting will be ignored. The Tap Start setting will also be

ignored if several seconds elapse before the required number of taps have been

entered, if a different style is selected, or if the accompaniment [STOP] button is

pressed.

● Tempo I (Tempo Primo)

If the [Tempo I] pad is tapped while an accompaniment is playing, the

tempo setting that was active when the accompaniment was started is

immediately restored, regardless of any tempo changes that occurred after the

accompaniment was started.

NOTES

• If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando (described below), the

accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [Tempo I] value takes effect.

● accel. (Accelerando)

Pressing the [accel.] pad immediately starts a 2-measure accelerando

(tempo increase) that is executed by increasing the tempo by a small amount

on every 8th beat. The accelerando is stopped if the [accel.] pad is pressed

again before the 2 measures are completed.

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

Using the Pads

MULTI PLAYING

REC /

STOP

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

PHRASE

Tempo lTap StartTempo Change accel.

4321

● faster

Tap the [faster] pad to increase the tempo by a fixed amount, whether the

accompaniment is playing or not.

NOTES

• If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or

ritardando stops immediately and the [faster] value takes effect.

● a tempo

This pad recalls the tempo prior to the last tempo change — e.g. any

change incurred by pressing the [Tempo Change], [accel.], [faster], [slower],

or [rit.] pad.

NOTES

• If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or

ritardando stops immediately and the [a tempo] value takes effect.

● slower

Tap the [slower] pad to decrease the tempo by a fixed amount, whether

the accompaniment is playing or not.

NOTES

• If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or

ritardando stops immediately and the [slower] value takes effect.

● rit. (Ritardando)

Pressing the [rit.] pad immediately starts a 2-measure ritardando (tempo

decrease) that is executed by decreasing the tempo by a small amount on

every 8th beat. The ritardando is stopped if the [rit.] pad is pressed again

before the 2 measures are completed.

NOTES

• The [PAD 8/rit.] pad has essentially the same effect on the tempo as the [ENDING/

rit.] button (page 25), except that while the [ENDING/rit.] button causes the tempo

to return to its initial value after the rhythm stops, the tempo does not return to its

initial value if the [PAD 8/rit.] pad is used, even after the rhythm is stopped.

• If a fill-in pattern is selected during a ritardando, the ritardando continues during

the fill-in but then original tempo is then restored as soon as the fill-in ends.

■ The TEMPO SYNCHRO Function................................................................................................................................

If you press the button immediately to the right of the pad [MODE

SELECT] button so that the indicator above it lights while the TEMPO mode

is engaged, the TEMPO SYNCHRO function is engaged — any tempo

change initiated by a TEMPO pad takes place at the beginning of the next

measure instead of immediately when the pad is tapped (TEMPO SYNCHRO

has no effect on Tap Start operation).

The SYNCHRO mode is turned off by pressing the button to the right of

the [MODE SELECT] button again.

MODE

SELECT

MULTI REPEAT

PERC. BREAK

TEMPO SYNCHRO

Using the Pads

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

CHORD

a tempofaster slower rit.

8765

Panel Registration

The PSR-6000 Panel Registration feature can be used to memorize

32 complete control-panel setups (4 banks, 8 setups each) that you

can recall whenever needed.

NOTES

• When the PSR-6000 is in its initial factory-preset condition, the panel registration

memories contain preset setups. When these are recalled, a descriptive setup name will

appear at the top of the display (example: A1 Going West!).

Registering the Panel Settings

Z Set Up the Controls as Required ...............................................................................................................................

Make the desired control settings. The following

settings are memorized by the Panel Registration

function:

Data Stored By the Panel Registration Memory

Panel Registration

Freeze Accomp. Voice

OFF Freeze ON Freeze ON

Orchestra 1 Voice OO X

Orchestra 2 Voice OO X

Orchestration OO X

Harmony On/Off OO X

Sustain On/Off OO X

Reverb On/Off OO X

Panel Effect On/Off OO X

Buttons Style OX O

ABC On/Off OX O

IA On/Off OX O

Accompaniment Section OX O

Multi Pad Select OO O

Pad Synchro/Break/ OO O

Repeat On/Off

Left Hold On/Off OO O

Tempo OX O

Orchestra 1 OO X

Orchestra 2 OO X

Volume

Bass OX O

Chord 1 OX O

Chord 2 OX O

Rhythm OX O

LCD

Orchestra 1 Octave OO X

Orchestra 2 Octave OO X

Panel Registration

Freeze Accomp. Voice

OFF Freeze ON Freeze ON

Key Velocity On/Off OO X

Split Point OO O

LCD

ABC Mode OX O

Manual Bass Voice OX O

Transpose OO O

Reverb Type OO X

Reverb Depth OO X

Effect Type OO X

Effect Depth OO X

Foot Switch Select OO O

Foot Switch Percussion OO O

Foot Controller Select OO O

F3 Sustain Part Select OO X

Pitch Bend Wheel Select

OO X

Modulation/Effect Wheel Type

OO X

Modulation/Effect Wheel On/Off

OO X

IA Mode OX O

Auto Solo On/Off OX O

IA Sensitivity OX O

IA Key Part OX O

One Touch Setting OX O

(Synchro Change On/Off)

F5 Harmony Type OO X

PANEL REGISTRATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

12345678

BANK

ABCD

O =recalled

X =not recalled

X Register in Memory...................................................................................................................................................................

Use the [A], [B], [C], or [D] button to select the

corresponding memory bank — the corresponding

indicator will light. Press and hold the [MEMORY]

button, then press one of the PANEL REGISTRA-

TION buttons. Any data that was previously in the

selected location is erased and replaced by the new

settings.

PANEL REGISTRATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

12345678

BANK

ABCD

Panel Registration

Recall the Registered Panel Settings

Simply select the appropriate bank using the [A],

[B], [C] or [D] button and press the desired PANEL

REGISTRATION button at any time to recall the

memorized settings.

NOTES

• No registration name is displayed when a user regis-

tration setup is recalled.

• The preset registration setups can be recalled by using

the initialization procedure described on page 101.

• When the Foot Switch function is set to REGISTRA-

TION+ and a different panel registration memory is

recalled either via the panel controls or the footswitch,

the Foot Switch setting will not change even if a

different setting is included in the recalled panel regis-

tration memory (i.e. Foot Switch remains set to REG-

ISTRATION+).

PANEL REGISTRATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

12345678

BANK

ABCD

The Freeze Function

If you press the [FREEZE] button so that its

LED lights, selecting a different panel registration

will not change the currently selected accompani-

ment or voice settings even if the new panel registra-

tion includes a different settings. The REGISTRA-

TION FREEZE utility function (page 101) determines

whether the freeze function affects accompaniment

or voice settings.

PANEL REGISTRATION

MEMORY

FREEZE

12345678

The PSR-6000 can play optional Yamaha Disc Orchestra Collection

software, and General MIDI mode software recorded by other equip-

ment. When a disk of either type (3.5" 2DD disks only) is inserted into

the PSR-6000 disk drive, the PSR-6000 automatically switches the

internal tone generator system to allow playback of the software and

performance on the keyboard.

Disk Orchestra Collection Disk Playback

Using DISK ORCHESTRA disks (available from Yamaha), the PSR-6000 will let you enjoy listening to

automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,” allowing you to practice various parts of a piece

while the others are played automatically.

Z Insert the DOC Disk..................................................................................................................................................................

Insert the DISK ORCHESTRA disk into the

PSR-6000 disk drive (located below the right end of

the keyboard) with the sliding disk shutter facing the

drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk

should click into place and the DISK IN USE lamp

will light briefly while the PSR-6000 reads and

identifies the disk.

When the disk is inserted and identified the

display shown to the right will appear (if this display

doesn’t appear, press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI] button):

NOTES

• There are actually three ways to select the DOC mode:

1) Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically

selected).

2) Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI]

button (the normal, DOC, and General MIDI modes

are selected in sequence).

3) Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode”

message from an external MIDI device.

The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI button is

a handy way to engage the DOC mode from another

mode when the disk is already loaded in the drive.

Any rhythm or ABC operation in progress will stop

automatically.

• You can use the [EXIT] button or [DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI] button to exit from the DOC mode.

DISK ORCHESTRA/

GENERAL MIDI

DEMO

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General

MIDI Music Software Disks

X Select a Playback Mode & Song Number If Necessary.....................................................................

If the song select display is not showing, press

the SONG SELECT LCD button to recall it. Three

song playback modes are available: ALL, CHAIN,

and SINGLE. Use the st LCD dial next to the

TEMPO dial to select the desired playback mode.

V Press [START/RE-START] To Begin Playback..............................................................................................

Start playback by pressing the [START/RE-

START] button. The current measure number will

be shown to the right of the current song number on

the display during playback, and the activity of the

various parts is shown by the circular indicators

below the current song number.

Playback can be stopped at any time by pressing

the [STOP] button.

NOTES

• The TEMPO LCD dial or TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons can

be used to adjust the playback tempo before or during

playback.

• Some Disk Orchestra software does not produce a

tempo display (e.g. free-tempo phrases, etc.). In this

case, three bars appear instead of the usual tempo

value on the display.

• If the inserted disk contains both DOC and GM song files, the

DOC mode will automatically be selected. GM song data

may not be reproduced correctly in this case.

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

US SOLO

NOTES

• The DOC and GM chain list data can be saved to or

loaded from disk (page 91). Further, this data is re-

tained in memory even when the power is off if the “F7:

UTILITY MEMORY BACKUP” function is turned ON.

ALL All songs shown in the song list will be played in sequence.

CHAIN A specified sequence of songs from the song list will be played in sequence. When CHAIN is selected use

the LIST st LCD dials to select a song to add to the chain, then press the INS. LCD button to add that

song to the chain. To delete songs from the chain use the CHAIN LIST st LCD dials to select the song

you want to delete, then press the DEL. LCD button.

SINGLE Only a single specified song is played. When SINGLE is selected use the LIST st LCD dials to select the

song you want to play.

C Set the Repeat Function As Required..................................................................................................................

Use the REPEAT LCD button to turn repeat

playback ON or OFF. When repeat is ON, the

selected song or sequence of songs will play repeat-

edly until stopped. When repeat is OFF, the song(s)

will play through once, then playback will stop

automatically.

B Eject the Disk When Done.................................................................................................................................................

When you’ve finished with the currently loaded

disk, simply press the disk drive EJECT button to

remove it. This will automatically exit the DISK

ORCHESTRA mode.

NOTES

• There are actually three ways to exit from the DOC

mode:

1) Remove the DOC disk.

2) Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or

[EXIT] button (the normal, DOC, and General MIDI

modes are selected in sequence).

3) Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a

different mode from an external MIDI device.

• NEVER eject a disk or turn the power off while:

1) the DISK ORCHESTRA function is playing.

2) the DISK is formatting or recording.

■ Volume Control..............................................................................................................................................................................

If the volume control/mute display is not show-

ing, press the VOLUME/MUTE LCD button to

recall it. The volume-control LCD dials function in

the same way as the volume controls in the normal

play mode, each controlling the volume of the cor-

responding part, as listed below. As always, the

MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall

volume level.

ORC1 Adjusts the volume of ORCH.1 played on

the keyboard.

SONG Adjusts the overall volume of the song.

RIGHT Adjusts the volume of the right-hand part.

LEFT Adjusts the volume of the left-hand part.

ACC Adjusts the volume of the disk backing.

BASS Adjusts the volume of the disk bass part.

RHY Adjusts the volume of the disk rhythm part.

NOTES

• Operation of the volume controls may be different with

some songs. Further, the reverb or other effect can be

turned on or off for all parts by using the REVERB or

EFFECT button.

• During DOC playback reverb (type) ON/OFF data may

be read from the disk. When OFF data is received, the

depth values for all parts other than the part you are playing

are set to “0.” This means that unless you change the depth

setting, reverb cannot be applied to those parts even if the

REVERB indicator is lit. Also, since the effect depth values

for all parts other than the part you will be playing are set to

“0” before DOC playback is started, you will have to change

the depth settings before effects can be applied to those

parts, even if the EFFECT indicator is lit.

• Since only the ORCH.1 voice is used for the part played on

the keyboard in the DOC mode, no ORCH.2 volume control is provided.

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks

■ Muting Specific Parts

By turning off (muting) the left- or right-hand

melody part, or both, you can practice playing those

parts on the PSR-6000 keyboard. The PSR-6000

also makes it possible to mute the rhythm, bass, and

accompaniment parts. Sheet music is provided with

the Disk Orchestra Collection disks.

Press the MUTE LCD button (from the VOL-

UME display) and use the RHY, BASS, ACC.,

LEFT, and/or RIGHT LCD dials to set the corre-

sponding part to PLAY, MUTE, or SOLO.

PLAY The corresponding part plays normally.

MUTE The corresponding part is muted and will

not play.

SOLO Only the corresponding part will play — all

others are muted.

Press the VOLUME LCD button when you want to go

back to the volume-control display.

NOTES

• The left and right-hand parts cannot be played separately on

some songs.

• The appropriate voice for the part you are going to play is

automatically selected when you select a song (When “ALL”

buttons function in exactly the same way as in the normal play mode (page 17, 18).

■ Other Controls That Function In

the DOC Mode

• Keyboard.

• Voice select buttons (the DOC voice list is different

from the normal play mode voice list — the voice

group [12] button does not function).

• START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function).

• REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is auto-

matically turned ON when the DOC mode is en-

gaged).

• TEMPO buttons (the recommended tempo can be

selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously).

• SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on

the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra

1).

• PITCH BEND wheel (affects notes played on the key-

board. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed

at ±300 cents).

• MODULATION/EFFECT wheel (modulation applies to

Orchestra 1).

• PAD (fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per normal

play mode, and cannot be changed in the DOC mode).

• FOOT SWITCH (applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE).

• FOOT CONTROLLER (Applies to notes played on the

keyboard. Foot Controller Select fixed at Orc1Vol).

• FUNCTION buttons (F2 and F8 only — pages 84 and

102).

• LIST HOLD button.

• HELP button.

• MIDI transmission/reception.

NOTES

• Since octave offset is applied to some voices played via the

keyboard in the DOC mode, the pitch of notes played via the

keyboard may not match that of those played via MIDI note

numbers.

is selected, the voice for the first song is automatically selected).

■ Octave, Transpose, and Tune

The OCTAVE and TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks

MIXER

LIST HOLD

General MIDI Disk Playback

General MIDI disk playback is essentially the same as Disk Orchestra Collection disk playback, except for the

differences listed below. Refer to the Disk Orchestra Collection procedure, above, for operational details.

NOTES

• Only GM data recorded on 3.5" 2DD IBM-format disks in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1

can be played on the PSR-6000 (up to track 17 with format 1). Also note that data that does

not comply with GM System Level 1 specifications may not be reproduced.

• No measure number appears on the GM mode display.

* “IBM” is a registered trademark of International Business Machines.

■ Volume Control..............................................................................................................................................................................

If the volume control display is not showing,

press the VOLUME LCD button to recall it. The

volume-control LCD dials function in the same way

as the volume controls in the normal play mode,

each controlling the volume of the corresponding

track. Use the Tr1-8 or Tr9-16 LCD button to

switch between the track 1-through-8 and track 9-

through-16 displays, as required. As always, the

MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall

volume level.

Press the [MIXER] button to access the SONG,

PAD, and ORC1 volume controls listed below. The

standard TRANSPOSE and TUNE functions can

also be accessed from this screen by pressing the

TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD button. Press the

[MIXER] button again, or the [EXIT] button, to

return to the main GM mode display.

SONG Adjusts the overall volume of song play-

back.

PAD Adjusts the volume of the PSR-6000 pads.

ORC1 Adjusts the volume of ORCH.1 played on

the keyboard.

NOTES

• The reverb or other effect can be turned on or off for all

parts by using the REVERB or EFFECT button.

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks

■ Muting Specific Tracks ..........................................................................................................................................................

Individual tracks can be turned on or off (muted)

as required. Press the MUTE LCD button (from the

VOLUME display) and use the LCD dials to set the

corresponding track to PLAY, MUTE, or SOLO.

Use the Tr1-8 or Tr9-16 LCD button to switch

between the track 1-through-8 and track 9-through-

16 displays, as required.

PLAY The corresponding track plays normally.

MUTE The corresponding track is muted and will

not play.

SOLO Only the corresponding track will play —

all others are muted.

Press the VOLUME LCD button when you want

to go back to the volume-control display.

■ Octave .....................................................................................................................................................................................................

The OCTAVE LCD button functions in exactly

the same way as in the normal play mode (page 18).

■ Other Controls That Function In the General MIDI Mode ................................................................

• PAD (fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per normal

play mode, and cannot be changed in the GM mode).

• FOOT SWITCH (applies to notes played on the keyboard.

Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE).

• FOOT CONTROLLER (Applies to notes played on the

keyboard. Foot Controller Select fixed at Orc1Vol).

• FUNCTION buttons (F2 and F8 only — pages 84 and

102).

• LIST HOLD button.

• HELP button.

• MIDI transmission/reception.

NOTES

• See the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121 for

details on which rhythm voices are played by which note

numbers.

• Keyboard.

• Voice select buttons (the General MIDI voice list is

different from the normal play mode voice list — the

voice group [12] button does not function).

• START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function).

• REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is automati-

cally turned ON when the GM mode is engaged).

• TEMPO buttons (the recommended tempo can be

selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simul-

taneously).

• SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on

the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra

1).

• PITCH BEND wheel (affects notes played on the key-

board. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range

fixed at ±300 cents).

• MODULATION/EFFECT wheel (modulation applies to

Orchestra 1).

Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks

The Sequencer

The PSR-6000 features an 8-track sequencer that allows you to

record and play back original musical creations — along with auto ac-

companiment if required. You can record the accompaniment and or-

chestra parts separately or at the same time. If, for example, you

record the accompaniment first and then record your own perform-

ance while listening to playback of the accompaniment, you’re free to

use the entire keyboard for your performance rather than being limited

to only the upper keyboard area. You can also play back each part

independently or in any combination. For even further versatility, the

PSR-6000 sequencer allows different songs to be saved to or re-

loaded from floppy disk.

Recording

As you become more familiar with the PSR-6000 sequencer you’ll probably develop a recording procedure that

best suits your particular musical requirements. Here, to get you started, is the most simple, straightforward way to

approach sequencer recording.

Z Engage the Sequencer..........................................................................................................................................................

Press the [SEQUENCER] button to engage the

sequencer. “SEQUENCER” will appear at the top of

the display, the MEASURE number will appear to

the right of this, and the top left LCD button will

function as the sequencer’s SONG select button.

If the sequencer contains previously recorded

data, the green PLAY indicators of tracks containing

data will light when the sequencer is engaged. Any

of these tracks can be muted prior to engaging the

record-ready mode (below) by pressing the corre-

sponding track button so that the green PLAY indi-

cator flashes.

NOTES

• The sequencer can also be engaged by pressing one

of the track buttons.

X Select a Song Number...........................................................................................................................................................

The PSR-6000 sequencer can record up to 6

separate songs. Use the SONG LCD button to select

the song number you want to record. The selected

song number is shown to the right of “SONG” on the

display.

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

C Set Up All Record Parameters ......................................................................................................................................

The Sequencer

Select the accompaniment style you want to record with, voices,

orchestration, harmony, and other parameters before actually be-

ginning recording. A list of the parameters that can be recorded by

the PSR-6000 sequencer is given below.

You may also need to select a specific record mode and other

conditions accessible via the sequencer’s METRONOME, HAR-

MONY, and RECORDING TYPE functions, described on page 54.

Recordable Parameters

Tracks 1 — 7

• Note on/off

• Pitch bend

• Modulation

• Sustain on/off

• Orchestra 1 & 2 volume

• Voice change (including custom

voice on/off)

• Tempo (if ACCOMP. track contains

no data)

• Glide on/off

• Percussion pad on/off*

• Tempo pad tempo value*

• Multi pad on/off (phrase only)*

* The pad mode selected when the se-

quence is played back will be used.

Accompaniment Track

• Chord & root (note on/off in Manual

Bass mode)

• Style change (styles with the same

time signature only)

• Rhythm volume

• Bass volume

• Chord 1 volume

• Chord 2 volume

• Tempo

• Reverb on/off & depth

• Reverb type

• Effect on/off & depth

• Effect type

• Effect control

• Harmony on/off and type

• Interactive Accompaniment on/off

• Interactive Accompaniment section

• Interactive Accompaniment mode &

sensitivity

• Auto Bass Chord mode

• Percussion Pad on/off

• Pad function (Multi/Tempo/Perc)

• Repeat/Synchro/Break on/off

• Manual bass on/off, voice

• Intro, fill in & ending

• Chord pad chord sequence

• Tempo pad tempo value

* Press the Pad [REC/STOP] button if

you want to stop the phrase pad play-

back in the middle of the song record-

ing.

V Select the Record Track(s) ................................................................................................................................................

AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment can only be recorded on

the ACCOMP. track. The ORCH.1 and ORCH.2 voices can be

recorded on any of the remaining 7 tracks, but only one of these

tracks can be recorded at a time if the normal ORCH.1 orchestration

is selected. If the ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is

selected, two record tracks must be selected — the ORCH.1 voice

will be recorded on the lower-numbered track while the ORCH.2

voice will be recorded on the higher-numbered track. This means

that a maximum of three record tracks can be specified when the

ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected: ACCOMP.

and any two numbered tracks.

NOTES

• If the record and playback pad modes are different, pad on/off events

will not be reproduced.

• If parameter changes are memorized using the Panel Registration or

One Touch Setting features during recording, only those parameters

that can be recorded on the current track will be memorized.

• The time signature cannot be changed once a song has been recorded.

The Sequencer

To select the record track(s) and engage the record-

ready mode, hold the [RECORD] button and press the

appropriate track button(s). The red REC indicator for

the tracks will flash. Also note that the AUTO BASS

CHORD indicator will light automatically when the

ACCOMP. track is selected.

NOTES

• The upper markings on the track buttons apply when the

SEQUENCER mode is engaged (1 through 7, and

ACCOMP.). The lower markings when the CUSTOM

ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER described on page

62 is operating.

• If you are adding new material to tracks that have already

been recorded, the [

] and [

] buttons can be used at

this point to move to any measure number from which you

want to begin recording. The [

] and [

] buttons will not

function once recording has been started.

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

B Start Recording.............................................................................................................................................................................

Recording will start as soon as the [START/RE-

START] button is pressed or, if you also press the

[SYNCHRO START] button, as soon as any key on

the keyboard is pressed.

If the ACCOMP. track is selected and you start

recording by pressing the [START/RE-START] but-

ton, only the rhythm will play until the first chord

(FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER) is played on the

left-hand section of the keyboard.

If you start recording in the SYNCHRO START

mode by playing on the right-hand section of the

keyboard, a metronome will sound in place of the

rhythm and AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment

until a key is played on the left-hand section of the

keyboard.

NOTES

• You can also start recording with an introduction by

pressing any of the [INTRO] buttons.

• The restart function can not be used while the sequencer

mode is engaged.

• Previously recorded fill-ins may not always be erased if

that section is re-recorded or deleted.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOPSOLO

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

RECORD DELETE EDIT

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

The Sequencer

N Play.............................................................................................................................................................................................................

Play the accompaniment and/or orchestra parts. The

current measure number is shown in the upper right

corner of the display as you record.

M Stop Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................

Press the [STOP] button to stop recording immedi-

ately, or the [ENDING/rit.] button to finish off the

recording with an appropriate ending. The first measure

of the sequence is automatically selected when record-

ing is stopped.

< Record a New Track ..................................................................................................................................................................

To record a new track, simply select a new voice and

other parameters as required, select a new track as

described in step V, then record. All previously re-

corded tracks will automatically be set to the PLAY

mode so you can record the new material while listening

to the material you’ve already recorded. Repeat this

procedure until your sequence is complete.

NOTES

• Up to approximately 14,000 notes can be recorded for all

six sequencer songs. The exact number of notes that can

be recorded, however, will depend on the type of data you

record.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

ENDING/

rit.

FILL INFILL IN

INTRO 3INTRO 2INTRO 1

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

Deleting Tracks

If you make a mistake while recording or simply

want to delete a track from your sequence, press the

track button corresponding to the track you want to

delete while holding the [DELETE] button.

NOTES

• Tracks cannot be deleted while the record-ready mode is

engaged, during recording, or during playback.

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

The Sequencer

Playback

Z Start Playback.................................................................................................................................................................................

Since tracks are automatically set to the PLAY mode once they

have been recorded, and tracks containing data are automatically

set to the PLAY mode when the sequencer is initially engaged by

pressing the [SEQUENCER] button, all you have to do to play

back a sequence is to press the [START/RE-START] button (the

green PLAY LEDs of all tracks set to the PLAY mode will be lit).

If you first press the [SYNCHRO START] button, sequencer

playback can be started by playing any key on the keyboard.

Any of the PLAY tracks can be muted before or during

playback by pressing the corresponding track button. The PLAY

indicator will flash when a track is muted. Normal playback can

be restored by pressing the track buttons of muted tracks a second

time (the PLAY indicator will light continuously).

NOTES

• Before starting playback you can use the [

] and [

] buttons to

move to any measure number from which you want to begin playback.

The [

] button goes directly to measure number 1.

• If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter (page 89)

is turned ON during ACCOMP. track playback, the One Touch Setting

section will change in accordance with accompaniment section

transitions and the result may be different from the recorded data.

X Play along If You Like..............................................................................................................................................................

You can play along with the sequence using the entire PSR-

6000 keyboard, selecting different voices and changing the tempo

as required.

NOTES

• If any parameter changes are recorded in the sequence, the recorded

changes will still take effect even if you manually change the param-

eters while playing.

C Stop Playback.................................................................................................................................................................................

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the sequence

is reached. At this point the parameters recorded on the ACCOMP.

track will revert to their initial values. You can also stop playback

at any time by pressing the [STOP] button.

V Press [EXIT] When Done.....................................................................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the sequencer mode and return

to the normal play mode. The sequencer mode can also be exited

by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button.

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOP

QUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

QUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

RECORD DELETE EDIT

SYNCHRO

START

START/

RE-START

STOPSOLO

CHORD 1 CHO

PLAY/REC PLAY/

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

EXIT

The Sequencer

Sequence Editing

The PSR-6000 sequencer edit mode offers a

range of functions that let you modify the recorded

data and the way in which it is recorded in a number

of ways.

Press the [EDIT] button while the sequencer is

engaged to enter the sequencer edit mode. When

you’re finished editing press the [EDIT] button

again or press the [EXIT] button to return to the

sequencer.

The sequencer edit display has two main “pages”

— CONDITION/VOLUME and EDIT — which are

selected by using the [

] and [ ] LCD buttons.

The various functions within the selected display

page are selected by using the s and t LCD

buttons. The corresponding parameters are edited

via the appropriate LCD dials.

NOTES

• The edit functions may not work if a large amount of

sequence data has been recorded.

■ CONDITION/VOLUME — CONDITION....................................................................................................................

The CONDITION function actually includes three functions: METRONOME, HARMONY, and RECORDING

TYPE.

● METRONOME

Allows the recording metronome sound to be

turned on or off. Use the METRONOME LCD dial

to turn ON or OFF as required.

NOTES

• The metronome only sounds during recording when no

rhythm is playing.

● HARMONY

Determines whether harmony will be applied to

the keyboard or a track part. Use the HARM LCD

dial to select the harmony part — “KEY” or “TR1”

through “TR7”.

EXIT

OM ACCOMPANIMENT PR

RECORD DELETE EDIT

The Sequencer

When the “KEY” harmony setting is selected

(this is the default setting when the sequencer mode

is engaged), harmony will be applied to notes played

on the keyboard. If the “TR1” harmony setting is

selected, harmony will be applied to the track-1 part.

If “TR2” is selected harmony is applied to track 2,

and so on.

NOTES

• If Harmony is not turned on during recording, it will

automatically be turned off each time playback is

stopped if it is turned on before or during playback.

• Harmony can only be applied to tracks that contain

data.

● RECORDING TYPE

Selects the Replace, Overdub, or Punch record

mode. Use either of the TYPE LCD dials to select

the REPLACE, OVERDUB, or PUNCH record mode:

REPLACE If replace recording is selected, any

previous data on the track being recorded will be

erased and replaced by the new material. This is the

“default” mode which is selected when the sequencer

is initially engaged.

OVERDUB If overdub recording is selected, pre-

vious material on that track will be retained and the

new material will be added to it.

PUNCH Punch-in recording allows a specified measure

or range of measures to be re-recorded (replaced) without

affecting previously recorded material before and after

the punch-in range. When the Punch mode is selected you

must also specify the measure from which playback is to

begin prior to the “punch-in” point at which recording

will actually begin (use the PLAY START LCD dial), the

punch-in measure from which recording is to begin (use

the PUNCH IN LCD dial), and the punch-out measure

at which recording is to end (use the PUNCH OUT LCD

dial).

NOTES

• It’s generally convenient to set the “PLAY START” measure

in the PUNCH mode to just a few measures before the

punch-in point. This allows you to get the feel of the music

and prepare to start playing at the punch-in point. You can

even play along with the material prior to the actual punch-

in point so you’ll flow naturally into the punch-in recording

range.

• A footswitch (an optional FC5 footswitch can be used)

plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack can also be

used to punch-in and punch-out when the footswitch “PUNCH

IN/OUT” function is selected via the “FOOT SWITCH” func-

tion described on page 88. With the sequencer running in the

Punch Record mode, press the footswitch at the point you

want to begin recording (i.e. to “punch in”), and again to stop

recording (punch out).

• Please note that the punch-in record function can only be

used on tracks that already contain recorded material.

■ CONDITION/VOLUME — TRACK VOLUME .......................................................................................................

This function lets you independently set the playback volume of each of the sequencer’s seven orchestra tracks.

Use the LCD dials — Tr1 through Tr7 — to set

the volume of the corresponding tracks to a value

between “0” (minimum volume — no sound) and

“100” (maximum volume).

NOTES

• Only tracks that contain data are available for volume

control — others are indicated by an asterisk (*).

• Any recorded volume changes will override these

settings.

■ EDIT — TRACK COPY/MIX.................................................................................................................................................

The Sequencer

Copies the data from one recorded track to another, or mixes the data from two recorded tracks (except the

ACCOMP. track).

Use the SOURCE1 LCD dial to set the first

source track, the SOURCE2 LCD dial to set the

second source track, and the DESTINATION LCD

dial to set the destination track. If “CPY” is selected

for the SOURCE2 parameter, only the SOURCE1

track is copied to the destination track.

Once the source and destination tracks have been

selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actu-

ally execute the copy or mixdown operation. “Ex-

ecuting.” will appear on the display while the

operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will

appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the copy or mixdown

if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

NOTES

• The mix function is most useful when you want to

record more than 7 individual parts on the seven

orchestra-part tracks. Successfully recorded parts can

be combined using this function, thus opening up more

tracks for further recording. The data in the source

tracks is not erased during a mix operation.

• If the tracks that are mixed use different voices, the

voice of the lower-numbered track will be used. Subse-

quent recorded voice changes will operate normally.

• Please note that only tracks containing data can be

specified as the source tracks — tracks containing no

data are indicated by an asterisk (*).

• Any data in the destination track will be overwritten by

data copied from the source 1 and 2 tracks.

Data

Copy to Destination track

Source track 1

● Copy

Source track 2

Source track 1

● Mix

Destination track

The Sequencer

■ REMOVE EVENT...........................................................................................................................................................................

Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch bend, modulation wheel, volume, sustain, or program

change operations) from the specified measure or range of measures in the specified track (accompaniment track not

available).

Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track

number, the EVENT LCD dials to set type of event

to be removed, the TOP LCD dial to set the number

of the first measure in the range from which the

events are to be removed, and the LAST LCD dial to

set the number of the last measure in the range from

which the events are to be removed.

Once the track, event, and measure numbers

have been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD but-

ton on the right side of the display to actually

execute the remove event operation. “Execut-

ing.” will appear on the display while the operation

is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear

briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the remove event

operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo

function is only available until the next operation is

performed.

NOTES

• This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played

some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can

remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing

the entire track.

• Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for

example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a

specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous

measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend

event is encountered. Similarly, if you remove all

program change events from the beginning of a track,

the voice that was initially selected when the track was

recorded will be used.

■ DELETE MEASURE...................................................................................................................................................................

The Sequencer

Deletes the specified measure or range of measures from all tracks (including the accompaniment track).

Use the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of

the first measure in the range to be deleted, and the

LAST LCD dial to specify the number of the last

measure in the range to be deleted.

Once the top and last measure numbers have

been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to

execute the delete operation. The “Are you

sure? ” confirmation prompt will appear on the

display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with

the delete operation, or the NO LCD button to

cancel. “Executing.” will appear on the display

while the operation is in progress, and “Com-

pleted.” will appear briefly when the operation

has finished.

NOTES

• It’s important to remember that a Delete Measure

operation affects all tracks simultaneously, and that

measures following the deleted range are moved back

to take the place of the deleted measures. This differ-

entiates the Delete Measure function from the Erase

function (described later), which replaces data in the

specified range with rests.

• Be careful when deleting measures that contain effect

on/off events — e.g. pitch bend, modulation, sustain,

harmony, etc. If, for example, you delete a measure

that contains a pitch bend off event, the pitch bend

applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until

the next pitch bend event is encountered.

• The Delete Measure operation has no “undo” function,

so be absolutely sure you want to delete the selected

material before actually executing the delete opera-

tion.

123456789

123 789

123456

Delete Measures 4 through 6.

Measure 4 through 6 deleted.

Subsequent measures moved back.

■ CREATE MEASURE

Inserts a specified number of blank measures in

all tracks (including the accompaniment track) at

the specified measure number.

Use the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of

the measure at which the blank measures are to be

inserted, and the SIZE LCD dial to specify the

number of blank measures to be inserted.

Once the top measure number and size have been

selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actu-

ally execute the insert operation. The “Are you

sure?” confirmation prompt will appear on the

The Sequencer

display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with

the create measure operation, or the NO LCD button

to cancel. “Executing.” will appear on the dis-

play while the operation is in progress, and “Com-

pleted.” will appear briefly when the operation

has finished.

NOTES

• Create Measure affects all tracks simultaneously. The

specified number of blank measures is inserted before

the existing data beginning at the specified measure

123456

12345 6

123456789

Create measure, size 3, at measure 6.

Measure 6 moved up; 3 blank measures inserted.

Result with new measure numbers.

■ QUANTIZE

Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest

specified beat.

Use the TRACK LCD dial to select the track you

want to quantize, and the SIZE LCD dial to specify

the quantize size.

Once the track number and quantize size have

been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to

actually execute the quantize operation. “Execut-

ing.” will appear on the display while the operation

is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear

briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the quantize opera-

tion if it was executed by mistake. The undo func-

tion is only available until the next operation is

performed.

The Quantize Sizes are:

1/4 = 1/4 note

1/6 = 1/4 note triplet

1/8 = 1/8 note

1/12 = 1/8 note triplet

1/16 = 1/16 note

1/24 = 1/16 note triplet

1/32 = 1/32 note

NOTES

• Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy

timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that

is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical —

unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold,

mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at

• The create measure operation has no “undo” function.

number.











 







One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

qeeqe

qeeqee

least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes),

for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining the track.

The Sequencer

■

ERASE

Erases all note and event (pitch bend, volume

changes, etc.) data from the specified measure or

range of measures in the specified track (accompa-

niment track not available), leaving blank measures.

Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track

number, the TOP LCD dial to set the number of the

first measure in the range to be erased, and the LAST

LCD dial to set the number of the last measure in the

range to be erased.

Once the track and measure numbers have been

selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actu-

ally execute the erase operation. “Executing.”

will appear on the display while the operation is in

progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly

when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the erase operation

if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

NOTES

• An erase operation leaves the specified measures intact but blank.

■ NOTE SHIFT

Shifts the pitch of notes in the specified measures

of the specified track (accompaniment track not

available) up or down by a maximum of two octaves,

in semitone increments.

Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track

number, the SHIFT LCD dials to set the amount of

note shift (see “NOTES” below), the TOP LCD dial

to set the number of the first measure in the range in

which the notes are to be shifted, and the LAST LCD

dial to set the number of the last measure in the range

123456789

TRACK 1

123456789

TRACK 1

Erase measures 4 through 6.

Measures 4 — 6 “blank, ”

containing only rests.

The Sequencer

in which the notes are to be shifted.

Once the track, shift, and measure numbers have

been specified, press EXECUTE LCD button to

actually execute the note shift operation. “Ex-

ecuting.” will appear on the display while the

operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will

appear briefly when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the note shift

operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo

function is only available until the next operation is

performed.

NOTES

• The range of “SHIFT” values is from -24 to +24. A

setting of “0” produces no note shift. Each increment

represents a semitone, so a setting of +4, for example,

would shift the pitch of notes in the specified range up by an interval of a third. A setting of -12 would shift the notes down by one

octave.

• The ability to selectively shift the pitch of specified

measures and tracks makes it simple to create “modu-

lations” (key changes) without having to reprogram

entire passages, and to create simple harmonies.

■ SONG CLEAR

Deletes the entire song — i.e. deletes all data

from all sequencer tracks.

Use the CLEAR SONG LCD dials to select the

song to be cleared (1 … 6), then press the EXECUTE

LCD button to execute the song clear operation. The

“Are you sure? ” confirmation prompt will

appear on the display: press the YES LCD button to

go ahead with the clear operation, or the NO LCD

button to cancel. “Completed.” will appear briefly

when the operation has finished.

NOTES

• Remember that this function deletes all data from the

specified song in one operation. If you think you might

want to keep the data for later use or editing, be sure

to save it to floppy disk (page 91) before executing the

song clear operation.

• Be careful with SONG CLEAR — it has no “undo”

function!

• The amount of sequencer memory used by each song

is shown to the right of the song numbers in kilobytes

(approximate). The total amount of free sequencer

memory remaining is shown in parentheses under

“SONG CLEAR” on the display.

The Custom Accompaniment

Programmer

The PSR-6000 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT feature allows you to

create and store up to 24 original accompaniment styles — including

rhythm, bass, and chords — in addition to the 50+1 internal preset

accompaniment styles (including preset IA style “New Age”). You can

even create intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved with

your accompaniment styles. More custom accompaniment styles can

be created and saved to floppy disk (page 91). Your original accompa-

niment styles can be selected and played at any time, just like the pre-

sets.

Basic Programming Procedure (Normal section)

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

SEQUENCER

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

Although many of the steps outlined below do not have to be carried out in the order given, the basic programming

procedure presented below will serve as useful guide to get you started.

Z Select a Suitable Accompaniment Style............................................................................................................

Begin by selecting one of the preset accompani-

ment styles that is close to the type of accompani-

ment you want to create. For example, select a

WALTZ accompaniment style if you want to pro-

gram a rhythm pattern in 3/4 time.

X Engage the Custom Accompaniment Programmer...............................................................................

Press the [CUSTOM ACCOMP.] button. The

CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

display will appear and the selected accompaniment

style will begin playing, with accompaniment based

on a C major chord. Also, the rhythm track will be

set to the record mode (red REC indicator lit) and the

Drum Kit voice will be selected. All other tracks

containing data will be set to the PLAY mode (green

PLAY indicator lit). PLAY tracks can be muted by

pressing the corresponding track button (the green

PLAY indicator will flash when the track is muted).

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

410

511

612

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

CHORUS

SOLOCHORUS

VERSE

C Select an Accompaniment Variation ......................................................................................................................

Use the [VERSE 1], [VERSE 2], [CHORUS 1],

[CHORUS 2], and [SOLO] buttons to select the

accompaniment variation you want to program (vari-

ations cannot be selected when a custom style is

selected).

Intro, fill-in, and ending patterns will be based

on the selected variation. If you delete all existing

data to program an accompaniment from scratch,

and change the time signature (beat), the intro, fill-

in, and ending patterns cannot be used.

NOTES

• You could select a “section” — INTRO, FILL-IN, or

ENDING — at this point instead of a variation. See

“CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, AND ENDING PAT-

TERNS” on page 66.

V Program the Rhythm Track...............................................................................................................................................

Since the RHYTHM track is initially set to the

REC mode and the Drum Kit voice is selected

automatically, you can start programming the

RHYTHM track immediately. You could also select

the POP DRUM KIT voice using the normal voice

selection procedure, and/or set a comfortable re-

cording tempo before you actually start recording.

You can add new notes to the rhythm by playing

the keys corresponding to the PSR-6000 drums and

percussion instruments. The drums and percussion

instruments produced are indicated by the symbols

immediately above the keys (see the “Keyboard

Percussion List” on page 118). Please note that pitch

bend can not be applied to the rhythm instruments.

If you want to create a totally new rhythm track,

press the [RHYTHM] track button while holding

the [DELETE] button. This cancels all the instru-

ments in the original rhythm track, leaving only a

metronome sound (the metronome sound will not be

heard while the rhythm is playing). The rhythm

pattern can be up to 8 measures long (see “RECORD

— MEASURE/BEAT” on page 69), and the pattern

will continue to repeat so you can add new instru-

ments during each repeat, if necessary.

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

SEQUENCER

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

SEQUENCER

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER

CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP.

PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC

RECORD DELETE EDIT

SEQUENCER

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

CANCEL

●

To Cancel A Single Percussion Instrument

Although you can cancel all instruments in the

RHYTHM track by pressing the [RHYTHM] track

button while holding the [DELETE] button, it is also

possible to cancel a single instrument to eradicate a

mistake or simply eliminate an unwanted instrument.

While holding the CANCEL key (the highest key on

the PSR-6000 keyboard), press the percussion key

corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel.

The selected instrument should now be cleared from

the pattern.

NOTES

• The appropriate voice must be selected in order to cancel

individual instruments — if you can’t cancel an instrument

even after following the above procedure, select another

drum voice (DRUM KIT or POP DRUM KIT) and try again.

● To Add Accents

To accent specific beats after recording the rhythm,

press the accent key (the second to highest key on the

keyboard, with the “>” symbol) at the timing of beats

you want to accent.

B Program the Bass and Chord Tracks.....................................................................................................................

After the RHYTHM track has been programmed

(or it can be left as it is if no changes are required), you

can select a bass or chord track for programming by

pressing the [BASS] or a [CHORD] track button while

holding the [RECORD] button (tracks containing pre-

set data cannot be selected for recording). You can also

select the voice you want to record with using the

normal voice selection procedure. The RHYTHM track

will automatically switch to the PLAY mode when a

new REC track is specified. Please remember that only

one track can be programmed at a time. You can press

the [SYNCHRO START] button to engage the synchro

start ready mode if you want to start recording from the

first beat of the first measure.

Play notes or chords to be added to the existing data,

or delete all data on the track (press the track button

while holding the [DELETE] button) and start from

scratch. The bass and chord tracks must be programmed

in the key of C major!

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Continue selecting new record tracks, and program

until your custom accompaniment is complete.

NOTES

• Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the accompaniment by

holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the appropriate

track button.

• Although the bass and chord tracks must be programmed in

C major, they are automatically re-harmonized when the

custom accompaniment style is used in the play mode, and

can be used in any key, major or minor.

• When programming an accompaniment from scratch, you can

select a new voice that will take effect from the beginning of the

accompaniment after deleting all tracks. Other voice changes

added while programming will take effect from the point at

which they are made.

• The synchro start, start, and stop functions can be used when

recording a custom accompaniment. The re-start function,

however, cannot be used.

• Pitch bend, modulation, and sustain changes are not recorded

if the accompaniment is stopped — the accompaniment must

be running for parameter changes to be recorded.

• The Custom Accompaniment Programmer memory capacity

is limited. When the available memory for the track you are

recording is exhausted, the “Work area full !!” display will

appear and further recording on that track will be impossible

unless existing data is deleted. Further, if the data size is too

big when you perform a save operation, “Memory full!! Cannot

store data” will appear on the display.

• Only the non-percussion and non-dual preset voices in groups

1 through 10 can be used to record bass and chord parts

(custom voices cannot be used).

N Set a New Default Tempo....................................................................................................................................................

If necessary, set a new default tempo for the custom

accompaniment style by using the TEMPO LCD dial or the

TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons.

M Give the Finished Accompaniment Style a Name and Assign it to a

CUSTOM STYLE Number....................................................................................................................................................

Use the “NAME” function described on page 68 to give

your custom accompaniment style an original name, then

use the “STORE” function described on page 72 to assign

the accompaniment style to a CUSTOM STYLE number.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Creating Intro, Fill-In, & Ending Sections

The custom accompaniment programmer allows you to create four sets of intro, fill-in, and ending sections that

can be saved and later used with custom accompaniment styles.

Programming a Preset Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section

Z Select an Intro, Fill-in or Ending Section ..........................................................................................................

After selecting a suitable accompaniment style

and engaging the Custom Accompaniment Program-

mer as described in steps Z and X of the “Basic

Programming Procedure” (page 62), use the SEC-

TION LCD dials to select the INTRO, FILL IN , or

ENDING section for programming.

NOTES

• If any edits to the NORMAL section data have been

made before you do this, the “Edited data not stored!”

message will appear — press the YES LCD button to

store the edited data and move on to the new section,

NO to ignore the edited data and go on to the new

section, or CANCEL to return to the last operation.

X Program the Selected Section(s)...............................................................................................................................

Program the selected section as described in

steps V and B of the “Basic Programming Proce-

dure” (page 63, 64). Select a different section and

repeat as necessary.

NOTES

• The default tempo will be determined by the tempo set

for the NORMAL section.

• Names cannot be individually programmed for the

intro, fill-in, or ending sections.

C Assign the Programmed Sections to a Custom Accompaniment Style Group......

Use the STORE function described on page 72 to

assign the programmed section(s) to a custom style

group.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

V Determine Whether Your Custom Style Will Use the Preset or

Original Intro/Fill/Ending.....................................................................................................................................................

Creating a New Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section From Scratch

After selecting an intro, fill-in, or ending section as described above, use the [DELETE]

button to delete all data from all tracks. You can then program a totally new pattern “from

scratch”.

To create an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern with a different time signature, go to the

Custom Accompaniment Programmer RECORD screen MEASURE/BEAT function (page

69) and set the BEAT parameter as required.

Select the I/F/E SELECT page as described in

Custom Accompaniment Editing” (next section)

and select “USER” for the custom style numbers

with which you want to use your original intro/fill/

ending sections.

NOTES

• If the custom intro, fill-in, and ending sections have a

different time signature than the normal custom ac-

companiment section, then “USER” cannot be se-

lected in the “I/F/E SELECT” screen.

• To prevent differences between the time signatures of

the custom intro, fill-in, and ending sections, all the

sections for the selected styles are saved simultane-

ously when any one custom section is saved. For

example, if you edit an intro section while a preset style

is selected and then save the intro section, the fill-in

and ending sections for the selected style will also be

saved. If you then edit and save the fill-in section, the

intro and ending sections will also be saved, meaning

the intro section you just saved will be overwritten. To

prevent this, first copy the preset style to a custom style

number, and then use this as a basis for your new

sections. Of course, you must be careful that you don’t

overwrite a previously saved custom accompaniment

style when doing this.

Editing a Previously Saved User Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section

To edit intro, fill-in, and ending sections that you have previously created and saved,

simply select the custom accompaniment style to which the user sections are assigned and

program as described above.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Custom Accompaniment Editing

The PSR-6000 Custom Accompaniment Programmer offers a range of functions that let you modify the recorded

data in a number of ways.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer dis-

play has four main “pages” — RECORD, EDIT,

STORE, and I/F/E SELECT — which are selected

by using the [

] and [ ] LCD buttons. The

various functions within the selected display page

are selected by using the s and t LCD buttons. The

corresponding parameters are edited via the appro-

priate LCD dials.

■ RECORD — NAME/SECTION..........................................................................................................................................

This display includes two functions: NAME, which allows a name of up to 8 characters to be assigned to the

current custom accompaniment style before it is stored; and SECTION, which allows you to select the normal, intro,

fill-in, or ending section for programming (page 68 for intro, fill-in, and ending programming details).

● NAME

Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor

to the various character positions, then use the A~Z,

a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required

character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial

selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects

lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects

numbers and special characters.

NOTES

• Independent names can not be assigned to INTRO,

FILL, and ENDING sections.

• Preset style names which are originally longer than 8

characters will be truncated to the first 8 characters

when used as the basis for custom accompaniment

style programming.

● SECTION

Selects the normal, intro, fill-in, or ending sec-

tion for programming (see page 66 for details).

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

■ RECORD — MEASURE/BEAT........................................................................................................................................

These functions allow the length (in measures) and time signature of the accompaniment to be defined.

Use the MEASURE LCD dials to specify the

number of measures the accompaniment is to have

(from 1 to 8), and the BEAT LCD dials to specify the

number of beats per measure — 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4.

NOTES

• These parameters can only be changed when you’re

creating an entirely new pattern from scratch — i.e. you

have deleted all tracks from the original accompani-

ment by holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the

buttons of all tracks containing data so that no PLAY

indicators remain lit.

• All intro, fill-in and ending patterns must be clear in

order to change the BEAT parameter of an intro, fill-in,

or ending pattern.

• FILL patterns can have a maximum length of 1 meas-

ure.

■ RECORD — TRACK VOLUME.........................................................................................................................................

Lets you independently set the volume of each of the Custom Accompaniment Programmer’s tracks.

Use the LCD dials to set the volume of the

corresponding tracks to a value between “0” (mini-

mum volume — no sound) and “100” (maximum

volume). In addition to the graphic controls above

the respective LCD dials, vertical bar-graphs to the

right of each track number in the “TRACK VOL-

UME” section of the display provide a graphic

representation of the track volume levels.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

■ RECORD — FADER ASSIGN...........................................................................................................................................

Assigns the CHD1 and CHD2 volume controls in the main play display to Custom Accompaniment Programmer

CHORD tracks 1 through 6, determining which control affects which chord tracks when the accompaniment is

played back.

Use the CHD1 through CHD6 LCD dials to

assign the corresponding Custom Accompaniment

Programmer track to the main play display CHD1 or

CHD2 control.

NOTES

• It is a good idea to group the chord tracks according to

their musical function. For example, tracks containing

basic block chords could be assigned to the CHD1

control while tracks containing more “decorative” chord

work could be assigned to the CHD2 control.

■ EDIT — QUANTIZE.....................................................................................................................................................................

Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat.

Use the TRACK LCD dials to select the track you

want to quantize, and the SIZE LCD dials to specify

the quantize size.

Once the track number and quantize size have

been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to

actually execute the quantize operation. “Com-

pleted.” will appear briefly when the operation

has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the quantize opera-

tion if it was executed by mistake. The undo func-

tion is only available until the next operation is

performed.

The Quantize Sizes are:

1/4 = 1/4 note

1/6 = 1/4 note triplet

1/8 = 1/8 note

1/12 = 1/8 note triplet

1/16 = 1/16 note

1/24 = 1/16 note triplet

1/32 = 1/32 note











 







The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

■ EDIT — COPY..................................................................................................................................................................................

Copies a specified measure or range of measures to a different location within the same track.

Use the TRACK LCD dials to specify the track

number, the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of

the first measure of the range to be copied, the LAST

LCD dial to specify the number of last measure of

the range to be copied, and the DEST. LCD dial to

specify the number of the measure to which the data

is to be copied.

Once the track numbers and measure numbers

have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD but-

ton to actually execute the copy operation. “Com-

pleted.” will appear briefly when the operation

has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the copy operation

if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is

only available until the next operation is performed.

NOTES

• A copy operation overwrites the data from the begin-

ning of the specified destination measure with the data

from the source measure(s). Previous data in the

overwritten measures is therefore lost.

• The COPY function cannot be used with tracks con-

taining preset data.

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

qeeqe

qeeqee

NOTES

• Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy

timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that

is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical —

unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold,

mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at

least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be

quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th

notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th

notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining

the track.

• Tracks displayed in small characters (preset) or marked

with an asterisk (* — no data) cannot be selected for

quantization.

12345678

12341278

Copy measures 1 through 2 to measure 5 in the

same track

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

■ EDIT — REMOVE EVENT ....................................................................................................................................................

Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch bend, modulation wheel, volume, or sustain

operations) from the specified track.

Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track

number and the EVENT LCD dials to set type of

event to be removed.

Once the track and event type have been speci-

fied, press the EXECUTE LCD button on the right

side of the display to actually execute the remove

event operation. “Completed.” will appear briefly

when the operation has finished.

Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD

button will appear on the left side of the display, and

that button can be used to undo the remove event

operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo

function is only available until the next operation is

performed.

NOTES

• This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played

some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can

remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing

the entire track.

• Only the VOLUME event type can be selected when

the RHYTHM tracks is selected.

• Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for

example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a

specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous

measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend

event is encountered.

• Tracks displayed in small characters (preset) or marked with

an asterisk (* — no data) cannot be selected for event

removal.

■ STORE.....................................................................................................................................................................................................

This function stores the current custom accompaniment to a specified custom accompaniment style number.

Any of the LCD dials can be used to determine

to which custom style number the accompaniment

will be stored. When saving a normal section, you

can select any of the 24 available custom style

memory locations: A1 through A12 and B1 through

B12. When storing an intro, fill-in, or ending, you

can select one of four custom style groups: 1 (A1 …

A6), 2 (A7 … A12), 3 (B1 … B6), or 4 (B7 … B12).

When the custom style number or group has been

selected, press STORE LCD button to store the

current custom accompaniment to the specified

custom accompaniment style number. The “Are

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

you sure? ” confirmation prompt will appear on

the display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead

with the store operation, or the NO LCD button to

cancel. “Completed.” will appear when the op-

eration is complete.

NOTES

• If during editing you change styles, variations, or

sections, the “Edited data not stored ! Store it in

memory?” message will appear. Press the YES LCD

button to store the data, the NO LCD button to exit, or

the CANCEL LCD button to return to the last operation.

■ I/F/E Select..........................................................................................................................................................................................

Determines whether the preset, user-programmed, or no intro, fill-in, and ending sections will be used with each

custom accompaniment style.

Use the STYLE NUMBER LCD dials to select a

custom style number, then the I/F/E SELECT

LCD dials to assign either the PRESET or USER

intro, fill-in, and ending sections to that style number.

Select NO ASSIGN if you want no intro, fill-in, or

ending section to be used (see “NOTES” below).

NOTES

• If you select “PRESET”, then the un-edited intro, fill-in

and ending sections of the original preset style will be

used with the selected custom style. If you select “NO

ASSIGN”, then no intro, fill-in, or ending sections will

be used. In this case the [INTRO] button functions in

the same way as the [START] button, the [ENDING]

button functions in the same way as the [STOP] button,

and the [FILL IN] button has no effect.

The Custom Accompaniment Programmer

Exiting From the Custom Accompaniment Programmer

CHORD 1 CHO

PLAY/REC PLAY/

CUSTOM ACCOMP.

SEQUENCER

EXIT

Selecting & Using a Custom Accompaniment Style

To exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer mode, press either the [CUSTOM ACCOMP.] or [EXIT]

button. This will return you to the normal play mode. If you do this after editing any custom accompaniment data

and you haven’t already used the STORE function to save the edited data to a custom accompaniment number, the

following display will appear:

Press the YES LCD button if you want to store

the accompaniment — you will automatically be

taken to the STORE function display described on

page 72. Press the NO LCD button if you want to

exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer

without storing the data, or the CANCEL LCD

button to cancel the store operation and return to the

Custom Accompaniment Programmer if you want

to make a few more changes or additions to the

accompaniment before storing.

Once created and stored, your original accompaniment style can be selected and used in the same way as the preset

accompaniment styles.

Press the [CUSTOM A] or [CUSTOM B] but-

ton and then the appropriate STYLE select button

(1 … 12) to select a custom accompaniment style.

The selected custom accompaniment style can then

be operated just like any of the preset accompaniment

styles — it can be started and stopped as usual, and

can be used in the FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER

AUTO BASS CHORD modes.

NOTES

• Interactive Accompaniment cannot be used with cus-

tom accompaniment styles.

• The [VERSE 1], [VERSE 2], [CHORUS 1], [CHORUS

2] and [SOLO] buttons cannot be used with custom

styles.

STYLE

DANCE LATIN

ROCK’N’

ROLL

LATIN POP

ROCK WALTZ

POP

COUNTRY

PRESET

USER SET

CUSTOM A

CUSTOM B

BALLAD

TRADITIONAL

JAZZ FOR DISK IA

410

511

612

The PSR-6000 “Functions”

The PSR-6000 [FUNCTION] button selects 8 groups of functions

that access a number of related parameters. Here’s a list of the func-

tions and the manual page numbers on which they are described in

detail.

[F1] CUSTOM VOICE EDIT ...................................................................77

[F2] REVERB/EFFECT ..........................................................................84

[F3] CONTROLLER ...............................................................................86

[F4] ONE TOUCH SETTING/IA..............................................................89

[F5] HARMONY TYPE ...........................................................................90

[F6] DISK ................................................................................................94

[F7] UTILITY .........................................................................................100

[F8] MIDI ...............................................................................................102

General Function Selection & Editing Procedure

Press the [FUNCTION] button to engage the function mode.

HELP/

LANGUAGE

EXITFUNCTIONCONTRAST

Each of the function groups is selected by press-

ing the corresponding LCD button. In some cases all

of the parameters included in a function group will

be available in a single display “page”, and the

various parameters can be accessed via the ▲ and ▼

LCD buttons — as in the F3: CONTROLLER

display, below.

In cases where the number of parameters in-

cluded in the function group is too large to fit on a

single display page, several pages may be available,

selectable via the

and LCD buttons — as in

the F8: MIDI display shown to the right.

In all cases the selected parameter can be edited

via the appropriated labelled or positioned LCD

dial(s).

The PSR-6000 “Functions”

■ The [EXIT] Button .......................................................................................................................................................................

The [EXIT] button can be used at any time to

exit from a function and return to the normal play

mode.

NOTES

• Some functions cannot be selected in the Sequencer,

Custom Accompaniment Programmer, or DOC/GM

mode.

• You can return to the main function display from any

other function display by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button.

HELP/

LANGUAGE

EXITFUNCTIONCONTRAST

F1: Custom Voice Edit

The Custom Voice Edit mode allows you to edit any of the PSR-6000 voices to

create new sounds that ideally match your own music style. 128 custom voices can

be programmed, each based on the corresponding preset voice.

After selecting the voice you want to edit (see “NOTES” below), engage the Cus-

tom Voice Edit mode by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then the F1 CUS-

TOM VOICE EDIT LCD button. Use the various editing functions described below

to modify the sound to suit your needs. Then press the [EXIT] button when you’re

finished editing to return to the normal play mode.

Your custom voices can be selected and played by pressing the [CUSTOM

VOICE] button and using the VOICE SELECT buttons in the normal way.

NOTES

• You can also select a different voice while the Custom Voice Edit mode is engaged via the VOICE SELECT

buttons. In this case the normal custom voice selection display will appear while the VOICE SELECT

buttons are being used, and for a few seconds afterwards. The display will then revert to the previous

Custom Voice Edit display page.

• Please note that some voices may suddenly shift to a different octave or change in level when played on

the highest or lowest keys. There may also be slight tonal changes at one or more points on the keyboard.

• Some settings may produce noise or no sound.

■ NAME/CONTROL

The NAME/CONTROL page includes the NAME

function via which you can give your custom voice

an original name, and the TOUCH SENSITIVITY

and PITCH BEND parameters which define the

operation of the two most fundamental keyboard

control features.

● NAME

The NAME function allows an 8-character name

to be assigned to the voice.

Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor

to the various character positions, then use the A~Z,

a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required

character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial

selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects

lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects

Standard Voice Edit Functions (voice groups 1 through 10)

The following functions are available when editing voice groups 1 through 10. Different edit functions are

provided for the PSR-6000 dual voices (group 11 — DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT) and drum voices (group 12

— DRUMS).

F1: Custom Voice Edit

numbers and special characters.

NOTES

• It’s a good idea to give your voices names that make

them easily identifiable. If you’ve created a new voice

that is a variation on the standard piano voice, for

example, you could call it something like “PianVar”.

• Preset voice names longer than 8 characters will be

truncated to 8 characters when used in custom voices.

● CONTROLLER

The CONTROLLER section of the display in-

cludes two parameters that affect the entire voice.

1 TOUCH SENS.

Allows the touch sensitivity of the keyboard to

be set to three different levels, or turned off: “1”

(OFF), “2” (SOFT) , “3” (MEDIUM), or “4”

(HARD). Use the 1 LCD dial to select as required.

2 PITCH BEND

Sets the range of the pitch bend wheel to “0” (OFF),

“1” (±1 semitone), “2” (±2 semitones), “3” (±3

semitones), or “GLISSAND” (maximum 1-octave

glissando in semitone steps). Use the 2 LCD dial to

select as required.

■ COMMON

The OCTAVE, PAN, MODULATION, and TONE

parameters in this display page affect the entire

voice.

1 OCTAVE

Shifts the pitch of the voice up one octave (+1) or

down one octave (-1). A setting of “0” produces

the normal pitch for that voice. Use the 1 LCD

dial to set as required.

NOTES

• Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the

highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when

shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel

may also cause sudden pitch changes.

2 PAN

Sets the apparent position of the voice in the

stereo sound field. The graphic display indicates

the approximate location of the sound between

the left and right speakers. The pan range is from

“L7” (full left) through “0” (center) to “R7”

(full right). Use the 2 LCD dial to set as required.

F1: Custom Voice Edit

NOTES

• When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan

setting of the selected voice is used, creating a stereo

effect with some voices.

● MODULATION

The two parameters provided in this screen are

used to adjust the depth and speed of modulation

produced by the PSR-6000 MODULATION/EF-

FECT wheel.

3 DEPTH

Decreases (-) or increases (+) the depth of modu-

lation produced by the PSR-6000 MODULA-

TION/EFFECT wheel relative to the original

modulation depth of the selected voice. Use the

3 LCD dial to set as required.

4 SPEED

Decreases (-) or increases (+) the speed of modu-

lation produced by the MODULATION/EF-

FECT wheel relative to the original modulation

speed of the selected voice. Use the 4 LCD dial

to set as required.

NOTES

• The maximum range of the depth and speed is from -

7 through 0 to +7, although this range is more limited

with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear

next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum

allowable setting for the selected voice has been

reached.

• The default modulation depth and speed values for the

selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Minus

settings produce gentler or slower modulation, while

plus settings produce deeper or faster modulation,

respectively.

• Modulation is applied automatically to some voices, and in

some cases operating the wheel causes modulation to be

applied automatically.

● TONE

The BRILLIANCE and RESONANCE parameters

provided here make it possible to vary the tone of the

voice over a wide range.

5 BRILLIANCE

This parameter alters the cutoff frequency of the filter

applied to the voice, thereby making the sound more

or less brilliant. Minus settings reduce brilliance for a

rounder, more mellow tone, while plus setting in-

crease brilliance for a sharper tone. Use the 5 LCD

dial to set as required.

6 RESONANCE

Plus settings increase the height of a resonant peak at

the filter cutoff frequency, giving the voice greater

presence and sometimes a more “nasal” tone. Minus

settings reduce resonance for a “flatter” sound. Use

the 6 LCD dial to set as required.

NOTES

• The maximum range of both parameters is from -50 through

0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some

F1: Custom Voice Edit

voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected

voice has been reached.

• The default values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”.

■ ENVELOPE

The ATTACK, DECAY, RELEASE, and SUSTAIN

parameters provided here let you shape the volume

envelope of the voice.

1 ATTACK

Sets the speed of attack — i.e. how fast the sound

reaches maximum level after a key is pressed.

“0” sets the normal attack for the selected voice,

minus settings produce a slower attack, and plus

settings produce a faster attack. Use the 1 LCD

dials to set as required.

2 DECAY

Sets the speed of decay portion of the envelope

— i.e. how fast the sound decays from the maxi-

mum attack level to its normal level.

“0” sets the normal decay for the selected voice,

minus settings produce a slower decay, and plus

settings produce a faster decay. Use the 2 LCD

dials to set as required.

3 RELEASE

Sets the speed of release — i.e. how fast the

sound decays after a key is released when the

panel [SUSTAIN] button is off and the sustain

pedal is not pressed.

“0” sets the normal release for the selected

voice, minus settings produce a slower release

decay, and plus settings produce a faster release

decay. Use the 3 LCD dials to set as required.

4 SUSTAIN

Sets the speed of sustain decay — i.e. how fast

the sound decays after a key is released when the

panel [SUSTAIN] button is on or the sustain

pedal is pressed.

“0” sets the normal sustain for the selected voice,

minus settings produce a longer sustain decay, and

plus settings produce a faster sustain decay. Use the 4

LCD dials to set as required.

NOTES

• The maximum range for all parameters is from -50 through

0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some

voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the

parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting

for the selected voice has been reached.

• The default values for the selected voice are produced by

settings of “0”.

• With voices like STRINGS, in which key velocity (keyboard

dynamics) controls the speed of attack, attack speed changes

in the same way even if the attack parameter is set to a minus

value.

• Since PIANO 1 and some other voices already have the

F1: Custom Voice Edit

fastest possible attack, no sound will be produced if the Decay parameter for such voices is set to “+50.”

• The Decay parameter will have no effect on some sustain-type voices which have no inherent decay.

• Changing the envelope parameter setting may have no effect on the sound with some voices.

Dual Voice Edit Functions (voice group 11)

The following functions are available when editing the group 11 voices (DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT). Different

edit functions are provided for the PSR-6000 normal voices (groups 1 through 10 — page 77) and drum voices (group

12 — page 83).

■ NAME/VOICE

This display page includes the NAME and VOICE

functions, letting you assign an original name to

your custom dual voice and specify the voices to be

used.

● NAME

The NAME function allows an 8-character name

to be assigned to the custom dual voice.

Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor

to the various character positions, then use the A~Z,

a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required

character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial

selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects

lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects

numbers and special characters.

NOTES

• Give your dual voice names that identify both the

voices used, if possible. If you’ve created a new dual

voice that combines piano and organ, for example, you

could call it something like “PianOrg”.

• Preset voice names longer than 8 characters will be

truncated to 8 characters when used in custom voices.

● VOICE

This function allows any two of the PSR-6000’s

preset and custom voices (groups 1 through 10) to be

assigned to the dual voice.

Use the GRP. 1 and GRP. 2 LCD dials to select the desired voice groups, and the 1 # and 2 # LCD dials to select

F1: Custom Voice Edit

NOTES

• The pitch bend range for DUAL VOICE is limited to

whole tone.

■ OCT/PAN/VOL./DETUNE

In this display screen all parameters have dual

settings, one for each of the voices used in the

custom dual voice.

● OCTAVE

Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to

be independently shifted up or down one octave.

Use the 1 LCD dial to set the octave of the “A”

voice, and the 2 LCD dial to set the octave of the “B”

voice.

NOTES

• Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the

highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when

shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel

may also cause sudden pitch changes.

•“0” is the normal setting.

● PAN

Independently sets the pan positions of the two

voices used in the dual voice.

Use the 3 LCD dial to set the pan position of the

“A” voice, and the 4 LCD dial to set the pan position

of the “B” voice.

The graphic displays indicates the approximate

location of the sound between the left and right

speakers.

NOTES

• When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan

setting of the selected voice is used, creating a stereo

effect with some voices.

● VOLUME

Independently adjusts the volumes of the two

voices used in the dual voice.

Use the 5 LCD dial to set the volume of the “A”

voice, and the 6 LCD dial to set the volume of the “B”

voice.

NOTES

• The volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “100” (maximum

volume). Use this function to set the optimum balance

between the two voices.

• When the parameter is set to “0” or “100” an exclamation

mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the

limit has been reached.

● DETUNE

Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be

detuned slightly to create a thicker sound.

Use the 7 LCD dial to detune the “A” voice, and the

8 LCD dial to detune the “B” voice. A setting of “0”

produces the normal pitch of the voice, while positive (+)

settings raise the pitch and negative (-) settings lower the

pitch of the voice.

NOTES

• The normal tune value is “0”. This can be tuned down to a

maximum setting of -50 or up to a maximum setting of +50.

Each increment equals approximately 0.78 cents (a cent is

one hundredth of a semitone). The maximum amount of

detune that can be set in either direction is therefore 39 cents

the desired voices.

F1: Custom Voice Edit

— not quite a quarter tone.

• This function can be used by leaving one of the voices set at “0” and detuning the other until the desired effect is achieved.

Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voice group 12)

Another approach is to tune one voice down and the other up.

• The pitch bend range is always

200 cents, regardless

of the setting of this function.

• When the parameter is set to “-50” or “+50” an

exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter

indicating that the limit has been reached.

The following functions are available when ed-

iting the drum voices in group 12. Different edit

functions are provided for the PSR-6000 normal

voices (groups 1 through 10 — page 77) and dual

voices (group 11 — page 81).

■ NAME/PAN/PITCH/SOFTNESS

All parameters available for drum voice editing

are provided in a signle display screen.

● NAME

Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the

custom drum voice.

Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor

to the various character positions, then use the A~Z,

a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required

character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial

selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects

lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects

numbers and special characters.

NOTES

• Give your drum voice names that identify their charac-

ter. If you’ve created a new drum voice intended for

rock music, for example, you could call it something

like “RockDrum”.

● PAN

Allows the pan position of each instrument in the

drum voice to be individually adjusted.

Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument

you want to edit (an alternative method is to press the

key on the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the

desired instrument). Then use the 1 LCD dial to set

the pan position. The pan range is from “L7” (full

left) through “C” (center) to “R7” (full right). The

graphic PAN display indicates the approximate loca-

tion of the sound between the left and right speakers.

NOTES

• Use this function to create the required “stereo image” for

your drum voice. View in the drum kit from the audience side,

for example, the bass drum is normally in the center, the

snare to its right, the tom-toms to the left, and so on.

● PITCH

Allows the pitch of each instrument in the drum voice

to be individually tuned.

Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument you

want to edit (an alternative method is to press the key on

the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the desired

instrument). Then use the 2 LCD dial to set the pitch as

required.

NOTES

• The maximum tuning range is from -50 through 0 to +50, with

“0” being the normal pitch for the instrument. Each increment

equals approximately 6.25 cents (a cent is one hundredth of

a semitone), for a total tuning range of about

312 cents.

• When the parameter is set to “-50” or “+50” an exclamation

mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the

limit has been reached.

● SOFTNESS

Allows the tone (softness) of each instrument in the

drum voice to be individually adjusted.

Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument you

want to edit (an alternative method is to press the key on

the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the desired

F2: Reverb/Effect

The PSR-6000 has 23 reverb-based effects and 9 other effects that

can be selected via the REVERB/EFFECT function display. The se-

lected reverb and effect types are applied to the sound when the [EF-

FECT] and [REVERB] buttons are used (see page 31).

■ REVERB TYPE & DEPTH.....................................................................................................................................................

● REVERB TYPE

Selects the reverb effect to be applied when the

[REVERB] button is turned on (page 31).

If the REVERB TYPE parameters are not show-

ing on the lower section of the display, press the

TYPE LCD button. Use the GROUP LCD dials to

select a reverb group, and the TYPE LCD dials to

select the desired reverb effect.

The Reverb Effects

No. Group Type

1. Reverb 1 Hall

2. Reverb 1 Room

3. Reverb 1 Plate

4. Reverb 2 Church

5. Reverb 2 Club

6. Reverb 2 Stage

7. Reverb 3

Bathroom

8. Reverb 3 Metal

9. Delay 1 Short

10. Delay 1 Medium

11. Delay 1 Long

12. Delay 2 OneShot

No. Group Type

13. TempoSync. Short

14. TempoSync. Long

15. Echo Stereo

16. Echo PingPong

17. Refl.&Gate Panned

18. Refl.&Gate Early

19. Refl.&Gate Gate

20. Delay&Rev Single

21. Delay&Rev Dly. L/R

22. Variation Distort.

23. Variation Tunnel

● REVERB DEPTH

Independently sets the depth of the selected

reverb effect for the rhythm, bass, chord 1, chord 2,

orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound.

If the REVERB DEPTH parameters are not show-

ing on the lower section of the display, press the

DEPTH LCD button. Use the RHY, BASS, CHD2,

CHD1, ORC2, and ORC1 LCD dials to set the

depth of the reverb effect as required for the corre-

sponding orchestra parts.

NOTES

• Reverb depth can be adjusted in 8 steps (0 … 7),

represented by a vertical bar to the right of each

DEPTH parameter in the upper section of the display.

The longer the bar, the greater the reverb depth.

• If the depth setting is changed while a note is being

played, the new depth setting will take effect from the

next note played.

NOTES

• The “TempoSync” effects produce a delay that is

synchronized to the currently selected tempo. “Varia-

tion : Distort.” produces a distortion effect.

• Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can

do to your sound.

F2: Reverb/Effect

■ EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH ......................................................................................................................................................

● EFFECT TYPE

Selects the effect to be applied when the [EF-

FECT] button is turned on (page 31).

If the EFFECT TYPE parameters are not show-

ing on the lower section of the display, press the

TYPE LCD button. Use the GROUP LCD dials to

select an effect group, and the TYPE LCD dials to

select the desired effect.

The Effects

No. Group Type

1. Tremolo 1

2. Tremolo 2

3. Tremolo 3

4. Chorus 1

5. Chorus 2

6. Flange 1

7. Flange 2

8. Symphonic 1

9. Symphonic 2

NOTES

• Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can

do to your sound.

● EFFECT DEPTH

Independently sets the depth of the selected

effect for the bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and

orchestra 2 sound.

If the EFFECT DEPTH parameters are not show-

ing on the lower section of the display, press the

DEPTH LCD button. Use the BASS, CHD2, CHD1,

ORC2, and ORC1 LCD dials to set the depth of the

effect as required for the corresponding orchestra

parts.

NOTES

• Effect depth can be adjusted in 8 steps (0 … 7),

represented by a vertical bar to the right of each

parameter. The longer the bar, the greater the effect

depth.

• If the depth setting is changed while a note is being

played, the new depth setting will take effect from the

next note played.

F3: Controller

The [F3] function group includes four functions that affect how the

PSR-6000 responds to control via the keyboard, a foot controller

plugged into the rear-panel FOOT CONTROLLER jack, the MODULA-

TION/EFFECT wheel, the [SUSTAIN] button and SUSTAIN footswitch,

the PITCH BEND wheel, and a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel

FOOT SWITCH jack.

■ MODULATION/EFFECT WHEEL ...................................................................................................................................

Determines whether the MODULATION/EF-

FECT wheel will control modulation or the selected

effect (page 32), and whether it will affect the

orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both

orchestra voices.

Use the TYPE LCD dials to select either MODU-

LATION or EFFECT operation. If MODULATION

is selected the ORC2 and ORC1 assignment param-

eters will appear: use the corresponding LCD dials

to turn modulation wheel operation ON or OFF for

the ORC2 and ORC1 parts, as required.

■ FOOT CONTROLLER...............................................................................................................................................................

Determines whether a foot controller plugged

into the rear-panel FOOT CONTROLLER jack will

control master volume, the volume of an individual

orchestra part (rhythm, ABC, etc.), or the depth of

the selected effect.

Use the TYPE LCD dials to select MASTER

VOLUME for master volume control, INDIVIDUAL

VOLUME for individual part volume control, or

EFFECT for effect depth control.

Individual part assignment parameters for the

RHY, ABC, ORC2 and ORC1 parts will appear

when the INDIVIDUAL type is selected. Use the

corresponding LCD dials to turn volume control for

the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.

NOTES

• Normally you’ll want to be able to apply expression

control to the orchestra voices without affecting the

accompaniment and rhythm sound, so the INDIVIDUAL

type should be selected and the ORC1 and/or ORC2

part turned on while the remaining parts are turned off.

• The EFFECT setting only applies when the panel

[EFFECT] button is turned ON.

F3: Controller

■

SUSTAIN PEDAL & PITCH BEND WHEEL.........................................................................................................

● SUSTAIN PEDAL

Determines whether the PSR-6000 sustain effect

is to be applied to the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra

2 voice, or both orchestra voices.

Use the SUSTAIN PEDAL ORC2 LCD dial to

turn sustain on or off for the orchestra 2 voice, and

the SUSTAIN PEDAL ORC1 LCD dial to turn

sustain on or off for the orchestra 1 voice.

NOTES

• The sustain effect is applied to the specified orchestra

part(s) only when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is turned

on or when the sustain pedal is pressed.

● PITCH BEND WHEEL

Determines whether the PITCH BEND wheel

will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2

voice, or both orchestra voices.

Use the PITCH BEND WHEEL ORC2 LCD

dial to turn pitch bend on or off for the orchestra 2

voice, and the PITCH BEND WHEEL ORC1 LCD

dial to turn pitch bend on or off for the orchestra 1

voice.

NOTES

• If, for example, you’re using the split mode (ORCH.

1) with a bass voice on the left and a sax voice on

the right, you’ll want pitch bend to apply only to the

right-hand sax voice. In this case simply turn orchestra

1 pitch bend on and orchestra 2 pitch bend off.

• If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2

orchestration mode is selected, no pitch bend is ap-

plied to the ORCH. 2 voice.

NOTES

• This function can be used to apply modulation or the

selected effect to just one of the voices being played in

the split mode (ORCH. 2

1) to emphasize that voice

and provide greater contrast with the other voice.

• When EFFECT operation is selected, the wheel will

function only when the panel [EFFECT] button is

turned on.

• If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2

orchestration mode is selected, no modulation is ap-

plied to the ORCH. 2 voice.

F3: Controller

Determines the function of a footswitch plugged

into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack.

Use the TYPE LCD dials to select one of the

following footswitch functions:

NOTES

• When the Foot Switch function is set to REGISTRA-

TION+ and a different panel registration memory is

recalled either via the panel controls or the footswitch,

the Foot Switch setting will not change even if a

different setting is included in the recalled panel regis-

tration memory (i.e. Foot Switch remains set to REG-

ISTRATION+).

■ FOOT SWITCH ................................................................................................................................................................................

START/STOP Same as panel [START] and [STOP] buttons.

GLIDE Lower orchestra 1 sound by a semitone while footswitch pressed.

ROTARY SPEAKER The footswitch varies the speed of the tremolo effect each time it is pressed: slow m me-

dium m fast m slow, and so on. When ROTARY SPEAKER is selected the panel [EFFECT]

button automatically lights, the effect type is set to Tremolo1, and the ORCH.1 and ORCH.2

effect depth are set to maximum, while all other depth parameters are set to “0”. If a different

effect is selected via the F2: REVERB/EFFECT display after the ROTARY SPEAKER setting

has been selected, the foot switch can be used to change the depth of the selected effect in

three stages.

HARMONY Harmony occurs only while footswitch pressed.

REGISTRATION + Recall next (increment) panel registration.

START/RE-START Same as panel [START/RE-START] button.

INTRO1/FILL Same as panel [INTRO 1/FILL IN] button.

INTRO2/FILL Same as panel [INTRO 2/FILL IN] button.

INTRO3/ENDING/rit Same as panel [INTRO 3/ENDING/rit.] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as PAD Tap Start function.

PERCUSSION 1 Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the DRUM KIT voice. Use the PERCUSSION

LCD dials to specify the percussion instrument to be played when the footswitch is pressed.

PERCUSSION 2 Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the POP DRUM KIT voice. Use the PER-

CUSSION LCD dials to specify the percussion instrument to be played when the footswitch

is pressed.

PUNCH IN/OUT Sets punch-in and punch-out points when sequencer record mode set to “Punch.”

EFFECT Same as panel [EFFECT] button.

TENSION Modifies dominant 7th chords in the accompaniment to produce a more consistent sound

when playing in a minor key. Also automatically re-harmonizes non-scale tones on chords

other than the tonic and 7th.

F4: One Touch Setting/IA

■ ONE TOUCH SETTING SYNCHRO CHANGE..................................................................................................

Determines whether One Touch Setting varia-

tion switching will occur at the same time as accom-

paniment style and verse-to-chorus switching.

When ON, selecting a different accompaniment

style or switching between the VERSE and CHO-

RUS variations while ONE TOUCH SETTING is

engaged will cause the ONE TOUCH SETTING

settings for that style or variation to be selected

automatically.

Also, if you change a ONE TOUCH SETTING

setting the corresponding ONE TOUCH SETTING

indicator will flash to indicate that a change has

been made. When OFF no change occurs in the ONE

TOUCH SETTING settings when a different style

or VERSE/CHORUS variation is selected.

Use the 1 LCD dials to turn the SYNCHRO

CHANGE parameter ON or OFF.

The parameters in this section of the display

select one of two available Interactive Accompani-

ment modes, turn the AUTO SOLO function on or

off, determine the keyboard part on which Interac-

tive Accompaniment will be based, and set the

sensitivity of the Interactive Accompaniment func-

tion.

NOTES

• Turning this function on can provide greater contrast be-

tween the chorus and verse variations when using the

Accompaniment feature.

• When the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter is OFF, the

current ONE TOUCH SETTING indicator will go out if any of

the settings it includes is changed.

• The default setting is “OFF”.

■ INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT. ..

MODE Use the 2 LCD dial to select the MUTE or ADVANCED MODE.

• When the MUTE Interactive Accompaniment mode is selected, accompaniment parts that may inter-

fere with what is played on the keyboard are automatically lowered in volume when the keyboard is

being played. When the ADVANCED mode is selected, the above function is combined with auto-

matic muting of interfering parts and automatic switching between VERSE 1 and VERSE 2 or be-

tween CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 in response to keyboard activity. The default Mode setting is AD-

VANCED.

AUTO SOLO Use the 3 LCD dial to turn AUTO SOLO ON or OFF.

• When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON, the solo accompaniment variations will automatically

be activated if nothing is played on the keyboard for a few measures (the actual number of measures

depends on the selected style). Further, the solo variations will automatically be de-activated at the

end of the current phrase after keyboard performance is resumed. No automatic solo switching oc-

curs when the AUTO SOLO function is turned OFF. The default AutoSolo setting is ON.

PART Use the 4 LCD dial to select the keyboard part(s) on which Interactive Accompaniment is to be based.

• When the PART parameter is set to R+L, the Interactive Accompaniment system responds to activity

(i.e. anything you play) on the entire keyboard. When set to RIGHT only activity on the right-hand

section of the keyboard is detected, and when set to LEFT only activity on the left-hand section of the

keyboard is detected. The default PART setting is RIGHT.

SENSITIVITY Use the 5 LCD dial to set the desired Interactive Accompaniment sensitivity.

• The sensitivity range is from 1 to 8. 8 is the highest sensitivity. In this case “sensitivity” refers to how

much activity the Interactive Accompaniment system must detect in the specified section(s) of the

keyboard before a change in the accompaniment occurs. The default Sensitivity setting is 4.

F5: Harmony Type

Selects the type of harmony to be applied when the [HARMONY]

button is turned on (page 31).

There are four groups of harmony types — BA-

SIC, POP, JAZZ, and CLASSIC — which can be

selected either by using the GROUP LCD dials or by

pressing the corresponding LCD buttons (the LCD

buttons beside the arrows corresponding to the title

of each group on the display). Once the group

containing the desired harmony type has been se-

lected, use the TYPE LCD dials to select the har-

mony type (you can actually use the TYPE LCD

dials to scroll through all type in all groups, without

first selecting a group).

The Harmony Types

No. Group Type

1. Basic Duet

2. Basic Trio

3. Basic 4 Part

4. Pop Octave

5. Pop Pop Riff

6. Pop Strings 1

7. Pop Strings 2

8. Pop Synth Ensemble

9. Pop Add Vocal

10. Jazz 4 way Close

11. Jazz 4 way Open

12. Jazz Vib. Ensemble

13. Jazz Sax Ensemble

14. Jazz Wind Ensemble

15. Jazz Guitar

16. Classic Strings

F6: Disk

Although the F6: DISK function accesses a range of important disk

operations, the most commonly used disk functions — save to disk

and load from disk — can also be directly accessed via the [TO DISK]

and [FROM DISK] buttons, as described below.

Please note that no other PSR-6000 functions will operate while a

disk function is in progress.

NOTES

• For any disk operation an appropriate floppy disk must first be properly inserted into the

PSR-6000 disk drive. The PSR-6000 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks. Make sure the

disk write protect tab is set to the “write enable” position if you intend to save any data to

the disk, and insert the disk with the sliding disk cover facing the disk drive and the disk

label facing upward. Before a new disk can be used to save data, it must be formatted

using the “FORMAT DISK” function described on page 98.

■ The [TO DISK] Button.............................................................................................................................................................

Press this button when you want to save the

current contents of the PSR-6000 memory (see list

below) to floppy disk for later re-loading and use.

The display shown to the right will appear:

Use any of the LCD dials to select the file to

which you want to save the data. The file list at the

bottom of the display includes all files which cur-

rently exist on the disk and one “NEW” file (named

“N-FILE”). Select an existing file if you want to

overwrite the file with the new data, or select the

“NEW” file if you want to create a new file. With the

exception of the “NEW” file, the size of each file

will appear to the right of the file name in kilobytes

(approximate).

If you want to give a new file an original filename

or change the name of an existing file prior to saving

it to disk, press the NAME LCD button to go to the

name display.

RB EFFECT

DISK IN USE

FROM

DISK

File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use

the < > LCD dial buttons to move the name cursor

to the various character positions, then use the A~Z

or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character

for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital

letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and

special characters.

When the file and, if necessary, the file name has

been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to

actually begin the save operation — the “Are you

sure?” confirmation display will appear.

If you want to execute the save operation press

the YES LCD button (or press NO LCD button to

cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the data is being saved, and the

progress of the save operation will be indicated by

a bar graph at the bottom of the display. You can go

back to the file list by pressing the LIST LCD

button.

The data saved to disk is as follows:

• Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/

GM Chain list data).

• Disk style data.

• Custom voice data.

• Custom style data.

• Panel registration data.

• One touch setting data.

• Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion

assignments).

• Sequencer song data.

If you insert a disk that has not been formatted

into the drive, the display shown to the right will

appear when the [TO DISK] button is pressed:

Press the YES LCD button to format the disk (see

“FORMAT DISK” on page 98).

NOTES

• If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays

after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE

LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the

new file name will be canceled.

• See page 111 for a list of error messages that may

appear during disk save.

• The PSR-6000 identifies and handles disk files by

number rather than the file name. If you save to a file

number that already contains data, the original data

will be erased and replaced by the new data.

F6: Disk

■ The [FROM DISK] Button....................................................................................................................................................

Press this button when you want to re-load a

previously saved file from floppy disk. The data

loaded is the same as that saved by the TO DISK

operation described above. When the [FROM DISK]

button is pressed one of the displays shown to the

right will appear, depending on the type of disk

currently in the drive:

If normal data is to be loaded, simply use any of

the LCD dials to select the file you want to load. The

size of each file in the file list will appear to the right

of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). If a style

disk is loaded the style data disk display will appear.

In this case use the left LCD dials to select either I/

A SET or CUSTOM STYLE data, then use the right

LCD dials to select the style or style group (A1—

A6, A7—A12, B1—B6, or B7—B12).

When the file has been specified, press the EX-

ECUTE LCD button to actually begin the load op-

eration — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation

display will appear.

If you want to execute the load operation press

the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button

to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the data is being loaded, and the

progress of the load operation will be indicated by a

bar graph at the bottom of the display.

NOTES

• The [FROM DISK] button allows all data in a file to be

loaded at once. To load individual data groups use the

FROM DISK function described on page 94.

• See page 111 for a list of error messages that may

appear during a disk load operation.

RB EFFECT

DISK IN USE

FROM

DISK

■ The F6: DISK Functions.......................................................................................................................................................

F6: Disk

The F6: DISK function accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data.

If you select the F6: DISK when no disk is present in the drive, the “Disk not found. Please insert disk. ”

message will appear on the display.

● 1 FROM DISK

Loads the specified file from a floppy disk in-

serted into the PSR-6000 disk drive.

If the FILE LIST display shown above is not

showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it.

Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file to load.

The name of the selected file is displayed to the right

of the file number, and the size of the file appears to

the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate).

If you want to select a specific type of data to

load, press the CONTENTS LCD button.

The LCD dials can now be used to select only

one type of data to be loaded from the selected file

(or “ALL DATA ” to load all of the data types).

Some selections provide extra choices, listed in the

chart below. Press the LIST LCD button when you

want to go back to the FILE LIST display.

When the file and other parameters have been

specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actu-

ally begin the load operation — the “Are you

sure?” confirmation display will appear.

If you want to execute the load operation press

the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button

to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the data is being loaded, and the

progress of the load operation will be indicated by a

bar graph at the bottom of the display.

F6: Disk

ALL DATA All of the below.

SET UP Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/GM Chain list data).

DISK STYLE Disk Style data saved via a TO SAVE operation.

CUSTOM VOICE Custom voice data.

CUSTOM STYLE Custom style data.

Press the GROUP LCD button to go to the group display. Use the left LCD dials to select the

group to be loaded from disk, then the right LCD dials to select the custom accompaniment

group to which the data is to be loaded. Press the CONTENTS LCD button to go back to the

contents screen or the LIST LCD button to go back to the file list.

PANEL REGIST Panel registration data.

ONE TOUCH S. One touch setting data.

PAD DATA Multi, Tempo, and Percussion pad assignment data.

SEQUENCER Sequencer song data.

Press the INDIVIDUAL LCD button to go to the individual song select display. Use the left LCD

dials to select the song to be loaded from disk, then the right LCD dials to select the song

number to which the data is to be loaded. Press the CONTENTS LCD button to go back to the

contents screen or the LIST LCD button to go back to the file list.

The following data types can be selected for loading:

● 2 TO DISK

Saves the data listed below to a floppy disk

inserted into the PSR-6000 disk drive.

If the FILE LIST display shown above is not

showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it.

Use any of the LCD dials to select the file to which

you want to save the data. The file list at the bottom

of the display includes all files which currently exist

on the disk and one “NEW” file (named “N-FILE”).

Select an existing file if you want to overwrite the

file with the new data, or select the “NEW” file if

you want to create a new file. With the exception of

the “NEW” file, the size of each file will appear to

the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate).

If you want to give a new file an original filename

or change the name of an existing file prior to saving

it to disk, press the NAME LCD button to go to the

name display.

NOTES

• See page 28 for instructions on loading data from an

optional Style Disk by using the FROM DISK function.

File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use

the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the

various character positions, then use the A~Z or

0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for

each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital

letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and

special characters.

When the file and, if necessary, the file name has

been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to

actually begin the save operation — the “Are you

sure?” confirmation display will appear.

If you want to execute the save operation press

the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button

to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the data is being saved, and the

progress of the save operation will be indicated by

a bar graph at the bottom of the display. You can go

back to the file list by pressing the LIST LCD

button.

The data saved to disk is as follows:

• Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/GM

Chain list data).

• Disk style data.

• Custom voice data.

• Custom style data.

• Panel registration data.

• One touch setting data.

• Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion

assignments).

• Sequencer song data.

NOTES

• If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays

after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE

LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the

new file name will be canceled.

• All data is saved in one operation. Specific data types

can not be saved individually.

• See page 111 for a list of error messages that may

appear during disk save.

• The PSR-6000 identifies and handles disk files by

number rather than the file name. If you save to a file

number that already contains data, the original data

will be erased and replaced by the new data.

F6: Disk

● 3 RENAME FILE

Allows the name of the specified file to be

changed as required.

If the FILE LIST display shown above is not

showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it.

Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file you

want to rename. The name of the selected file is

displayed to the right of the file number, and the size

of the file appears to the right of the file name in

kilobytes (approximate). Press the NAME LCD

button to go to the name display.

File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use

the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the

various character positions, then use the A~Z or

0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for

each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital

letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and

special characters.

When the file and file name have been specified,

press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin

the rename operation — the “Are you sure? ”

confirmation display will appear.

If you want to execute the rename operation

press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD

button to cancel the operation). “Do not re-

move disk! ” will appear while the file is being

renamed. You can go back to the file list by pressing

the LIST LCD button.

NOTES

• If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays

after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE

LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the

new file name will be canceled.

• This function lets you change the name of a file without

having to re-load and then re-save the entire file with a

new name.

• Since the PSR-6000 uses the file number rather than

the file name to recognize and manage data files, a file

saved with the same number as another file will

overwrite that file even if it has a different name.

● 4 DELETE FILE

Deletes the specified file from the disk.

Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file you

want to delete. The name of the selected file is

displayed to the right of the file number, and the size

of the file appears to the right of the file name in

kilobytes (approximate).

When the file has been specified, press the EX-

ECUTE LCD button to actually begin the delete

operation — the “Are you sure? ” confirma-

tion display will appear.

If you want to execute the delete operation press

the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button

to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the file is being deleted.

NOTES

• Files deleted from disk can not be restored (there is no

“Undo” function), so be sure you’ve selected the right

file before actually executing the delete operation.

F6: Disk

● 5 FORMAT DISK

Formats a floppy disk for use with the PSR-

6000.

After inserting a new floppy disk into the disk

drive, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually

begin the format operation — the “Are you sure? ”

confirmation display will appear.

F6: Disk

If you want to execute the format operation press

the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button

to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ”

will appear while the disk is being formatted, and

the progress of the format operation will be indi-

cated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display.

NOTES

• The PSR-6000 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks.

• Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the

disk, so be sure that the disk you’re formatting does not

contain important data!

● 6 DISK FREE AREA

Displays the remaining data capacity of the loaded

disk in approximate percent and kilobytes.

NOTES

• This is a display-only function with no editable param-

eters.

100

F7: Utility

The F7: UTILITY function accesses utility functions that let you turn

memory backup on or off, select the Panel Registration freeze function

mode, and recall the factory preset data.

■ MEMORY BACKUP &

REGISTRATION FREEZE

● MEMORY BACKUP

This function turns memory backup on or off.

Use the MEMORY BACK UP LCD dials to turn

memory backup ON or OFF.

Data Backed Up When

MEMORY BACKUP is ON

• Sequencer Song Data

• Custom Style Data

• Custom Voice Data

• Disk Style Data

• Panel Registration Memory Data

• Multi Pad Data

• Tempo Change Data

• Percussion Pad Data

• One Touch Setting Data

• Voice Part Select

• Orchestration

• Orchestra 1 Voice

• Orchestra 2 Voice

• Orchestra 1 Octave

• Orchestra 2 Octave

• Mixer Display Volume

(ORCH1, ORCH2, CHD1, CHD2,

BASS, RHY)

• Harmony On/Off

• Harmony Type

• Style

• ABC On/Off

• ABC Mode

• Manual Bass Voice

• Transpose Data

• Tune

• IA On/Off

• Accompaniment Variation

• Multi Pad Select

• Pad Synchro, Break, Repeat, On/Off

• Left Hold On/Off

• Key Velocity On/Off

• Foot Switch Assign Data

• Foot Switch Percussion

• Foot Controller Assign Data

• Sustain On/Off

• Sustain Part Select

• Pitch Bend Select

• Wheel On/Off

• Wheel Type

• Split Point

• IA Mode

• Auto Solo On/Off

• IA Sensitivity

• IA Part

• One Touch Setting Mode

• Reverb On/Off

• Reverb Type & Depth

• Effect On/Off

• Effect Type & Depth

• Memory Backup On/Off

• MIDI Transmit Ch

• MIDI Receive Ch

• MIDI Split Send Ch

• MIDI Rhythm Receive Ch

• MIDI Sequencer Ch

• MIDI Multi Part Ch

• MIDI Multi Part Volume

• MIDI Multi Part Voice

• MIDI Switch (Control Change, Pitch

Bend, Program Change, System

Exclusive)

• MIDI Clock

• MIDI Local On/Off

• MIDI Transpose Add Note

• MIDI Split Send On/Off, Enable

• DOC/GM Chain list data

* The above data will be retained in memory for about one week even if the power is not turned on. To retain the

backed up data for longer periods, turn the power switch ON for a few minutes at least once a week.

* The default setting for this parameter is “OFF”.

101

F7: Utility

Data Backed Up At All Times (MEMORY BACKUP ON or OFF)

• Sequencer Song Data

• Custom Style Data

• Custom Voice Data

• Disk Style Data

• Panel Registration Memory Data

• Multi Pad Data

• Tempo Change Data

• Percussion Pad Data

• One Touch Setting Data

NOTES

• The data backed up (retained in memory even when the

power is turned off) by the PSR-6000 are listed above. When

memory backup is turned OFF, the initial factory settings are

automatically recalled whenever the power is turned on.

● REGISTRATION FREEZE

Determines whether Panel Registration

[FREEZE] button (page 42) freezes the accompa-

niment or voice settings.

Use the REGISTRATION FREEZE LCD dials

to select ACCOMP. FREEZE or VOICE FREEZE

as required.

ALL DATA All of the below.

CUSTOM VOICE Custom voice data.

PANEL REGIST Panel registration data.

ONE TOUCH S. One touch setting data.

PAD DATA Multi, Tempo, and Percus-

sion pad assignment data.

SPLIT POINT The split point key.

HARMONY TYPE The harmony type.

CONTROLLER All controller settings (F3

function group).

ABC & IA Auto Bass Chord & Interac-

tive Accompaniment data,

preset IA style “New Age”

(No.12 button).

REVERB Reverb type, depth.

EFFECT Effect type, depth.

MIDI All MIDI data.

■ RECALL PRESET DATA........................................................................................................................................................

Recalls the specified initial factory settings.

Use any of the LCD dials to select the type of

factory preset data you want to recall (see list be-

low), then press the EXECUTE LCD button — the

“Are you sure? ” confirmation display will

appear.

If you want to execute the recall preset data

operation press the YES LCD button (or press the

NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Ex-

ecuting.” will appear while the data is being

initialized, “Completed.” will appear briefly

when the job is finished.

Data initialized by the RECALL PRESET

DATA function:

102

F8: MIDI

MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communica-

tion interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to

share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create

“systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and

control than is available with isolated instruments. The PSR-6000 offers a range of

MIDI functions that allow it to be used in even sophisticated MIDI systems.

The MIDI parameters available on the PSR-6000 are different according to

whether the normal play mode or Disk Orchestra/General MIDI mode is selected.

Playback of Disk Orchestra Collection and General MIDI music software disks is

described on page 43.

NOTES

• Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables

longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.

■ THE NORMAL PLAY MODE..............................................................................................................................................

In the PSR-6000’s normal mode of operation (i.e. when the DOC/GM mode is not selected)

key on/off, voice, sustain, volume, pitch bend, and other performance data is transmitted and

received without modification directly via the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN connectors. The

receive channel is determined by the MIDI channel setting parameter described on page 104.

It is also possible to play the rhythm instrument voices via the rhythm channel (page 104). More

complex control is available through the Multi Part Setting parameters (page 105), allowing

up to 8 different voices to be controlled via different MIDI channels. It is possible, for example,

to play a number of melody parts from an external MIDI control device to the accompaniment

of the PSR-6000 ABC system.

■ THE DOC MODE ...........................................................................................................................................................................

In this mode the PSR-6000 can play Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) software.

MIDI data is transmitted and received in accordance with Yamaha DOC specifications.

For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 128, the “Voice List” on page 116,

and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121.

3 Ways To Select the DOC Mode

• Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically selected).

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button (the normal, DOC, and

General MIDI modes are selected in sequence).

• Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode” message from an external MIDI device.

103

F8: MIDI

■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM) MODE...............................................................................................................................

In this mode MIDI data is received and transmitted in accordance with the General MIDI

System Level 1 standard. General MIDI data can be received via the MIDI IN

connector and played by the PSR-6000. General MIDI data transmitted via the PSR-6000

MIDI OUT connector can be used to control appropriate tone generators and other MIDI

equipment.

For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 128, the “Voice List” on page 116,

and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121.

3 Ways To Select the GENERAL MIDI Mode

• Insert a General MIDI disk (the GM mode is automatically selected).

• Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button.

• Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To GM Mode” message from an external MIDI

device.

❍ ABOUT GENERAL MIDI

The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instru-

ments, even if they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was

originally created to control a tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone

generator from manufacturer B. Since the voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is

usually different, however, appropriate program change data must be transmitted to select the right voices.

The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when

playing software created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice

allocation in which the same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI

channels. The current standard recognized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System

Level 1.” The PSR-6000 voice allocation complies with the GM System Level 1 standard when it is switched to

the GM mode. See the “Voice List” on page 116 for details.

● Initial General MIDI Mode Settings

When the General MIDI mode is selected, the

parameters listed below are initialized as shown.

General MIDI System Level 1 Mode Initial Settings

Program Change# 0 (Grand Piano)

Pitch Bend ±0 (Center)

Volume 100

Pan Voice Preset

Modulation 0 (Off)

Expression 127 (Max.)

Hold (Sustain) 0 (Off)

Pitch Bend Sense 02H/00H (2 semitones)

Fine Tune 40H/00H ±0

Coarse Tune 40H/00H ±0

RPN NULL

104

F8: MIDI

The contents of this display are different depending on whether the normal play mode or the DOC/GM mode is

selected.

MIDI Channel & Multi Part Settings

■ Normal Play Mode

● CH. SETTING

Sets the basic transmit, basic receive, split trans-

mit, and rhythm receive channels.

Use the TRANSMIT LCD dials to select the

basic transmit channel (1 … 16), and the RECEIVE

LCD dials to select the basic receive channel (1 …

16, All). The SPLIT TRANSMIT LCD dials se-

lect the split (left-hand) transmit channel (1 … 16),

and the RHYTHM RECEIVE LCD dials select the

rhythm receive channel (1 … 16).

TRANSMIT

This setting determines the basic channel on

which all PSR-6000 data will be transmitted in

the normal play mode.

RECEIVE

The receive channel is the basic channel on

which the PSR-6000 will receive all MIDI data.

If set to “All,” data can be received via all 16

MIDI channels.

SPLIT TRANSMIT

The split transmit channel functions only in the

normal play mode. This is the channel on which

left-hand performance data (i.e. data produced

by playing keys to the left of the split point) will

be transmitted. Right-hand performance data is

transmitted on the basic transmit channel.

RHYTHM RECEIVE

This setting specifies an independent MIDI channel

via which the PSR-6000’s rhythm (drums and

percussion) can be controlled. This means you

can, for example, play the selected voice via the

basic receive channel while simultaneously playing

the rhythm instruments via a different channel

NOTES

• The rhythm channel cannot be specified in the DOC/GM

mode. Channel 15 is reserved for rhythm in the DOC mode,

while channel 10 is reserved for rhythm in the GM mode.

105

(i.e. the RHYTHM RECEIVE channel).

● SEQ. TRACK CH.

Individually sets the transmit channels for the

sequencer tracks.

Use the LCD dials — TR1 through TR7 to set the

transmit channels for the corresponding tracks.

These settings only apply when the normal play

mode is selected. Separate transmit channels can be

set for sequencer tracks 1 through 7 (the ACCOMP.

track does not transmit) so the PSR-6000 sequencer

can be used to drive an external multi-timbre tone

generator or multiple tone generators via the speci-

fied channels.

NOTES

• If basic, split, and or sequencer track transmit channels

are set to the same MIDI channel number, DUP will

appear below the channel number. If the basic and split

transmit channels are set to the same number, the data

from both the left- and right-hand sections of the

keyboard will be transmitted on the basic transmit

channel (the content of the data to be transmitted can

be set via the “SPLIT SEND” function described on

page 108). Further, if several sequencer tracks are set

to transmit on the same channel, the data from all those

tracks will be transmitted on the same channel.

• As with the transmit channels described above, if the

basic, rhythm, and or multi part (described below)

receive channels are set to the same MIDI channel

number, DUP will appear below the channel number.

In this case the received data will apply to all voices

accessed by that channel number. If, for example, the

basic, rhythm, and multi part receive channel are all set

to the same number, any note data received on that

channel will play the orchestra 1, rhythm, and multi part

voices simultaneously.

● MULTI PART

Allows the receive channel, volume, and voice

to be independently specified for 8 separate “parts”

to be controlled from an external MIDI device.

NOTES

• In the DOC mode MIDI reception occurs via channels

1 through 10, and channel 15 (rhythm part). In the GM

mode, reception occurs on all channels regardless of

these settings.

With the MULTI PART CH. parameters se-

lected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through PART8

— to set the MIDI receive channels of the corre-

F8: MIDI

106

sponding parts.

With the MULTI PART VOL. parameters se-

lected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through PART8

— to set the volume levels of the corresponding

F8: MIDI

parts.

With the MULTI PART VOICE parameters

selected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through

PART8 — to select the voices to be used by the

corresponding parts.

NOTES

• Note that parts that are not required can be turned

“OFF” via the “Channel” parameter in the MULTI PART

RECEIVE CHANNEL display.

• If the channel number of any part is set to the same

channel number as another part DUP will appear

below both channel numbers, and OFF will appear

below the higher-numbered part indicating that the

part is turned off.

• Any of the preset or custom voices can be specified via

the voice parameter in the MULTI PART VOICE dis-

play.

• If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” a multi part

receive channel cannot be assigned (OFF and DUP

will appear on the display).

■ DOC/GM Mode

Sets the keyboard transmit channel, turns local

control on or off, and specifies the transpose type for

the DOC/GM mode.

Use the KEYBOARD CHANNEL LCD dial to

set the transmit channel (1 … 16), the LOCAL

CONTROL LCD dials to turn local control on or off

107

F8: MIDI

(see description below), and the TRANSPOSE LCD

dials to set the transpose type as required (see

description below).

● KEYBOARD CHANNEL

In addition to accepting MIDI note data on 16

channels (also during disk playback), the PSR-6000

has a separate keyboard note channel. Data on this

channel can only be controlled via the PSR-6000

panel controls (when LOCAL CONTROL is ON),

and is not affected by MIDI data. This data is

transmitted via MIDI OUT, on the KEYBOARD

CHANNEL.

● LOCAL CONTROL

The “Local” parameter determines whether the

PSR-6000 is controlled by its own keyboard or

MIDI data received from an external MIDI device.

When local control is on, the PSR-6000 keyboard

controls its internal tone generator, allowing the

internal voices to be played directly from the key-

board. Local control can be turned off, however, so that

the PSR-6000 keyboard does not play the internal voices,

but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted

via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on

the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator

responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN

connector. This means that while an external sequencer or

MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR-6000’s inter-

nal voices, an external tone generator can be played from

the PSR-6000 keyboard.

When Local is “ON” voice and controller parameters

that can be played via the keyboard are set to the same

channel as the transmit channel.

● TRANSPOSE

When this parameter is set to RECEIVE, the PSR-

6000 transpose settings are not applied to transmitted

MIDI data. When set to TRANSMIT, the PSR-6000

transpose settings apply to transmitted MIDI data in the

same they do to notes played on the PSR-6000 itself. As

for received MIDI data, when this parameter is set to

TRANSMIT the note data is not transposed, and when set to RECEIVE the note data is transposed.

MIDI Switch, System Settings, & Data Transmission

■ MIDI SWITCH (Normal Play Mode Only)

Allows reception and transmission of control

change, program change, pitch bend, and system

exclusive data to be independently turned on or off.

Use the appropriate LCD dials to turn CON-

TROL CHANGE , PROGRAM CHANGE , PITCH

BEND, and/or SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE data recep-

tion and transmission ON or OFF.

NOTES

• These “switches” can be used to determine how the

PSR-6000 responds to MIDI data received from exter-

nal equipment. If, for example, you don’t want the PSR-

6000 voices to be changed by program change mes-

sages received from an external device, turn the pro-

gram change switch “OFF.”

• The same applies to transmission from the PSR-6000

— turn off data that you don’t want to be transmitted to

108

external equipment.

F8: MIDI

• In the DOC/GM mode, all control change data are transmitted and received regardless of the settings on this page.

■ MIDI SYSTEM (Normal Play Mode Only)

These functions provide access to a number of

important MIDI system “switches” — internal or

external clock synchronization, local control on/off,

transpose data transmission on/off, and split mode

data transmission on/off.

Use the appropriate LCD dials to set the CLOCK,

LOCAL CONTROL , TRANSPOSE, and SPLIT

SEND parameters as required (see descriptions be-

low).

● CLOCK

INT (internal) clock setting is the normal setting

when the PSR-6000 is being used alone. If you are

using the PSR-6000 with an external sequencer,

MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want

the PSR-6000 to be synchronized to the external

device, set this function to EXT (external). In the

latter case, the external device must be connected to

the PSR-6000 MIDI IN connector, and must be

transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.

● LOCAL CONTROL

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally,

the PSR-6000 keyboard controls its internal tone

generator, allowing the internal voices to be played

directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local

Control ON” since the internal tone generator is

controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local con-

trol can be turned off, however, so that the PSR-

6000 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but

the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted

via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played

on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone

generator responds to MIDI information received via the

MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external

sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the

PSR-6000’s internal voices, an external tone generator

can be played from the PSR-6000 keyboard.

● TRANSPOSE

When this parameter is set to RECEIVE, the transmit-

ted MIDI note data will not be affected by the PSR-6000

transpose setting. When set to TRANSMIT the transmit-

ted notes will be transposed in accordance with the PSR-

6000 transpose setting. The reverse is true for reception:

when set to TRANSMIT received note data is not trans-

posed; when set to RECEIVE received note data is

transposed.

● SPLIT SEND

The SPLIT SEND parameter can be set so that MIDI

note data from the left-hand (L), right-hand (R), or both

sections of the keyboard (L&R) are transmitted via the

MIDI OUT connector. You could choose to transmit only

109

F8: MIDI

the right-hand data so that only notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard are reproduced via an external tone

generator, for example. When turned OFF data from the entire keyboard is transmitted on the basic transmit channel.

■ DATA TRANSMIT (Normal Play

Mode Only)

Transmits the specified PSR-6000 panel or memory

data via the MIDI OUT connector.

Use any of the LCD dials to select PANEL or

MEMORY data (see below), then press the EX-

ECUTE LCD button — the “Are you sure? ”

confirmation display will appear.

If you want to transmit the selected data press the

YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to

cancel the operation). The progress of the data

transmit operation will be indicated by a bar graph

at the bottom of the display.

The selected data is transmitted as a MIDI bulk

dump that can be automatically received by a second

PSR-6000 or other compatible MIDI device.

PANEL

When PANEL is selected all PSR-6000 panel

settings are transmitted.

MEMORY

When MEMORY is selected the following data

types are transmitted:

• Panel data.

110

• Panel registration data.

• One touch setting data.

• Multi, tempo, and percussion pad data.

• Custom voice data.

• Custom style data.

• Sequencer data.

● MIDI Bulk Dump Reception (Memory

Data Receive)

The PSR-6000 can receive bulk data transmitted

by a second PSR-6000 as long as it is not accessing

disk data, the Custom Accompaniment Programmer

is not engaged, and the DOC/GM mode is not

selected. When a bulk dump is received the follow-

ing display will appear:

F8: MIDI

The bar graph roughly indicates the progress of

the bulk dump receive operation. “Completed.”

will appear on the display when the data has been

successfully received.

● Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump Request

Messages

When the normal play mode is selected and the

PSR-6000 receives a MIDI bulk dump request mes-

sage from an external device, The display appears

and a bulk data transmission is performed. Progress

of the transmission is shown in bar-graph form on

the display.

● Bulk Dump Error Messages

If an error is encountered during bulk reception,

a “System Exclusive Error ” error message

will appear for a few seconds and the receive opera-

tion will be terminated. In most cases the data will

be replaced up until the point at which the error

occurred. Data being received at the time the error

occurred will be initialized. All other data is not

affected.

NOTES

• Broken cables and other external problems can also

cause a “System Exclusive Error” message.

111

Error Messages

If you attempt to perform an illegal operation or some other problem occurs, the PSR-6000 will usually warn you

with an error message that provides an idea of what caused the problem and how it can be rectified. The following

are the error messages you’re most likely to see during normal operation.

Some of the error displays automatically revert to the previous display after a few seconds, while others require

that the CANCEL LCD button be pressed to exit from the error display.

If a damaged disk is used the data countdown during FROM DISK or TO DISK operations may stop and the load

or save operation may get “hung up.” In this case, eject the disk from the drive even though the DISK IN USE lamp

may be on. Discard the damaged disk.

■ Sequencer Errors........................................................................................................................................................................

You have attempted to play back a sequence using a different time

signature from the one with which it was recorded.

A data error has been encountered during playback which makes

continued playback impossible.

The sequencer memory is full and no more data can be recorded. You

may have to clear songs or data to make room. Save data you want to

keep to floppy disk, then clear it from the PSR-6000 memory.

There is too much data for the specified edit operation. Simplify the

sequence and try again.

Time signature conflict!

Playback not possible.

Data error!

Playback stopped.

Memory full!

Recording stopped.

Too much data!

Operation cancelled.

■ Custom Accompaniment Programmer Errors.............................................................................................

Not enough memory is available to store all the data. Simplify the

accompaniment to reduce the amount of data, then try storing the data

again.

The work area memory used during custom accompaniment recording

is full and recording cannot continue. Simplify the accompaniment so

that it fits in the available work area.

This message will appear if you attempt to set a track which contains

preset data to the record mode.

You have attempted to exit from the Custom Accompaneiment Pro-

grammer or change styles without first saving the edited data. Press the

appropriate LCD button to continue.

Memory full!

Cannot store data.

Work area full!

Recording stopped.

Preset track!

Cannot record.

Edited data not stored!

■ Disk Errors..........................................................................................................................................................................................

A data error has occurred during a save, load, delete, or format

operation. Press the CANCEL LCD button to clear this error message.

The floppy disk does not have enough remaining capacity to carry out

the specified operation. Press the CANCEL LCD button to clear this

error message.

The file name is all spaces and cannot be recognized by the PSR-6000.

Disk error!

Cannot continue.

Disk full!

Cannot continue.

Bad file name.

112

Error Messages

Not enough memory to load the specified sequencer file from disk.

You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete, format, or disk

free area operation while a pre-programmed (non-user) disk is in the

drive.

The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is the wrong

type or has the wrong format. The current disk is write protected so no

format option is provided with this error message (see below).

The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is the wrong

type or has the wrong format. In this case the current disk can be written

to, so a format option is provided with the error message.

The disk write protect tab is in the write disable position, so the

specified operation cannot be performed.

No disk in drive. Insert an appropriate disk and try again.

The disk does not contain any files saved by the user.

Not enough memory.

Not a user disk!

Cannot continue.

Wrong disk type/format!

Cannot continue.

Wrong disk type/format!

Format disk? (All data will

be erased!)

Disk write protected!

Cannot continue.

Disk not found.

Please insert disk.

File not found!

■ MIDI Errors..........................................................................................................................................................................................

An error has been encountered while receiving MIDI system exclusive

data — e.g. during a MIDI bulk dump operation.

The MIDI receive buffer cannot handle the amount of data being

received. Reduce the complexity of the data being received and try

again.

System exclusive error.

MIDI receive buffer over-

flow.

■ DOC/GM Mode Errors.............................................................................................................................................................

The loaded disk does not contain DOC or GM song files recognizable

by the PSR-6000.

The specified song file cannot be found on the currently loaded disk.

An error was encountered while loading data from the disk.

Wrong disk type!

(Operation cancelled.)

File not found!

(Operation cancelled.)

Disk load error!

Operation cancelled.

■ Other Messages............................................................................................................................................................................

The PSR-6000 retains all data in memory for up to approximately one

week if the power is not turned on during this time. This message will

appear if a longer period of time has elapsed since the last time the

power was turned on. In this case all data will be initialized to the

factory-preset values. This message will also appear when all internal

data is initialized by turning on the power while holding the [EXIT] and

[DEMO] buttons.

Back up time limit exceeded!

All data was initialized.

113

Troubleshooting

Possible Cause/SolutionSymptom

This is a normal result of the power surge that occurs when the unit is

turned on of off. No solution necessary.

The volume controls or foot controller are turned all the way down.

Set the volume controls and foot controller to a reasonable listening

level.

A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Unplug the

headphones.

MIDI local control is turned OFF. Turn MIDI local control ON.

Are you sure you’re playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard?

You are using single-finger type fingering in the fingered mode, or vice-

versa. Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected ABC mode.

The PSR-6000 is constantly checking for the presence of a disk. This is

not a problem.

The [LIST HOLD] button is engaged (its LED is lit). Press the [LIST

HOLD] button so that its indicator goes out, then try selecting a style or

voice (page 11).

The GM/DOC, Sequencer, or Custom Accomp. mode is engaged. All

function menus are available in the normal play mode.

PRESET/NO ASSIGN is selected for that intro/fill/ending in the I/F/E

display screen. Set to USER and try again (page 73).

Noise is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

No sound.

The disk lamp lights dimly.

The ABC chord does not change

even when a different chord is

played.

The style list or voice list does not

appear even when a STYLE or

VOICE group button is pressed.

Some function menus cannot be

selected.

An intro, fill-in, or ending created

using the Custom Accompaniment

Programmer cannot be used.

114

Index

a tempo pad ................................... 40

ABC modes .................................... 19

accel. pad....................................... 39

Accents, adding ............................. 64

Accompaniment ............................. 19

Accompaniment volume................. 25

Accompaniment, ways to start ....... 22

Attack, custom voice ...................... 80

Auto solo ........................................ 27

Aux in jacks ...................................... 6

Aux out jacks.................................... 6

Bass and chord tracks ................... 64

Brilliance, custom voice ................. 79

Channel setting, MIDI .................. 104

Chord pads .................................... 35

Chord playback .............................. 36

Chord recording ............................. 35

Clock, MIDI................................... 108

CONTRAST control........................ 11

Controller functions ........................ 86

Controller, custom voice ................ 78

Copy, custom accompaniment....... 71

Create measure, sequencer .......... 58

Custom accompaniment editing..... 68

Custom accompaniment

programmer.............................. 62

Custom accompaniment

programmer, exiting ................. 74

Custom accompaniment style,

selecting & using ...................... 74

Custom style number ..................... 65

Custom voice edit .......................... 77

Data backup..................................... 2

Data initialization ............................ 12

Data transmit, MIDI ...................... 109

Decay, custom voice ...................... 80

Delete file, disk function ................. 98

Delete measure, sequencer ........... 58

Demo play modes ............................ 9

Demo playback ................................ 8

Depth, custom voice ...................... 79

Detune, custom voice, dual............ 82

Disk free area function ................... 99

Disk functions................................. 94

Disk styles ...................................... 28

Display ........................................... 10

DOC and General MIDI disks,

playing ...................................... 43

DOC mode ................................... 102

DOC volume control....................... 45

DOC/GM mode, MIDI................... 106

Drum voice edit functions............... 83

Dual voice edit functions ................ 81

Effect depth .................................... 85

Effect type ...................................... 85

Effects ............................................ 31

Envelope, custom voice ................. 80

Erase, sequencer ........................... 60

Error messages............................ 111

EXIT button .................................... 76

Fader assign, custom

accompaniment ........................ 70

faster pad ....................................... 40

Fill-ins............................................. 24

Fingered chord accompaniment .... 19

Floppy disk & drive........................... 3

Foot controller function .................. 86

Foot controller jack........................... 7

Foot switch function ....................... 88

Footswitch jack................................. 7

Format disk function....................... 98

Freeze function .............................. 42

FROM DISK button ........................ 93

From disk function.......................... 94

Function selection and editing,

general procedure .................... 75

Functions........................................ 75

General MIDI mode...................... 103

GM volume control ......................... 47

Harmony......................................... 31

Harmony type................................. 90

Harmony, sequencer...................... 54

Headphones jack ............................. 6

Help function .................................. 11

I/F/E select, custom

accompaniment ........................ 73

Interactive accompaniment ...... 27, 89

Intro, fill-in, and ending sections,

creating..................................... 66

Key velocity .................................... 18

Keyboard channel, MIDI .............. 107

Keyboard percussion ..................... 14

Left hold ......................................... 32

LIST HOLD button ......................... 11

Local control, MIDI ............... 107, 108

Manual bass mode......................... 21

Measure/beat, custom

accompaniment ........................ 69

Memory backup............................ 100

Metronome, sequencer .................. 54

MIDI bulk dump error messages .. 110

MIDI bulk dump reception ............ 110

MIDI bulk dump request ............... 110

MIDI channel and multi-part

settings ................................... 104

MIDI functions .............................. 102

MIDI jacks ........................................ 7

MIDI switch................................... 107

MIDI switch, system settings, &

data transmission ................... 107

MIDI system ................................. 107

MIXER button................................. 10

Modulation, custom voice .............. 79

Modulation/effect wheel ........... 32, 86

Multi pad repeat playback .............. 36

Multi part, MIDI............................. 105

115

Index

Music stand ...................................... 7

Muting DOC parts .......................... 46

Muting GM parts............................. 48

Name, custom accompaniment ..... 68

Name, custom voice ...................... 77

Name, custom voice, drum ............ 83

Name, custom voice, dual.............. 81

Normal play mode ........................ 102

Note shift, sequencer ..................... 60

Octave change............................... 18

Octave, custom voice..................... 78

Octave, custom voice, dual............ 82

One touch setting ........................... 29

One touch setting synchro change 89

One touch setting/IA functions ....... 89

Orchestration.................................. 12

Pads, multi mode ........................... 33

Pads, perc mode ............................ 37

Pads, tempo mode......................... 39

Pan, custom voice.......................... 78

Pan, custom voice, drum ............... 83

Pan, custom voice, dual................. 82

Panel registration ........................... 41

Perc break function ........................ 38

Perc pad instrument assignment ... 37

Percussion instrument cancel ........ 64

Phrase pads................................... 33

Phrase recording & playback ......... 34

Pitch bend wheel...................... 32, 87

Pitch bend, custom voice ............... 78

Pitch, custom voice, drum .............. 83

Power supply ................................... 2

Quantize, custom accompaniment. 70

Quantize, sequencer ...................... 59

Recall preset data ........................ 101

Record track selection ................... 50

Recording type, sequencer ............ 55

Release, custom voice ................... 80

Remove event, custom

accompaniment ........................ 72

Remove event, sequencer ............. 57

Rename file, disk function .............. 97

Resonance, custom voice .............. 79

Reverb............................................ 31

Reverb and effect function ............. 84

Reverb depth ................................. 84

Reverb type.................................... 84

Rhythm track .................................. 63

Rhythm-only accompaniment ........ 25

rit. pad ............................................ 40

Section selection ............................ 24

Section, custom accompaniment ... 68

Sequence editing ........................... 54

Sequencer playback ...................... 53

Sequencer record parametrers ...... 50

Sequencer recording...................... 49

Sequencer track channel, MIDI.... 105

Single finger accompaniment......... 20

slower pad...................................... 40

Softness, custom voice, drum ........ 83

Solo sections.................................. 24

Song clear, sequencer ................... 61

Song number selection .................. 49

Speed, custom voice...................... 79

Split point, changing....................... 16

Split send, MIDI............................ 108

Store, custom accompaniment ...... 72

Style name ..................................... 65

Style selection ................................ 21

Sustain jack...................................... 7

Sustain pedal function.................... 87

Sustain, custom voice .................... 80

Sustain ........................................... 31

Tap start pad .................................. 39

Tempo ............................................ 22

Tempo change pad ........................ 39

Tempo I pad................................... 39

Tempo synchro function................. 40

TO DISK button.............................. 91

To disk function .............................. 95

Tone, custom voice ........................ 79

Touch sensitivity, custom voice ..... 78

Track copy/mix, sequencer ............ 56

Track delete ................................... 52

Track volume, custom

accompaniment ........................ 69

Track volume, sequencer............... 55

Transpose, MIDI................... 107, 108

Transposition ................................. 17

Troubleshooting ........................... 113

Tuning ............................................ 17

User set style assignment .............. 26

User set voice assignment ............. 15

Utility functions ............................. 100

Voice, custom voice, dual .............. 81

Voices, selecting ............................ 13

Volume control ............................... 14

Volume, custom voice, dual ........... 82

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual English Bedienungsanleitung Deutsch Mode d’emploi Français Congratulations! You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-6000 PortaTone combines the most advanced AWM tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. The Interactive Accompaniment and One Touch Setting features, in particular, are brilliant examples of how advanced technology can significantly expand your musical horizons. A new large-size graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument. In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and vast performance potential, we urge you to read the manuals thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Contents Taking Care of Your PortaTone 2 Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive .......... 3 Using Disk Styles on Optional Data Disks ...................................................... 28 ■ Selecting a DISK Style .................... 28 Nomenclature 4 One Touch Setting 29 Connections & Music Stand 6 Expression & Effects 31 The Demonstration 8 The Demo Play Modes ........................ 9 The PSR-6000 Display & Help Function ■ Harmony .......................................... 31 ■ Sustain ............................................ 31 Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks 43 Disk Orchestra Collection Disk Playback ............................................... 43 ■ Volume Control ............................... 45 ■ Muting Specific Parts ...................... 46 ■ Octave, Transpose, and Tune ........ 46 ■ Other Controls That Function ■ Reverb ............................................. 31 In the DOC Mode ............................ 46 ■ Effects ............................................. 31 General MIDI Disk Playback ............ 47 ■ Left Hold .......................................... 32 ■ Volume Control ............................... 47 10 ■ Pitch Bend Wheel ............................ 32 ■ Muting Specific Tracks .................... 48 The Display & Multi-function Controls ................................................ 10 ■ Modulation/Effect Wheel ................. 32 ■ Octave ............................................. 48 ■ Other Controls That Function ■ The [MIXER] Button ........................ 10 Using the Pads ■ The [LIST HOLD] Button ................. 11 The MULTI Mode ................................. 33 ■ The [CONTRAST] Control ............... 11 The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4) ...... 33 ■ Recording Phrases .......................... 34 ■ Phrase Playback ............................. 34 The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8) ....... 35 ■ Recording Chords ........................... 35 ■ Chord Playback ............................... 36 ■ MULTI Pad Repeat Playback .......... 36 The Help Function .............................. 11 Playing the PSR-6000 12 Selecting & Playing Voices ............. 12 Keyboard Percussion ....................... 14 USER SET Voice Assignment ......... 15 Changing the Split Point .................. 16 In the General MIDI Mode ............... 48 33 The Sequencer Recording ............................................. 49 Deleting Tracks ................................... 52 Playback ............................................... 53 Sequence Editing ............................... 54 ■ CONDITION/VOLUME — The PERC Mode .................................. 37 ■ Assigning Different Instruments Transposition, Tuning, Octave Change, & Key Velocity To the PERC Pads .......................... 37 17 ■ Playing the Percussion Pads .......... 38 ■ ■ The PERC BREAK Function ........... 38 TRANSPOSE & TUNE ........................ 17 OCTAVE CHANGE .............................. 18 KEY VELOCITY ................................... 18 The TEMPO Mode ............................... 39 Using the Accompaniment Section Panel Registration ■ ■ ■ The TEMPO SYNCHRO Function .......................................... 40 ■ ■ 19 ■ Accompaniment Volume ................. 25 ■ Rhythm-only Accompaniment ......... 25 USER SET Style Assignment .......... 26 Interactive Accompaniment ............ 27 ■ Auto Solo ......................................... 27 49 41 ■ Registering the Panel Settings ........ 41 Recall the Registered Panel Settings .............................................. 42 The Freeze Function ......................... 42 ■ ■ ■ CONDITION .................................... 54 ● METRONOME ............................ 54 ● HARMONY .................................. 54 ● RECORDING TYPE .................... 55 CONDITION/VOLUME — TRACK VOLUME ............................ 55 EDIT — TRACK COPY/MIX ............ 56 REMOVE EVENT ............................ 57 DELETE MEASURE ....................... 58 CREATE MEASURE ....................... 58 QUANTIZE ...................................... 59 ERASE ............................................ 60 NOTE SHIFT ................................... 60 SONG CLEAR ................................. 61 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ■ OCT/PAN/VOL./DETUNE ............... 82 62 Basic Programming Procedure (Normal section) ................................. 62 Creating Intro, Fill-In, & Ending Sections ................................. 66 Programming a Preset Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section .................. 66 Editing a Previously Saved User Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section ........ 67 Creating a New Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section From Scratch .......... 67 ● ● ● ● OCTAVE ..................................... 82 PAN ............................................. 82 VOLUME ..................................... 82 DETUNE ..................................... 82 Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voice group 12) ................................. 83 ■ NAME/PAN/PITCH/SOFTNESS ..... 83 ● ● ● ● NAME .......................................... 83 PAN ............................................. 83 PITCH ......................................... 83 SOFTNESS ................................. 83 Custom Accompaniment Editing ...... 68 ■ RECORD — NAME/SECTION ........ 68 NAME .......................................... 68 ● SECTION .................................... 68 RECORD — MEASURE/BEAT ....... 69 RECORD — TRACK VOLUME ....... 69 RECORD — FADER ASSIGN ........ 70 EDIT — QUANTIZE ........................ 70 EDIT — COPY ................................ 71 EDIT — REMOVE EVENT .............. 72 STORE ............................................ 72 I/F/E Select ...................................... 73 ● ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Exiting From the Custom Accompaniment Programmer ........ 74 Selecting & Using a Custom Accompaniment Style ....................... 74 The PSR-6000 “Functions” 75 General Function Selection & Editing Procedure .............................. 75 ■ The [EXIT] Button ............................ 76 F1: Custom Voice Edit F2: Reverb/Effect 84 ■ REVERB TYPE & DEPTH .............. 84 REVERB TYPE ........................... 84 REVERB DEPTH ........................ 84 ■ EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH ............... 85 ● EFFECT TYPE ............................ 85 ● EFFECT DEPTH ......................... 85 ● ● F3: Controller 86 ■ FOOT CONTROLLER ..................... 86 ■ MODULATION/EFFECT WHEEL ...... 86 ■ SUSTAIN PEDAL & PITCH BEND WHEEL ..................... 87 ● SUSTAIN PEDAL ........................ 87 ● PITCH BEND WHEEL ................. 87 ■ FOOT SWITCH ............................... 88 F4: One Touch Setting/IA 89 Standard Voice Edit Functions (voice groups 1 through 10) ............ 77 SYNCHRO CHANGE ...................... 89 ACCOMPANIMENT ........................ 89 F6: Disk Dual Voice Edit Functions (voice group 11) .................................. 81 F8: MIDI ● ● NAME .......................................... 81 VOICE ......................................... 81 ■ Normal Play Mode ......................... 104 CH. SETTING ............................ 104 TRANSMIT ................................ 104 RECEIVE ................................... 104 SPLIT TRANSMIT ..................... 104 RHYTHM RECEIVE .................. 104 ● SEQ. TRACK CH. ..................... 105 ● MULTI PART ............................. 105 ■ DOC/GM Mode ............................. 106 ● KEYBOARD CHANNEL ............ 107 ● LOCAL CONTROL .................... 107 ● TRANSPOSE ............................ 107 ● MIDI Switch, System Settings, & Data Transmission ........................... 107 ■ MIDI SWITCH (Normal Play Mode Only) .................................... 107 ■ MIDI SYSTEM (Normal Play Mode Only) .................................... 108 CLOCK ...................................... 108 ● LOCAL CONTROL .................... 108 ● TRANSPOSE ............................ 108 ● SPLIT SEND ............................. 108 ■ DATA TRANSMIT (Normal Play Mode Only) .................................... 109 ● MIDI Bulk Dump Reception (Memory Data Receive) ............ 110 ● Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump Request Messages ................... 110 ● Bulk Dump Error Messages ...... 110 ● Error Messages 111 ■ Sequencer Errors .......................... 111 90 Programmer Errors ....................... 111 ■ Disk Errors .................................... 111 NAME .......................................... 77 ● CONTROLLER ............................ 78 1 TOUCH SENS. ......................... 78 2 PITCH BEND ............................ 78 ■ COMMON ....................................... 78 1 OCTAVE ................................... 78 2 PAN .......................................... 78 ● MODULATION ............................ 79 3 DEPTH ..................................... 79 4 SPEED ..................................... 79 ● TONE .......................................... 79 5 BRILLIANCE ............................ 79 6 RESONANCE .......................... 79 ■ ENVELOPE ..................................... 80 1 ATTACK ................................... 80 2 DECAY ..................................... 80 3 RELEASE ................................. 80 4 SUSTAIN .................................. 80 ■ NAME/VOICE .................................. 81 MIDI Channel & Multi Part Settings ............................ 104 ■ Custom Accompaniment F5: Harmony Type ■ NAME/CONTROL ........................... 77 ● Initial General MIDI Mode Settings ..................................... 103 ■ ONE TOUCH SETTING ■ INTERACTIVE 77 ● 91 ■ The [TO DISK] Button ..................... 91 ■ MIDI Errors .................................... 112 ■ DOC/GM Mode Errors ................... 112 ■ Other Messages ............................ 112 ■ The [FROM DISK] Button ................ 93 ■ The F6: DISK Functions .................. 94 ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 FROM DISK ............................. 94 2 TO DISK ................................... 95 3 RENAME FILE ......................... 97 4 DELETE FILE ........................... 98 5 FORMAT DISK ......................... 98 6 DISK FREE AREA ................... 99 F7: Utility 100 Troubleshooting 113 Index 114 Voice List ............................................ 116 ■ Keyboard Percussion List ............. 118 ■ MEMORY BACKUP & REGISTRATION FREEZE ............ 100 ● MEMORY BACKUP .................. 100 ● REGISTRATION FREEZE ........ 101 ■ RECALL PRESET DATA .............. 101 102 ■ THE NORMAL PLAY MODE ......... 102 ■ THE DOC MODE .......................... 102 ■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM) MODE ........................................... 103 Style List ............................................. 119 Normal Play Mode MIDI Percussion Map ...................... 120 GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map ................................ 121 Fingering Chart ................................. 122 MIDI Function Tree ........................... 128 MIDI Messages .................................. 133 MIDI Implementation Chart ............ 140 Specifications .................................... 141 Taking Care of Your PortaTone Your PortaTone will give you years of playing pleasure if you follow the simple rules given below: ■ Location Do not expose the instrument to the following conditions to avoid deformation, discoloration, or more serious damage. ● Direct sunlight (e.g. near a window). ● High temperatures (e.g. near a heat source, outside, or in a car during the daytime). ● Excessive humidity. ● Excessive dust. ● Strong vibration. ■ Power Supply ● Turn the power switch OFF when the instrument is not in use. ● The power supply cord should be unplugged from the AC outlet if the instrument is not to be used for an extended period of time. ● Unplug the instrument during electric storms. ● Avoid plugging the instrument into the same AC outlet as appliances with high power consumption, such as electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid using multi-plug adapters since these can result in reduced sound quality, operation errors, and possibly damage. ■ Turn Power OFF When Making Connections ● To avoid damage to the instrument and other devices to which it is connected (a sound system, for example), turn the power switches of all related devices OFF prior to connecting or disconnecting audio and MIDI cables. ■ Handling and Transport ● Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts of the instrument. ● Always unplug cables by gripping the plug firmly, not by pulling on the cable. ● Disconnect all cables before moving the instrument. ● Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or placing heavy objects on the instrument can result in scratches and more serious damage. 2 ■ Cleaning ● Clean the cabinet and panel with a dry soft cloth. ● A slightly damp cloth may be used to remove stubborn grime and dirt. ● Never use cleaners such as alcohol or thinner. ● Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instrument (vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface). ■ Electrical Interference ● This instrument contains digital circuitry and may cause interference if placed too close to radio or television receivers. If this occurs, move the instrument further away from the affected equipment. ■ Data Backup ● Internal data (e.g. sequencer data) is retained in memory even if the power switch is turned OFF. If the power is not turned ON for periods longer than about a week, however, memory data will be lost. Save all important data to disk before turning off for longer periods. ● Internal memory data can be corrupted due to incorrect operation. Be sure to “save” important data to a floppy disk frequently so you have a backup to revert to if something happens to damage the data in memory. Also note that magnetic fields can damage data on the disk, so it is advisable to make a second back-up copy of disks that contain very important data, and keep backup disks in a safe place away from stray magnetic fields (i.e. away from speakers, appliances containing motors, etc.). ■ Service and Modification ● The PSR-6000 contains no user serviceable parts. Opening it or tampering with it in anyway can lead to irreparable damage and possibly electric shock. Refer all servicing to qualified YAMAHA personnel. Taking Care of Your PortaTone Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive ■ Type of Disk ■ Floppy Disk Handling & Storage Use only 3.5-inch 2DD floppy disks. ■ Disk Insertion & Removal ● To insert a floppy disk in the disk drive, hold the disk with the label side facing up and the sliding shutter facing the disk drive door, then insert carefully until the disk clicks into place. ● To remove a floppy disk from the disk drive, make sure the disk drive “in use” light is not lit and press the disk eject button firmly as far as it will go and then, when the disk is full ejected, remove it by hand. If the eject button is only partially pressed or pressed too quickly the eject mechanism may not function properly, leaving the disk stuck halfway. Do not attempt to remove the disk forcefully if this happens, since excess force can damage the disk and/or the drive mechanism. Try either pressing the eject button carefully again, or push the disk all the way back into the drive and repeat the eject procedure. The actual recording medium inside a floppy disk has a fine coating of magnetic particles in which the data is “stored”. To protect this coating as well as the disk drive’s delicate read-write head, please observe the following: ● Always keep floppy disks in their plastic case when they are not in use. Never place heavy objects on a disk or bend the disk in any way. Also keep disks away from liquids and dust. ● Never open the disk’s shutter and touch the exposed surface of the disk. ● Keep floppy disks away from strong magnetic fields such as those produced by television sets, speakers, motors, etc. ● Never leave floppy disks in areas exposed to strong direct sunlight, excessively high or low temperature, or high humidity. ● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. ● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. ■ Protecting Your data ● To prevent accidental erasure of important data you have saved to floppy disk, be sure to slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “write protect” position (the tab window should be open). When this is done the disk cannot be written to. ● Never attempt to remove a floppy disk during a record or playback operation!! This can corrupt the data on the disk, and actually damage the disk drive! ● Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read/write errors. ■ Clean the Read/Write Head Regularly This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/ write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order we recommend that you use a commercially-available Drytype Head Cleaning Disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the available of head-cleaning disks. Write protected Write enabled ● Make regular backup copies of important data to a separate floppy disk, and keep your backup disks in a separate, safe place. ● To ensure the safety of your data (and of the disk drive itself) always use floppy disks from a well-known, reliable manufacturer. “No-brand” disks can cause trouble. YAMAHA is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling or operation. 3 Nomenclature FOOT CONTROLLER SUSTAIN FOOT SWITCH THRU ––––––––– OUT ––––––––– IN –––– MIDI 5 6 7 8 CONTRAST FUNCTION HELP/ LANGUAGE EXIT * & 9 STYLE 4 MASTER VOLUME 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 MAX FOR DISK IA ONE TOUCH SETTING @ # CHORUS B TEMPO ) MIXER MIN INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT AUTO BASS CHORD VERSE A FILL IN ENDING/ rit. VERSE 1 CHORUS A – $0 ! FILL IN VERSE B % VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 LIST HOLD + q ^ CHORUS 2 SOLO SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START MULTI PLAYING MULTI REPEAT STOP PERC. BREAK REC / STOP TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT INTRO 1 E INTRO 2 INTRO 3 R PITCH BEND MODULATION/ EFFECT UP MAX DOWN MIN PHONES 1 POWER Button ........................................ [page 8] 2 DEMO Button ........................................... [page 8] 3 DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI Button ..................................................... [page 43] 4 MASTER VOLUME Control ...................... [page 8] 5 CONTRAST Control ............................... [page 11] 6 FUNCTION Button ................................. [page 75] 7 HELP/LANGUAGE Button ..................... [page 11] 8 EXIT Button ........................................ [page 9, 11] 9 STYLE Buttons .............. [page 21, 26, 28, 62, 64] PRESET, USER SET, CUSTOM A, CUSTOM B, Style Group [1] – [12] Buttons 0 INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT Beat Display ........................................... [page 22] $ Fill-in, Intro, and Ending Buttons [page 22, 23, 25] FILL INj (INTRO 1), FILL INn (INTRO 2), ENDING/rit. (INTRO 3) % Verse, Chorus, and Solo Buttons ........... [page 24] VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, CHORUS 2, SOLO ^ Accompaniment Control Buttons [page 22, 23, 25] SYNCHRO START, START/RE-START, STOP & Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .............. [page 8, 10] * LCD Buttons ....................................... [page 8, 10] ( LCD Dials ........................................... [page 9, 10] Button ..................................................... [page 27] ) MIXER Button ........................................ [page 10] ! AUTO BASS CHORD Button ................. [page 19] q LIST HOLD Button ................................. [page 11] @ ONE TOUCH SETTING Buttons ............ [page 29] w PAD Buttons ........................................... [page 33] VERSE A, VERSE B, CHORUS A, CHORUS B 4 # TEMPO [–], [+] Buttons and PAD MODE SELECT Buttons, REC/STOP, 1-8 PHRAS 1 2 Tempo Change Tap Start Nomenclature L/L+R –– AUX IN –– R L/L+R –– AUX OUT –– R e * SEQUENCER PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 r 2 SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM DEMO DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI 3 ORCHESTRA VOICE ORCH. 1 PIANO/E. PIANO 1 GUITAR 7 ORCH. 2 ORGAN/ ACCORDION 2 BASS 8 PRESET STRINGS/CHOIR 3 SYNTH 9 USER SET WOODWIND 4 WORLD/ PERCUSSIVE 10 BRASS 5 DUAL VOICE/ SOUND EFFECT 11 MALLET 6 DRUMS 12 VOICE PART POWER CUSTOM VOICE ORCHESTRATION ( ORCH. 1 ORCH. 2+1 ORCH. 2 1 t DISK IN USE LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT FROM DISK y u i op W w PAD SE 1 BANK A FREEZE CHORD 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tempo l accel. faster a tempo slower rit. MEMORY B C TO DISK Q D PANEL REGISTRATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 > CANCEL DISK T Y e SEQUENCER/CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER Buttons ................. [page 49, 62] SEQUENCER, CUSTOM ACCOMP. Sequencer Track/Custom Accompaniment Programmer Track Buttons 1 through 6/CHORD 1 through 6, 7/BASS, ACCOMP./RHYTHM Sequencer/Custom Accompaniment Programmer Control Buttons RECORD, DELETE, EDIT, p (Top), r (Rewind), f (Forward) r ORCHESTRA VOICE Buttons ... [page 13, 15, 77] VOICE PART ORCH.1, VOICE PART ORCH.2, PRESET, USER SET, CUSTOM VOICE, Voice Group [1] – [12] Buttons t ORCHESTRATION Buttons ................... [page 12] y LEFT HOLD Button ................................ [page 32] u HARMONY Button ................................. [page 31] i SUSTAIN Button .................................... [page 31] o REVERB Button ..................................... [page 31] p EFFECT Button ...................................... [page 31] Q DISK IN USE Buttons ...................... [page 91, 93] FROM DISK, TO DISK W PANEL REGISTRATION Buttons ........... [page 41] MEMORY, FREEZE, 1-8, BANK E PITCH BEND Wheel .............................. [page 32] R MODULATION/EFFECT Wheel ............. [page 32] T Disk Drive ..................................... [page 3, 28, 43] Y Disk Eject Button ................................ [page 3, 45] ORCH. 1, ORCH. 2+1, ORCH. 2v1 5 Connections & Music Stand PHONES ▼ 1 1 The PHONES Jack ...................................................................................................................................................................... A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. 2 The AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks ............................................................................................................................. The rear-panel AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-6000 for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If you will be connecting the PSR-6000 to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and rightchannel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any of the PSR-6000 sound. Stereo System AUX OUT CAUTION • To prevent damage to the internal circuitry, the AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly or through external equipment. R L/L+R 3 AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks ................................................................................................................................................ These jacks are intended primarily for use with external audio sources such as tone generators, drum machines, CD players, and similar equipment. The signal received via the AUX IN L and R jacks is reproduced via the PSR-6000’s internal stereo amplifier and speaker system. If you will be connecting a monaural source to the PSR-6000, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the monaural input signal is fed to both the left and right channels of the PSR-6000 stereo sound system. Please note that the PSR-6000 MASTER VOLUME control does not affect the level of the signal delivered to external equipment. 6 Tone Generator AUX IN R L/L+R Connections & Music Stand MIDI IN AUX OUT R L/L+R 2 OUT THRU FOOT SWITCH SUSTAIN FOOT CONTROLLER AUX IN R L/L+R 3 7 456 4 FOOT SWITCH Jack .................................................................................................................................................................. An optional Yamaha FC5 footswitch connected to this jack can be used to control a range of important functions. Refer to the “FOOT SWITCH SELECT” function described on page 86. FOOT SWITCH 5 SUSTAIN Jack ................................................................................................................................................................................. An optional FC5 footswitch can be connected here for foot sustain control. The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on a piano — press for sustain, release for normal sound. SUSTAIN 6 FOOT CONTROLLER Jack ................................................................................................................................................ An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller can be connected to this jack to allow foot expression (swell) or effect control. Please note that when the foot controller is used for expression control, no sound will be produced if it is set to the minimum position. FOOT CONTROLLER 7 MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors ...................................................................................................................... The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI device (such as a MIDI sequencer) which can be used to control the PSR-6000. The MIDI THRU connector re-transmits any data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the PSR-6000 (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the keyboard). More details on MIDI are provided on page 102. MIDI IN OUT Music Computer THRU Tone Generator The Music Stand The PSR-6000 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. 7 The Demonstration To give you an idea of the PSR-6000’s sophisticated capabilities, it is programmed with 21 demonstration sequences which can be played in a number of ways. NOTES • The demonstration sequences have been specially programmed for demonstration purposes — it is not possible to reproduce the demonstration sequences 100% using the PSR-6000 sequencer functions. Z Switch ON ............................................................................................................................................................................................ Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC outlet, then press the [POWER] button to turn the PSR-6000 ON. POWER X Set an Initial Volume Level ................................................................................................................................................ Set the [MASTER VOLUME] control to a position about half way toward the highest setting. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins. MASTER VOLUME MAX MIN C Press the [DEMO] Button ................................................................................................................................................... DEMO Press the [DEMO] button and the PSR-6000 demo display will appear. DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI V Start & Stop Playback as Required Press the START LCD button to start playback of all demo songs. Press the STOP LCD button when you want to stop playback. NOTES • The default demo play mode is RANDOM. • Demo playback can also be started and stopped by using the [START/RE-START] and [STOP] buttons on the PSR-6000 panel. B Exit When Done .......................................................................................................... Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the normal play-mode display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. 8 EXIT DEMO DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI The Demonstration The Demo Play Modes If you play the demo as described above, you’ll hear all 21 demo songs, one after another. Note that the demo songs are arranged into 7 groups of three songs each. By selecting an appropriate play mode, you can also play back all the songs in sequence, in random order, or a single specified song. Z Select a Play Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... With demo playback stopped, use any of the three LCD dials under PLAY MODE on the display to select one of the available play modes. ALL SONGS All 21 demo songs are played back in sequence. RANDOM All 21 demo songs are played back in random order. This is the default mode. SINGLE SONG Only the selected song is played. X Select a Song .................................................................................................................................................................................. If you’ve selected the SINGLE SONG play mode, press the LCD button corresponding to the demo group you want to play (DANCE, ROCK, etc.) and use the same LCD button to select the desired song (a new song within the group is selected each time it is pressed). If you’ve selected the ALL SONGS or RANDOM play mode, you can use the LCD buttons to select the first song to be played back. You can also use either of the LCD dials under SONG on the display to select any of the 21 demo songs. X C Turn the Repeat Mode ON or OFF .... Use the REP. LCD dial to turn repeat playback ON or OFF as required (when ON, the selected song or sequence of songs will be repeated until the STOP LCD button is pressed) C X V Start & Stop Playback as Required ......................................................................................................................... Press the START LCD button to start playback of the selected demo song(s). Press the STOP LCD button when you want to stop playback. B Exit When Done ............................................................................................................................................................................. Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the normal play-mode display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. EXIT DEMO DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI 9 The PSR-6000 Display & Help Function The Display & Multi-function Controls The PSR-6000 makes general operation and programming easier than ever with a large backlit LCD display panel and multi-function controls. The 8 LCD buttons — four on either side of the display panel — and 8 LCD dials below the display perform the function indicated by the adjacent section of the display. In the example display shown here, for example, the two LCD dials immediately below TEMPO on the display can be used to adjust the tempo (in this case both dials perform the same function). In the same way, the LCD button immediately to the right of KEY VELOCITY on the display is used to turn key velocity ON or OFF. ■ The [MIXER] Button .................................................................................................................................................................. The lower section of the normal play mode display, shown above, provides individual volume controls for the PSR-6000’s rhythm, bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 parts. This is essentially a “mixer” that you will use the achieve the best overall balance for your musical needs. The mixer controls will disappear when functions which have different displays are selected, but can be instantly recalled without exiting from the current display mode by pressing the [MIXER] button. Pressing the [MIXER] button a second time (or the [EXIT] button) causes the mixer controls to disappear. 10 MIXER LIST HOLD The PSR-6000 Display & Help Function ■ The [LIST HOLD] Button ...................................................................................................................................................... When selecting voices (page 13) or accompaniment styles (page 21), the voice or style list will appear on the display, but will automatically disappear after a few seconds if no selections are made. The voice/style list can be kept on the display for as long as required by pressing the [LIST HOLD] button so that its LED lights. Press [LIST HOLD] a second time (the LED will go out) to disengage the list hold function. NOTES MIXER • If the [LIST HOLD] button is engaged when the voice or style list is not showing, the list will not appear even when a voice or style group button is pressed. ■ LIST HOLD The [CONTRAST] Control .................................................................................................................................................. The PSR-6000 display panel is a liquid-crystal type which can be easier or more difficult to read from different angles. Use the [CONTRAST] control to set the display for optimum legibility at your viewing angle. CONTRAST FUNCTION HELP/ LANGUAGE EXIT The Help Function If you’re ever in doubt about a display or button, the PSR-6000 HELP function is available. Simply press the [HELP/LANGUAGE] button to get information about the current display, or press [HELP/LANGUAGE] and then any panel button for information about that button and its function. If more that one help display page is available for the selected topic, use the [ ] and [ ] LCD buttons to change pages. Help is provided in five languages — English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian — that you can select by using any of the LCD dials. Exit from the HELP function by pressing either the [HELP/LANGUAGE] or [EXIT] button. CONTRAST FUNCTION HELP/ LANGUAGE EXIT NOTES • The HELP function will be automatically exited if a disk is inserted or ejected. 11 Playing the PSR-6000 ■ Before You Begin EXIT DEMO Before playing your PSR-6000 for the first time, it might be a good idea to re-initialize it to the original factory settings just in case these have been changed at some point before you receive the instrument. To do this, turn the [POWER] switch ON while holding the [EXIT] and [DEMO] buttons. POWER When the display shown to the right appears, use the LCD dials to select the language you want the HELP text and messages to be displayed in, then press the OK LCD button. CAUTION • When the above initialization procedure is carried out, all sequencer and custom accompaniment data will also be initialized and therefore lost! Selecting & Playing Voices Z Turn Power On and Set Initial Volume Levels ............................................................................................... Press the [POWER] button to turn the power ON, and set the [MASTER VOLUME] control about half way toward its highest setting. Also make sure that the RHY, BASS, CHD2, CHD1, ORC2, and ORC1 volume levels on the LCD are set to their maximum “100” levels (use the corresponding LCD dials to set these volume levels if necessary). You can set the [MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable overall volume level after beginning to play. NOTES MASTER VOLUME MAX MIN • No sound will be produced if all volume levels other than the [MASTER VOLUME] control are set to their minimum values. X Select the Orchestration ..................................................................................................................................................... The PSR-6000 has three orchestration modes, selected by the corresponding ORCHESTRATION buttons. The corresponding ORCHESTRATION LED will light. 12 ORCHESTRATION ORCH. 1 ORCH. 2+1 ORCH. 2 1 LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT Playing the PSR-6000 ORCH. 1 In this mode a single voice — the ORCH. 1 voice — can be played across the entire keyboard. ORCH. 2+1 This is a “dual” mode in which two voices — ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 — can be played simultaneously across the entire keyboard. ORCH. 2v1 This is a “split” mode in which the ORCH. 2 voice is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (to the left of the “split point” — see “NOTES” below), while the ORCH. 1 voice is played on the righthand section of the keyboard. NOTES • The split point for the PSR-6000 is initially set at F#2. This means that when the “ORCH. 2v1” mode is selected, the ORCH. 2 voice will be played by all keys to the left of and including F#2, while the ORCH. 1 voice will be played on all keys to the right of F#2. You can change the split point to any key desired as described on page 16. Split Point (F#2) Left-hand Section ▼ C3 Right-hand Section • The lowest key on the keyboard is C1. • Since two voices are played simultaneously in the dual and split modes, the total number of notes that can be played on the keyboard at the same time is reduced. • When the “ORCH.2+1” mode is selected and the same voice is selected for both ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2, the sound may be slightly different from the normal voice. • When the “ORCH.2v1” mode is selected, the ORCH. 2 voice will automatically be transposed up one octave. C Select a Voice or Voices ........................................................................................................................................................ Before selecting a preset voice, make sure that the ORCHESTRA VOICE control section [PRESET] button LED is lit (if it isn’t press the [PRESET] button so that it does light). The PSR-6000 has 128 preset voices organized in 12 voice groups (see page 116 for a complete voice list). Press the [ORCH. 1] or [ORCH. 2] VOICE PART button, depending on which voice you want to select. The corresponding VOICE PART LED will light. Use the voice group buttons to select the group from which you want to select a voice. The corresponding voice display will appear. ORCHESTRA VOICE ORCH. 1 PIANO/E. PIANO 1 GUITAR 7 ORCH. 2 ORGAN/ ACCORDION 2 BASS 8 PRESET STRINGS/CHOIR 3 SYNTH 9 USER SET WOODWIND 4 WORLD/ PERCUSSIVE 10 BRASS 5 DUAL VOICE/ SOUND EFFECT 11 MALLET 6 DRUMS 12 VOICE PART CUSTOM VOICE ORCHESTRA VOICE ORCH. 1 PIANO/E. PIANO 1 GUITAR 7 ORCH. 2 ORGAN/ ACCORDION 2 BASS 8 PRESET STRINGS/CHOIR 3 SYNTH 9 4 WORLD/ PERCUSSIVE 10 BRASS 5 DUAL VOICE/ SOUND EFFECT 11 MALLET 6 DRUMS 12 VOICE PART USER SET CUSTOM VOICE WOODWIND NOTES • The display will automatically revert to the main display after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not engaged (page 11). 13 Playing the PSR-6000 Use the PAGE LCD dials the select the page containing the voice you want if more than one page is available, then press the LCD button corresponding to the desired voice. You can also use either of the SELECT LCD dials to select any of the voices within the selected group. V Play & Adjust Volume ............................................................................................................................................................. You can now play the selected voice or voices with the selected orchestration. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level, and the ORC1 and ORC2 LCD dials can be used to set the desired balance between the ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 voices when either the dual or split orchestration mode is used. NOTES • Voices in the DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT group are actually combinations of two voices, so the total number of simultaneous notes that can be played when these voices are selected is less than when any of the other voices are selected. Keyboard Percussion When either of the DRUMS voices is selected — Drum Kit or Pop Drum Kit, you can play 59 different drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and percussion instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols above the keys. Some of the instruments in the Drum Kit and Pop Drum Kit voices sound different even though they have the same name, while others are essentially the same. 14 NOTES • The Transpose, Tune, Sustain, Harmony, Left Hold, Modulation, and Octave Change functions do not affect the keyboard percussion sound. • The pitch bend wheel can be used to bend the pitch of the keyboard percussion voices to create unique musical effects, but it has little effect on some percussion sounds. • See page 118 for a complete listing of the keyboard percussion drum instrument assignments. Playing the PSR-6000 USER SET Voice Assignment The PSR-6000 USER SET voice selection mode lets you assign any 12 voices — preset or custom (page 13, 77) — to the 12 voice select buttons so you can select them directly without having to select a category, page, and then a voice. This is particularly useful for the performer who want direct access to the voices he needs for a song or set. Z Select the USER SET Mode ............................................................................................................................................. Press the [USER SET] button so that its indicator lights. The USER SET voice display will appear. ORCHESTRA VOICE ORCH. 1 PIANO/E. PIANO 1 GUITAR 7 ORCH. 2 ORGAN/ ACCORDION 2 BASS 8 PRESET STRINGS/CHOIR 3 SYNTH 9 USER SET WOODWIND 4 WORLD/ PERCUSSIVE 10 BRASS 5 DUAL VOICE/ SOUND EFFECT 11 MALLET 6 DRUMS 12 VOICE PART NOTES • The display will automatically revert to the main display after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not engaged (page 11). CUSTOM VOICE X Select a Voice Button .............................................................................................................................................................. Press the voice group button to which you want to assign a voice. ORCHESTRA VOICE ORCH. 1 PIANO/E. PIANO 1 GUITAR 7 ORCH. 2 ORGAN/ ACCORDION 2 BASS 8 PRESET STRINGS/CHOIR 3 SYNTH 9 4 WORLD/ PERCUSSIVE 10 BRASS 5 DUAL VOICE/ SOUND EFFECT 11 MALLET 6 DRUMS 12 VOICE PART USER SET CUSTOM VOICE WOODWIND C Select a Voice .................................................................................................................................................................................. Use the PAGE LCD dials, the SELECT LCD dials, and the LCD buttons as required to select the voice you want to assign to the currently selected voice button. To assign a custom voice, press the [CUSTOM VOICE] button so that its indicator lights (when the CUSTOM VOICE LED is off the preset voices are assigned). That’s all there is to it, now the assigned voice will instantly be recalled anytime you press the same voice button while the USER SET mode is engaged. Voice assignments can be changed at any time in the same way. 15 Playing the PSR-6000 Changing the Split Point The PSR-6000 split point applies to both the ORCH. 2v1 split play mode, described in this section, and Auto Bass Chord accompaniment described on page 19. The current split point is indicated on the display by the triangular split marker (t) and the “split” in the graphic keyboard when the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected. Here’s how you can change the split point to suit your own playing requirements. Z Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD Button ..................................................................................... Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD button. The ABC MODE and SPLIT POINT function displays will appear. X Set the Split Point ....................................................................................................................................................................... The split point can be set in two ways: either use the SPLIT POINT LCD dials, or press the desired key on the keyboard while holding the DIRECT SETTING LCD button (or vice-versa). The new split point will be indicated on the graphic keyboard in the LCD. Press a key while holding the DIRECT SETTING LCD button. C Return to the Main Display When Done .............................................................................................................. Press the VOLUME LCD button to return to the main display when done. 16 Transposition, Tuning, Octave Change, & Key Velocity The most important and fundamental adjustment for any musical instrument is tuning. The TRANSPOSE, TUNING, and OCTAVE CHANGE functions described below let you control the pitch of the PSR-6000 in a number of ways. The Key Velocity function has also been included in this section because it affects the way the PSR-6000 responds to notes played on the keyboard. TRANSPOSE & TUNE These functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-6000 to be transposed up or down in semitone increments, and fine-tuned in 0.5 Hertz increments. Z Press the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD Button ..................................................................................................... Select the transpose and tune functions from the normal play mode display by pressing the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD button. X Set the Transposition and/or Tuning As Required ................................................................................... Use the TRANSPOSE LCD dials to set the desired degree of transposition, and the TUNE LCD dials to set the desired degree of tuning. The transpose range is from -6 to +6, allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1/2-octave. A setting of “0” produces the normal pitch. The tuning range is from 427.5 Hertz to 452.5 Hertz, adjustable in 0.5-Hertz increments. A3 = 440.0 Hertz is “normal” pitch. C Return to the Main Display When Done .............................................................................................................. Press the VOLUME LCD button to exit from the transpose and tune functions and return to the main display. 17 Transposition, Tuning, Octave Change, & Key Velocity OCTAVE CHANGE This function allows the ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 voices to be independently transposed up or down by one octave. The OCTAVE LCD button to the right of the ORCH.1. voice name changes the octave of the ORCH.1. voice, while the OCTAVE LCD button to the right of the ORCH.2 voice affects the ORCH.2. voice. Pressing either of these buttons changes the corresponding octave setting to “+1”, “-1”, and then “0”, in sequence. “+1” shifts the voice up one octave “-1” shifts the voice down one octave, and “0” sets the voice to its normal octave. NOTES • Some voices may suddenly shift octaves when played at the extreme ends of the keyboard if they are set to a lower or higher octave than normal. This can also occur when the PITCH BEND wheel is used on extremely low or high notes. • If you change the transpose, octave change, or tuning settings while playing one or more notes on the keyboard, the new transpose and octave change settings will take effect from the next notes played while tune settings take effect immediately. KEY VELOCITY The key velocity function turns the PSR-6000’s keyboard velocity response on or off. Normally, key velocity should be turned ON to allow normal dynamic control via the keyboard (i.e. the harder the keys are played, the louder the sound). In some cases, however, you might want to turn key velocity OFF. For example, most organs have no keyboard velocity response, so key velocity can be turned OFF for greater realism when playing organ type voices. Key Velocity can also be turned off to create a constant-volume sound with any voice. Use the KEY VELOCITY LCD button to turn key velocity ON or OFF as required. 18 Using the Accompaniment Section The PSR-6000 has 50+1 different accompaniment “styles” (including preset IA style “New Age (No.12 button)”)that can be used to provide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. The PSR6000’s sophisticated Auto Bass Chord accompaniment system can provide automated bass and chord backing that is perfectly matched to the selected accompaniment style. Z Turn ABC ON .................................................................................................................................................................................... Press the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button so that its indicator lights, thereby turning the ABC mode on. INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT AUTO BASS CHORD VERSE A NOTES • The maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously on the PSR-6000 keyboard is reduced when the Auto Bass Chord feature is used. X Select the Desired ABC Mode ....................................................................................................................................... Press the ABC MODE/SPLIT POINT LCD button to select the ABC MODE and SPLIT POINT display, then use the ABC MODE LCD dials to select the FINGERED CHORD, SINGLE FINGER, or MANUAL BASS mode. If you select the MANUAL BASS mode, the GRP. VOICE # LCD dials can be used to specify the bass voice to be used. Press the VOLUME LCD button to return to the main display when done. The FINGERED CHORD, SINGLE FINGER, and MANUAL BASS modes function as follows: ● FINGERED CHORD This is the default ABC mode. The Fingered Chord mode lets you finger your own chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the split-point key — normally F#2), while the PSR-6000 supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style. The Fingered Chord mode will accept the chord types listed below (notes in parentheses may be omitted). 19 Using the Accompaniment Section Example for “C” chords C Cm CM 7 C6 Csus 4 Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 C 7 b5 C 7 aug C7 sus 4 C 7 (9) Cm (9) Cm7 (9) CM (9) CM 7 (9) C 7 (b9) CM 7 b5 ) ( ( ) ( ) Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Major [M] ............................................................ 1-3-5* Minor [m] ........................................................... 1-b3-5* Major seventh [M7] ....................................... 1-3-(5)-7* Major sixth [6] .................................................... 1-3-5-6 Suspended fourth [sus4] .................................... 1-4-5* Minor sixth [m6] ............................................... 1-b3-5-6 Minor seventh [m7] ..................................... 1-b3-(5)-b7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] ................ 1-b3-b5-b7 Minor major seventh [mM7] ........................ 1-b3-(5)-7* Seventh [7] .................................................. 1-3-(5)-b7* Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] .............................. 1-3-b5-b7 Seventh augmented [7aug] .......................... 1-3-#5-b7* Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] ............... 1-4-5-b7* Seventh ninth [7(9)] .................................. 1-2-3-(5)-b7* Minor ninth [m(9)] ............................................ 1-2-b3-5 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] ................... 1-2-b3-(5)-b7* Major ninth [M(9)] .............................................. 1-2-3-5 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] ....................... 1-2-3-(5)-7* Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] ........ 1-2-b3-(5)-7* Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] ................... 1-b2-3-(5)-b7* Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] .................. 1-3-b5-7* Augmented [aug] ................................................ 1-3-#5 Diminished [dim] .......................................... 1-b3-b5-(6) ) ( ( ) ( ) ( ) C7 ) ( * Chords marked with an asterisk (*) can be played in any inversion (i.e. the root of the chord does not have to be the lowest note played). ( ) CmM7 (9) Cdim Caug ( ) * If you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be cancelled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (CHORD CANCEL function). ● SINGLE FINGER Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the lefthand section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used: ■ For a major chord, press the root key only. C G F Cm C7 Cm 7 ■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. ■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. ■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. 20 Using the Accompaniment Section ● MANUAL BASS The Manual Bass mode provides an alternative to the normal split keyboard. The bass voice assigned to the left-hand keyboard section is monophonic, while a polyphonic ORCH. 1 voice is played on the upper section of the keyboard. You can select any of the PSR-6000’s normal voices to play on the lower section of the keyboard — of course, it’s normal to choose a bass voices for the left hand. No automatic bass and chord accompaniment is produced, although the Interactive Accompaniment feature (page 27) does affect the rhythm sound. NOTES • Voices created using the PSR-6000 Custom Voice feature (page 77) can also be selected for use with the Manual Bass mode. • The ABC mode cannot be changed when the sequencer ACCOMP. track contains data. C Select a Style ................................................................................................................................................................................... Before selecting a preset style, make sure that the STYLE control section [PRESET] button indicator is lit (if it isn’t press the [PRESET] button so that it does light). The PSR-6000 has 50+1 preset styles (including preset IA style “New Age (No.12 button)”) organized in 12 groups (see the “Style List” on page 119). Use the style group buttons to select the group from which you want to select a style. The corresponding style display will appear. STYLE 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA NOTES • The display will automatically revert to the main display after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not engaged (page 11). Press the LCD button corresponding to the desired style. You can also use either of the SELECT LCD dials to select any of the styles within the selected group. Although you can select the ORCH. 1 voice you intend to play on the right-hand section of the keyboard and the ORCH. 2 voice if you use the split mode, the PSR-6000 automatically determines the voices to be used for the accompaniment bass and chords according the accompaniment style you select. NOTES • Also see “USER SET Style Assignment” on page 26, and “Custom Style” on page 62. 21 Using the Accompaniment Section V Set the Tempo ................................................................................................................................................................................. When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed on the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. You can change the tempo to any value between 40 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons, or the TEMPO LCD dials. This can be done either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing. To use the [–] and [+] buttons, press either button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing. TEMPO – + NOTE • The default tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously. B Start the Accompaniment .................................................................................................................................................. There are several ways to start the accompaniment: ● Straight start: Press the [START/RE-START] button. If you press the [START/RE-START] button, the rhythm will begin playing immediately without bass and chord accompaniment. SOLO SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP NOTE • If you press the [START/RE-START] button while the accompaniment is playing, playback will immediately return to the first beat of the current accompaniment pattern, making it possible to create measures with odd time signatures. • It is also possible to select one of the several sections available prior to a straight start — refer to “7. Select Sections as Required,” below. ● Start with an introduction followed by the VERSE 1 section: press the [INTRO 1] button. ● Start with an introduction followed by the VERSE 2 section: press the [INTRO 2] button. 22 FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO Using the Accompaniment Section ● Start with an introduction followed by the CHORUS 1 section: press the [INTRO 3] button. ● Synchronized start: Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and including the split-point key — normally F#2) by first pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button. Pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button alone causes a straight start to occur when the first note or chord is played. Press [SYNCHRO START] and then the appropriate INTRO button for a synchronized introduction start. The first dot of the TEMPO display will flash at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 SOLO VERSE 1 VERSE 2 SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO STOP NOTES • If you press the [SYNCHRO START] button while the accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the synchro start mode will be engaged. • The four LED dots of the TEMPO display provide a visual indication of the selected tempo as shown to the right. Several LEDs will flash simultaneously on the first beat of oddnumbered measures in all time signatures. 3/4 Time 4/4 Time 1st Beat 2nd Beat 3rd Beat TEMPO 4th Beat TEMPO • A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into the rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack can also be used to start the accompaniment if the appropriate function is assigned to the footswitch using the FOOT SWITCH SELECT function described on page 88. N Play On the Left-hand Section Of the Keyboard ....................................................................................... As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-6000 can “recognize” on the left-hand section of the keyboard in the FINGERED CHORD mode (see fingering chart on page 122) or an abbreviated chord in the SINGLE FINGER mode, the PSR-6000 will automatically begin to play the chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The accompaniment will continue playing even if you release the left-hand keys. If the MANUAL BASS mode is selected only the rhythm accompaniment will play automatically, and selected bass voice can be played on the left-hand section of the keyboard. Split Point ABC Section ▼ C3 Melody Section NOTES • The appropriate chord and bass note will sound if you play in the left-hand section of the keyboard while the ABC function is on but the accompaniment is stopped. Please note that the Left Hold function (page 11) cannot be applied to these chord and bass notes. 23 Using the Accompaniment Section M Select Sections as Required ........................................................................................................................................... Each accompaniment style has a number of sections: VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, and CHORUS 2. The VERSE and CHORUS sections further have more complex SOLO sections. There is also an ENDING section which is described in step >. The INTRO section can be used to start the accompaniment as described in the preceding step. The remaining sections — VERSE 1, VERSE 2, CHORUS 1, CHORUS 2, and the SOLO sections of these — can be selected manually by pressing the corresponding section button. It is also possible to select the section that will follow the INTRO by pressing the appropriate section button while the INTRO is playing or while the intro synchro start mode is engaged. VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO NOTES • Some INTRO, ENDING, and SOLO sections have their own chord progressions which play in the current accompaniment key — the key is shown below the style name in the LCD display. ● The SOLO Sections Although the SOLO sections can be selected manually, they can also be activated automatically when INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT is engaged (see page 27). If an accompaniment is playing and nothing is played on the keyboard for several measures, the SOLO mode is automatically engaged to “fill out” the accompaniment. When SOLO is on, not only are the sections more complex, but they will automatically cycle (VERSE 1 m VERSE 2 m CHORUS 1 m CHORUS 2 m VERSE 1, etc.). If the SOLO mode is on, it will be automatically disengaged after you begin playing on the keyboard. This automatic switching of the solo mode can be turned off via the Auto Solo function described on page 27. NOTES • The SOLO section will be automatically disengaged if it is turned on prior to starting the accompaniment with an introduction. < Use Fill-ins .......................................................................................................................................................................................... The PSR-6000 provides two types of automatic breaks or “fill-ins.” 24 Using the Accompaniment Section ● FILL IN j: Press the [FILL IN j] button to produce a short fill and return to the same section. FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 ● FILL IN n: Press the [FILL IN n] button to produce a fill and then go to the corresponding chorus or verse: VERSE 1 n CHORUS 1 VERSE 2 n CHORUS 2 It is possible to change the section that will play after the fill-in by pressing the appropriate section button while the fill-in is playing. If you hold one of the FILL IN buttons, the fill-in will repeat until the button is released. NOTES • A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into the rear panel FOOT SWITCH jack can also be used to activate fill-ins if the appropriate function is assigned to the footswitch using the FOOT SWITCH SELECT function described on page 88. • The transitions between the verse and chorus are different when SOLO is ON. > Stop the Accompaniment .................................................................................................................................................. The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [STOP] button. Press the [ENDING/rit.] button if you want to go to the ending section and then stop. Press the [ENDING/rit.] button while the ending section is playing to produce a “ritardando” ending — i.e. the tempo gradually slows down during the ending. ■ FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP Accompaniment Volume ...................................................................................................................................................... Use the RHY, BASS, CHD1, and CHD2 LCD dials controls to set the best balance between the corresponding accompaniment parts, and the optimum volume of the accompaniment parts in relation to the ORCH. 1 and ORCH. 2 voices. ■ Rhythm-only Accompaniment ...................................................................................................................................... The AUTO BASS CHORD mode can be turned off at any time — leaving the rhythm accompaniment only — by pressing the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button so that its indicator goes out. INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT AUTO BASS CHORD VERSE A 25 Using the Accompaniment Section USER SET Style Assignment The PSR-6000 USER SET style selection mode lets you assign any 12 styles to the 12 style group buttons so you can select them directly without having to select a category, page, and then a style. This is particularly useful for the performer who want direct access to the styles he needs for a song or set. Z Select the USER SET Mode ............................................................................................................................................. Press the STYLE control section [USER SET] button so that its indicator lights. The USER SET style display will appear. NOTES • The display will automatically revert to the main display after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not engaged (page 11). STYLE 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA X Select a Style Button ............................................................................................................................................................... Press the style group button to which you want to assign a style. STYLE 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA C Select a Style ................................................................................................................................................................................... Use the PAGE LCD dials, the SELECT LCD dials, and the LCD buttons as required to select the style you want to assign to the currently selected style button. Now the assigned style will instantly be recalled anytime you press the same style button while the USER SET mode is engaged. Style assignments can be changed at any time in the same way. 26 Using the Accompaniment Section Interactive Accompaniment Press the [INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT] button so that its indicator lights to activate the Interactive Accompaniment mode. In this mode the PSR-6000 uses advanced technology to monitor the way you are playing on the keyboard and automatically varies the rhythm or ABC accompaniment accordingly. If you are playing with the VERSE 1 section, for example, and you begin to build up the musical excitement on the keyboard (i.e. play more notes, faster, and/or harder) the PSR-6000 will automatically switch to the VERSE 2 section to better support what you are playing. On the other hand, if you play more mellow right-hand lines the PSR-6000 will automatically “shift down” to the VERSE 1 section. The same applies to the CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 sections. INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT AUTO BASS CHORD VERSE A NOTES • The “sensitivity” of the Interactive Accompaniment mode can be adjusted via the INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT Sensitivity function described on page 89. Also note that automatic switching between VERSE 1 and VERSE 2 or CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 will not occur if the Interactive Accompaniment MUTE mode is selected — see page 89. ■ Auto Solo ............................................................................................................................................................................................. When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON (ON is the default setting — see page 89), the SOLO accompaniment sections will automatically be activated if nothing is played on the keyboard for a few measures. Further, the solo sections will automatically be de-activated from the end of the current phrase after keyboard performance is resumed. ABC/IA Accompaniment Flow Diagram IA VERSE 1 INTRO 1 FILL IN j ENDING (ENDING 1) VERSE 2 INTRO 2 FILL IN j FILL IN n CHORUS 1 INTRO 3 FILL IN j CHORUS 2 FILL IN j ENDING (ENDING 2) ENDING (ENDING 3) VERSE 1 VERSE 1 SOLO VERSE 2 VERSE 2 SOLO CHORUS 1 CHORUS 1 SOLO CHORUS 2 CHORUS 2 SOLO 27 Using the Accompaniment Section Using Disk Styles on Optional Data Disks Use the following procedure to assign the desired disk style from an optional Yamaha style disk to the [FOR DISK IA] style button on the PSR-6000 panel. Z Insert the Data Disk .................................................................................................................................................................. Insert the data disk into the PSR-6000 disk drive (located below the right end of the keyboard) with the disk shutter facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. X Press [FROM DISK] ................................................................................................................................................................... Press the [FROM DISK] button. The display shown to the right should appear. DISK IN USE FROM DISK TO DISK C Select a Style File .............................................. Use the left st LCD dials to select I/A-SET, then use the right st dials to select the style you want to load. V Press the EXECUTE LCD Button ...... V Press the EXECUTE LCD button. The “Are you sure ? ” confirmation prompt will appear. Press the YES LCD button to begin loading the selected file (or NO to cancel). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear on the display while the data is loading. “Completed.” will appear briefly when the data has been successfully loaded, and the normal play mode will then be automatically engaged. C C NOTES • If an error message appears during the disk load procedure, refer to page 111 for details. • Disk style data that has been loaded into the PSR6000 can be saved to a different floppy disk. See page 95 for details. ■ Selecting a DISK Style ........................................................................................................................................................... Once loaded, the disk style can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles by pressing the [FOR DISK IA] button. NOTES • The preset IA style “New Age” can be recalled by using the “F7: RECALL PRESET DATA” function described on page 101. 28 V 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA One Touch Setting The PSR-6000’s 50+1 internal styles (including preset IA style “New Age”) each have 4 different preset “panel setups” that can be instantly selected via the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons — [VERSE A], [VERSE B], [CHORUS A], and [CHORUS B] — to create different musical textures. The ONE TOUCH SETTING setups include settings for all of the following parameters: • Orchestration • Orchestra 1 Voice • Orchestra 2 Voice • Orchestra 1 Volume • Orchestra 2 Volume • Bass Volume • Chord 1 Volume • Chord 2 Volume • Rhythm Volume • Orchestra 1 Octave • Orchestra 2 Octave • Harmony On/Off • Harmony Type • Left Hold On/Off • Sustain On/Off • Sustain Part Select • Pitch Bend Select • Reverb On/Off • Reverb Type & Depth • Effect On/Off • Effect Type & Depth Z Engage the One Touch Setting Feature .............................................................................................................. The ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be used either while an accompaniment is playing or prior to starting an accompaniment by simply pressing the appropriate ONE TOUCH SETTING button so that its indicator lights: [VERSE A] for a soft, mellow feel; [VERSE B] for a slightly more active feel; [CHORUS A] for an even more lively sound; [CHORUS B] for maximum presence and animation. If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter (see page 89) is turned ON, selecting a different accompaniment style while ONE TOUCH SETTING is engaged will cause the ONE TOUCH SETTING settings for that style to be selected automatically. ONE TOUCH SETTING TO BASS HORD VERSE A VERSE B CHORUS A CHORUS B – X Adjust The Settings If Necessary .............................................................................................................................. Any of the parameters set by the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be adjusted to create the desired sound after a ONE TOUCH SETTING setup has been selected. If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter is turned ON and you change a ONE TOUCH SETTING setting, the corresponding ONE TOUCH SETTING indicator will flash to indicate that a change has been made. ONE TOUCH SETTING TO BASS HORD VERSE A VERSE B CHORUS A CHORUS B – 29 One Touch Setting C Memorize the One Touch Settings If You Like .............................................................................................. Your One Touch Settings can be memorized by pressing the VERSE [A] or [B] or CHORUS [A] or [B] button while holding the Panel Registration [MEMORY] button. ONE TOUCH SETTING VERSE A VERSE B CHORUS A FREEZE CHORUS B MEMORY 1 NOTES • The initial One Touch Settings can be recalled by using the RECALL PRESET DATA function described on page 101. • One Touch Settings can also be stored in the Panel Registration memory. V Turn One Touch Setting Off .............................................................................................................................................. ONE TOUCH SETTING is turned OFF by pressing the currently engaged [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button a second time so that its indicator goes out. If the ONE TOUCH SETTING indicator is flashing because changes have been made to the panel settings (and the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter is ON), pressing any [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button twice turns ONE TOUCH SETTING off. ONE TOUCH SETTING TO BASS HORD VERSE A VERSE B CHORUS A CHORUS B – NOTES • If you turn the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter described on page 89 ON, the ONE TOUCH SETTING setup will automatically switch according to changes in the accompaniment section. • ONE TOUCH SETTING cannot be used with accompaniment styles created using the Custom Accompaniment feature described on page 62. The currently lit ONE TOUCH SETTING LED will automatically go out if a Custom Style is selected. • ONE TOUCH SETTING setup data can be saved to floppy disk. See page 95 for details. 30 VERSE A VERSE B CHORUS A CHORUS B Expression & Effects ■ Harmony ................................................................................................................................................................................................ The harmony effect can only be used when the AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment mode is selected. Press the [HARMONY] button to turn the HARMONY effect on or off. When HARMONY is on (indicator lit), playing single notes or chords on the right-hand section of the keyboard produces automatic harmony matched to the accompaniment chords. The type of harmony produced can be selected via the HARMONY TYPE function described on page 90. LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT NOTES • The harmony is based on the top note of chords. • Slight tempo delays may occur when harmony is used in conjunction with the ABC Fingered Chord mode. ■ Sustain .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the sustain effect on or off. When on (indicator lit), extra sustain is applied to the selected voice. If a footswitch connected to the rear-panel SUSTAIN jack is pressed in order to apply sustain, however, the panel SUSTAIN function will be automatically turned off. LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT NOTES • Sustain can be applied to the ORCH. 1 voice only, the ORCH. 2 voice only, or both voices via the SUSTAIN PEDAL ASSIGN function described on page 87. ■ Reverb ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Press the [REVERB] button to apply the reverb effect specified by the REVERB TYPE and DEPTH functions described on page 84 to the ORCH. 1 and 2 voices as well as the chord and rhythm accompaniment sound. The [REVERB] button alternately turns the reverb effect on (indicator lit) or off (indicator out). LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT NOTES • Reverb type changes will apply to the note currently being played, while reverb ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next note played. ■ Effects ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Press the [EFFECT] button to apply the effect specified by the EFFECT TYPE and DEPTH functions described on page 85 to the ORCH. 1 and 2 voices as well as the chord accompaniment sound. The [EFFECT] button alternately turns the effect on (indicator lit) or off (indicator out). LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT NOTES • Effect type changes will apply to the note currently being played, while effect ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next note played. 31 Expression & Effects ■ Left Hold ................................................................................................................................................................................................ This function causes the left-hand (ORCH. 2) voice to be held even when the keys are released when using the AUTO BASS CHORD and ORCH. 2v1 orchestration modes. Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). LEFT HOLD HARMONY SUSTAIN REVERB EFFECT NOTES • The LEFT HOLD function works only while AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is running. Further, LEFT HOLD is temporarily disengaged during ENDING sections and INTRO or SOLO sections that have their own chord progressions. • LEFT HOLD will not function during Multi Pad (Chord Pad) playback or Sequencer ACCOMP. track playback even if the LEFT HOLD indicator is lit. ■ Pitch Bend Wheel ........................................................................................................................................................................ The PITCH BEND wheel to the left of the keyboard lets you bend the pitch of notes played on the keyboard up or down. Normal pitch is restored when the PITCH BEND wheel is released. The maximum pitch bend range is preset for each voice, but can be set as required for custom voices by using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT feature described on page 77. PITCH BEND MODULATION/ EFFECT UP MAX DOWN MIN NOTES • Pitch bend can be applied to the ORCH. 1 voice only, the ORCH. 2 voice only, or both voices via the PITCH BEND WHEEL ASSIGN function described on page 87. Also, pitch bend is applied to harmony notes on the basis of the ORCH. 1 settings. • The pitch bend wheel may have no effect when applied to notes at the upper and lower extremes of the keyboard if a CUSTOM VOICE is used. Also, sudden pitch changes may occur. • Pitch bend cannot be applied to the ORCH. 2 voice when AUTO BASS CHORD is ON and the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected. • Pitch bend can be applied to notes from C-1 to C7 (i.e. MIDI note numbers 12 through 108). Pitch can not be bent down below the lowest note or up above the highest note in this range. ■ Modulation/Effect Wheel ..................................................................................................................................................... The MODULATION/EFFECT wheel to the left of the keyboard lets you apply amplitude/pitch modulation or effects to notes played on the keyboard. Rolling the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel upward (away from you) increases the modulation depth or effect. Use the WHEEL SELECT function described on page 86 to select modulation or effect operation. The type of effect applied when effect operation is selected is determined by the EFFECT TYPE function described on page 85. The modulation effect mode is preset for each voice, but can be set for custom voices by using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT feature described on page 77. NOTES • Modulation is automatically applied to some voices, while to some it cannot be applied even if the modulation wheel is operated. 32 PITCH BEND MODULATION/ EFFECT UP MAX DOWN MIN Using the Pads The PSR-6000 features 8 “PADs” above the keyboard that can be used in a variety of ways: ● MULTI: When the MULTI mode is selected, the 4 pads marked “PHRASE” and the 4 pads marked “CHORD” can be used to record and play back short sequences of notes and chords, respectively. ● PERC: In the PERC mode the pads can be used to play 8 different drum and percussion instruments selected from the PSR-6000’s drum voices — DRUM KIT and POP DRUM KIT. ● TEMPO: In the TEMPO mode the pads are used to vary tempo in a number of ways, giving the PSR-6000 unprecedented capability for creative tempo variations while playing. PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT PAD MULTI PLAYING MULTI REPEAT REC / STOP PHRASE CHORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • Pad data can be saved to floppy disk. See page 95 for details. The MULTI Mode To engage the MULTI mode, press the [MODE SELECT] button a few times until the MULTI indicator lights. MULTI REPEAT PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT NOTES • Preset data is initially recorded in pads 1 through 8. The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4) Each PHRASE pad can record up to approximately 160 notes played using the ORCH. 1 voice (only the ORCH. 1 voice is recorded even if the ORCH. 2+1 orchestration mode is selected). The recorded phrases can then be played back at any time — even while playing on the keyboard, with or without accompaniment. The PHRASE pads record the following data: • Voice (Orch.1) • Note On/Off (Orch.1) • Modulation (when Modulation is On for Orchestra 1: see page 32) • Orchestra 1 Volume • Sustain On/Off (when Sustain is On for Orchestra 1: see page 31) • Pitch Bend (when Pitch Bend is On for Orchestra 1: see page 32) • Glide On/Off (when Glide is On for Orchestra 1: see page 88) • Octave Change (Orch. 1) NOTES • The data listed above is also recorded if it is received via the PSR-6000 MIDI interface (page 102). 33 Using the Pads ■ Recording Phrases .................................................................................................................................................................... Z Select a PHRASE Pad For Recording Press the PHRASE pad you intend to record to while holding the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/STOP indicator will flash, indicating that the selected pad is ready to record. MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP PHRASE 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. X Play a Phrase Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard using the ORCHESTRA 1 voice (i.e. the right-hand section of the keyboard if the split play mode or AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is engaged), and the REC/STOP indicator will light continuously as long as recording continues. NOTES • You can record phrases while AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is playing or stopped. In either case the phrase will be recorded in relation to the currently set accompaniment tempo, so it is a good idea to record phrases while monitoring the accompaniment to ensure that they are reproduced at an appropriate tempo when played back with accompaniment. C Stop Recording Press the [REC/STOP] button to stop recording when you’ve finished playing the phrase. The [REC/STOP] button indicator will go out when recording ends. MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP PHRASE 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. NOTES • Recording will stop automatically if the PHRASE pad memory becomes full (approximately 160 notes per pad), or if another pad is pressed. ■ Phrase Playback ........................................................................................................................................................................... As long as the MULTI mode is selected, any recorded phrase can be played back simply by pressing the corresponding PHRASE pad. The phrase will play back whether the accompaniment is playing or not, but will always play at the currently set tempo. The MULTI PLAYING indicator will light while the phrase plays back, and playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing either the [REC/STOP] button or the corresponding pad button. It is also possible to play back several phrases at the same time. NOTES • Although the note data played by the phrase pads can not be recorded by the PSR-6000 sequencer (page 49), the phrase pad events (i.e. the fact that a pad has been pressed) can be recorded. Phrase pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 96), but can not be memorized by the Panel Registration feature (page 41). • Use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the playback volume of the phrase pads. 34 MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP PHRASE 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. Using the Pads The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8) Each CHORD pad can record up to approximately 80 chords played on the left-hand section of the keyboard when the AUTO BASS CHORD feature is engaged. The recorded chords can then be played back at any time. ■ Recording Chords ...................................................................................................................................................................... Z Select a CHORD Pad For Recording Press the CHORD pad you intend to record to while holding the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/STOP indicator will flash, indicating that the selected pad is ready to record. If the accompaniment is stopped when the CHORD pad is selected for recording, the SYNCHRO START mode will automatically be engaged. REC/STOP CHORD 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • If AUTO BASS CHORD is OFF when a CHORD pad is selected for recording, it will automatically be turned ON. Further, if the MANUAL BASS mode is selected, the FINGERED CHORD mode will automatically be selected in its place. X Play the Required Chords Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a chord on the left-hand section of the keyboard, and the REC/STOP indicator will light continuously as long as recording continues. C Stop Recording Press the [REC/STOP] button or the pad being recorded to stop recording when you’ve finished playing the chords. The [REC/STOP] button indicator will go out when recording ends. REC/STOP CHORD 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • Recording will stop automatically if the CHORD pad memory becomes full (approximately 80 chords per pad); if another pad is pressed; or if the accompaniment [STOP], [START/RE-START], or [SYNCHRO START] buttons is pressed. 35 Using the Pads ■ Chord Playback ............................................................................................................................................................................. As long as the MULTI mode is selected and an AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is playing, any recorded chord sequence can be played back simply by pressing the corresponding CHORD pad. The phrase will play back at the currently set tempo. The MULTI PLAYING indicator will light while the chord sequence plays back, and playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the sequence is reached. Only one chord sequence can be played at a time. During chord pad playback the ABC indicator will go out and the left-hand section of the keyboard plays in the same way as the right-hand section. To indicate that the end of the chord sequence is approaching, the MULTI PLAYING indicator flashes during the last two measures. A chord sequence that is playing can be stopped by pressing the same chord pad again, or by pressing the [REC/STOP] button. MULTI PLAYING CHORD 1 Tempo Change 2 Tap St 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • If you press a CHORD pad while the accompaniment is stopped or while the AUTO BASS CHORD function is off, “Engage ABC to play the chord pads!” will appear on the display. Also, if AUTO BASS CHORD is on but the Manual Bass mode is selected, “Select FC or SF mode to play the chord pads!” will appear on the display, since chord playback will not function in the Manual Bass mode. • Chord pad playback can be recorded by the PSR-6000 sequencer. • Chord pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 96, 97), but can not be memorized by the Panel Registration feature (page 41). • Playback occurs in measure units. Playback will continue until the end of the measure even if recording was stopped prior to the end of that measure. ■ MULTI Pad Repeat Playback ........................................................................................................................................... If you press the button immediately to the right of the pad [MODE SELECT] button so that the indicator above it lights while the MULTI mode is engaged, the MULTI REPEAT function is engaged and phrase or chord playback will repeat continuously until the [REC/STOP] button is pressed, the same pad is pressed a second time, or the REPEAT mode is turned off by pressing the button to the right of the [MODE SELECT] button again. In the last case the phrase or chord sequence will play through to the end and then stop. 36 MULTI REPEAT PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT Using the Pads The PERC Mode To engage the PERC mode, press the [MODE SELECT] button a few times until the PERC indicator lights. The 8 pads are initially programmed with the following drum and percussion instruments which can be played via the pads when the PERC mode is selected: 1. Kick 1 2. Snare 3 3. Tom 1 Low 4. Tom 1 Mid 5. Tom 1 Hi 6. Closed Hi-Hat 1 7. Open Hi-Hat 1 8. Crash Cymbal 2 ■ MULTI REPEAT PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT Assigning Different Instruments To the PERC Pads ............................................................................ Z Press [REC/STOP] MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP Press the [REC/STOP] button so that its indicator lights (make sure the PERC mode is selected first). The PERCUSSION PAD ASSIGN display will appear, listing the percussion instruments currently assigned to the pads. PHRASE 1 2 Tempo Change Tap Start 3 Temp X Select a Drum Voice The DRUM KIT voice is automatically selected if you press the [REC/STOP] key while in the PERC mode and a non-drum voice is selected. Use the DRUM KIT/POP DRUM KIT LCD button to select the drum voice which includes the percussion instruments you want to assign. C Assign the Instruments A new drum/percussion instrument is assigned to a pad simply by playing the key corresponding to the desired instrument while holding the drum pad to which it is to be assigned. The reverse also works: press the pad while holding the key. The velocity at which you play the key (how hard you press the key = how loud the note sounds) is also recorded to the specified pad. PAD MULTI PLAYING PHRASE CHORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. faster a tempo NOTES • Percussion voices created using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT functions described on page 83 cannot be assigned to the percussion pads. 37 Using the Pads V Press [REC/STOP] To End Assignment When you’re finished making instrument assignments to the PERC pads, press the [REC/STOP] button so that its indicator goes out. MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP PHRASE 1 2 Tempo Change Tap Start 3 Temp NOTES • Percussion pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 95, 96), but can not be memorized by the Panel Registration feature (page 41). ■ Playing the Percussion Pads ......................................................................................................................................... The PERC pads can be played at any time — whether an accompaniment is playing or not — as long as the PERC mode is selected. Depending on the assigned instrument, some pads will play continuously as long as they are held. PAD MULTI PLAYING PHRASE CHORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. faster a tempo NOTES • The PERC pad sounds are not affected by the PSR-6000 PITCH BEND wheel or EFFECT settings. ■ The PERC BREAK Function ............................................................................................................................................ If you press the button immediately to the right of the pad [MODE SELECT] button so that the indicator above it lights while the PERC mode is engaged, the PERC BREAK function is engaged — playing on the PERC pads causes the accompaniment rhythm to stop playing so you can create your own fill-in. The accompaniment rhythm begins playing from the beginning of the next measure when you stop playing the percussion pads. The BREAK mode is turned off by pressing the button to the right of the [MODE SELECT] button again. 38 MULTI REPEAT PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT Using the Pads The TEMPO Mode MULTI REPEAT To engage the TEMPO mode, press the [MODE SELECT] button a few times until the TEMPO indicator lights. The functions of the pads in the TEMPO mode are indicated by labels below each pad: ● Tempo Change If you press this pad while holding the [REC/STOP] button, the tempo at that instant is registered in memory. The registered tempo can then be recalled at any time, regardless of the current tempo, simply by pressing the [Tempo Change] pad. PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT MULTI PLAYING REC / STOP PHRASE 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. NOTES • If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando (described below), the accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [Tempo Change] value takes effect. ● Tap Start While the accompaniment is stopped, or during the SYNCHRO START mode before the accompaniment is started, the [Tap Start] pad can be used to set any desired tempo (within the PSR-6000’s 40 to 280 beats per minute range) by simply tapping on the pad at the required tempo. Tap 4 times for an accompaniment with a 4/4 time signature, 3 times for 3/4, and 5 times for 5/ 4. PHRASE 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. 1 2 3 4 Tempo Change Tap Start Tempo l accel. NOTES • If the accompaniment is started before the required number of taps has been entered, the Tap Start setting will be ignored. The Tap Start setting will also be ignored if several seconds elapse before the required number of taps have been entered, if a different style is selected, or if the accompaniment [STOP] button is pressed. ● Tempo I (Tempo Primo) If the [Tempo I] pad is tapped while an accompaniment is playing, the tempo setting that was active when the accompaniment was started is immediately restored, regardless of any tempo changes that occurred after the accompaniment was started. PHRASE NOTES • If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando (described below), the accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [Tempo I] value takes effect. ● accel. (Accelerando) Pressing the [accel.] pad immediately starts a 2-measure accelerando (tempo increase) that is executed by increasing the tempo by a small amount on every 8th beat. The accelerando is stopped if the [accel.] pad is pressed again before the 2 measures are completed. PHRASE 39 Using the Pads ● faster Tap the [faster] pad to increase the tempo by a fixed amount, whether the accompaniment is playing or not. CHORD 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [faster] value takes effect. ● a tempo This pad recalls the tempo prior to the last tempo change — e.g. any change incurred by pressing the [Tempo Change], [accel.], [faster], [slower], or [rit.] pad. CHORD 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [a tempo] value takes effect. ● slower Tap the [slower] pad to decrease the tempo by a fixed amount, whether the accompaniment is playing or not. CHORD NOTES • If this pad is used during an accelerando or ritardando, the accelerando or ritardando stops immediately and the [slower] value takes effect. ● rit. (Ritardando) Pressing the [rit.] pad immediately starts a 2-measure ritardando (tempo decrease) that is executed by decreasing the tempo by a small amount on every 8th beat. The ritardando is stopped if the [rit.] pad is pressed again before the 2 measures are completed. CHORD 5 6 7 8 faster a tempo slower rit. NOTES • The [PAD 8/rit.] pad has essentially the same effect on the tempo as the [ENDING/ rit.] button (page 25), except that while the [ENDING/rit.] button causes the tempo to return to its initial value after the rhythm stops, the tempo does not return to its initial value if the [PAD 8/rit.] pad is used, even after the rhythm is stopped. • If a fill-in pattern is selected during a ritardando, the ritardando continues during the fill-in but then original tempo is then restored as soon as the fill-in ends. ■ The TEMPO SYNCHRO Function ................................................................................................................................ If you press the button immediately to the right of the pad [MODE SELECT] button so that the indicator above it lights while the TEMPO mode is engaged, the TEMPO SYNCHRO function is engaged — any tempo change initiated by a TEMPO pad takes place at the beginning of the next measure instead of immediately when the pad is tapped (TEMPO SYNCHRO has no effect on Tap Start operation). The SYNCHRO mode is turned off by pressing the button to the right of the [MODE SELECT] button again. 40 MULTI REPEAT PERC. BREAK TEMPO SYNCHRO MODE SELECT Panel Registration The PSR-6000 Panel Registration feature can be used to memorize 32 complete control-panel setups (4 banks, 8 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed. NOTES • When the PSR-6000 is in its initial factory-preset condition, the panel registration memories contain preset setups. When these are recalled, a descriptive setup name will appear at the top of the display (example: A1 Going West!). BANK A FREEZE MEMORY B C D PANEL REGISTRATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Registering the Panel Settings Z Set Up the Controls as Required ............................................................................................................................... Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the Panel Registration function: Data Stored By the Panel Registration Memory Panel Registration Orchestra 1 Voice Orchestra 2 Voice Orchestration Harmony On/Off Sustain On/Off Reverb On/Off Panel Effect On/Off Buttons Style ABC On/Off Freeze Accomp. Voice OFF Freeze ON Freeze ON O O X O O X O O X O O X O O X O O X O O X O X O O X O IA On/Off O X O Accompaniment Section Multi Pad Select O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O X X O O X X O O Pad Synchro/Break/ Repeat On/Off Left Hold On/Off Tempo Orchestra 1 Orchestra 2 Bass Volume Chord 1 LCD Chord 2 Rhythm Orchestra 1 Octave Orchestra 2 Octave Panel Registration LCD F2 F3 F4 F5 Key Velocity On/Off Split Point ABC Mode Manual Bass Voice Transpose Reverb Type Reverb Depth Effect Type Effect Depth Foot Switch Select Foot Switch Percussion Foot Controller Select Sustain Part Select Pitch Bend Wheel Select Modulation/Effect Wheel Type Modulation/Effect Wheel On/Off IA Mode Auto Solo On/Off IA Sensitivity IA Key Part One Touch Setting (Synchro Change On/Off) Harmony Type O X O O X O O O X O O X Freeze Accomp. Voice OFF Freeze ON Freeze ON O O X O O O O X O O X O O O O O O X O O X O O X O O X O O O O O O O O O O O X O O X O O X O O X O X O O X O O X O O XO =recalled O O XX =not recalled O O O X 41 Panel Registration X Register in Memory ................................................................................................................................................................... Use the [A], [B], [C], or [D] button to select the corresponding memory bank — the corresponding indicator will light. Press and hold the [MEMORY] button, then press one of the PANEL REGISTRATION buttons. Any data that was previously in the selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings. BANK A FREEZE B C D PANEL REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Recall the Registered Panel Settings Simply select the appropriate bank using the [A], [B], [C] or [D] button and press the desired PANEL REGISTRATION button at any time to recall the memorized settings. BANK A B C D NOTES • No registration name is displayed when a user registration setup is recalled. FREEZE MEMORY PANEL REGISTRATION 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 • The preset registration setups can be recalled by using the initialization procedure described on page 101. • When the Foot Switch function is set to REGISTRATION+ and a different panel registration memory is recalled either via the panel controls or the footswitch, the Foot Switch setting will not change even if a different setting is included in the recalled panel registration memory (i.e. Foot Switch remains set to REGISTRATION+). The Freeze Function If you press the [FREEZE] button so that its LED lights, selecting a different panel registration will not change the currently selected accompaniment or voice settings even if the new panel registration includes a different settings. The REGISTRATION FREEZE utility function (page 101) determines whether the freeze function affects accompaniment or voice settings. 42 FREEZE MEMORY PANEL REGISTRATION 3 4 Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks The PSR-6000 can play optional Yamaha Disc Orchestra Collection software, and General MIDI mode software recorded by other equipment. When a disk of either type (3.5" 2DD disks only) is inserted into the PSR-6000 disk drive, the PSR-6000 automatically switches the internal tone generator system to allow playback of the software and performance on the keyboard. Disk Orchestra Collection Disk Playback Using DISK ORCHESTRA disks (available from Yamaha), the PSR-6000 will let you enjoy listening to automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,” allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played automatically. Z Insert the DOC Disk .................................................................................................................................................................. Insert the DISK ORCHESTRA disk into the PSR-6000 disk drive (located below the right end of the keyboard) with the sliding disk shutter facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and the DISK IN USE lamp will light briefly while the PSR-6000 reads and identifies the disk. When the disk is inserted and identified the display shown to the right will appear (if this display doesn’t appear, press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI] button): DEMO DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI NOTES • There are actually three ways to select the DOC mode: 1) Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically selected). 2) Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button (the normal, DOC, and General MIDI modes are selected in sequence). 3) Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode” message from an external MIDI device. The [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI button is a handy way to engage the DOC mode from another mode when the disk is already loaded in the drive. Any rhythm or ABC operation in progress will stop automatically. • You can use the [EXIT] button or [DISK ORCHESTRA/ GENERAL MIDI] button to exit from the DOC mode. 43 Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks X Select a Playback Mode & Song Number If Necessary ..................................................................... If the song select display is not showing, press the SONG SELECT LCD button to recall it. Three song playback modes are available: ALL, CHAIN, and SINGLE. Use the st LCD dial next to the TEMPO dial to select the desired playback mode. NOTES • The DOC and GM chain list data can be saved to or loaded from disk (page 91). Further, this data is retained in memory even when the power is off if the “F7: UTILITY MEMORY BACKUP” function is turned ON. ALL All songs shown in the song list will be played in sequence. CHAIN A specified sequence of songs from the song list will be played in sequence. When CHAIN is selected use the LIST st LCD dials to select a song to add to the chain, then press the INS. LCD button to add that song to the chain. To delete songs from the chain use the CHAIN LIST st LCD dials to select the song you want to delete, then press the DEL. LCD button. SINGLE Only a single specified song is played. When SINGLE is selected use the LIST st LCD dials to select the song you want to play. C Set the Repeat Function As Required .................................................................................................................. Use the REPEAT LCD button to turn repeat playback ON or OFF. When repeat is ON, the selected song or sequence of songs will play repeatedly until stopped. When repeat is OFF, the song(s) will play through once, then playback will stop automatically. V Press [START/RE-START] To Begin Playback .............................................................................................. Start playback by pressing the [START/RESTART] button. The current measure number will be shown to the right of the current song number on the display during playback, and the activity of the various parts is shown by the circular indicators below the current song number. Playback can be stopped at any time by pressing the [STOP] button. RUS SOLO SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP NOTES • The TEMPO LCD dial or TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons can be used to adjust the playback tempo before or during playback. • Some Disk Orchestra software does not produce a tempo display (e.g. free-tempo phrases, etc.). In this case, three bars appear instead of the usual tempo value on the display. 44 • If the inserted disk contains both DOC and GM song files, the DOC mode will automatically be selected. GM song data may not be reproduced correctly in this case. Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks B Eject the Disk When Done ................................................................................................................................................. When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it. This will automatically exit the DISK ORCHESTRA mode. NOTES • There are actually three ways to exit from the DOC mode: 1) Remove the DOC disk. 2) Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] or [EXIT] button (the normal, DOC, and General MIDI modes are selected in sequence). 3) Receive any MIDI exclusive message that selects a different mode from an external MIDI device. • NEVER eject a disk or turn the power off while: 1) the DISK ORCHESTRA function is playing. 2) the DISK is formatting or recording. ■ Volume Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. If the volume control/mute display is not showing, press the VOLUME/MUTE LCD button to recall it. The volume-control LCD dials function in the same way as the volume controls in the normal play mode, each controlling the volume of the corresponding part, as listed below. As always, the MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume level. ORC1 Adjusts the volume of ORCH.1 played on the keyboard. SONG Adjusts the overall volume of the song. RIGHT Adjusts the volume of the right-hand part. LEFT Adjusts the volume of the left-hand part. ACC Adjusts the volume of the disk backing. BASS Adjusts the volume of the disk bass part. RHY Adjusts the volume of the disk rhythm part. NOTES • Operation of the volume controls may be different with some songs. Further, the reverb or other effect can be turned on or off for all parts by using the REVERB or EFFECT button. • During DOC playback reverb (type) ON/OFF data may be read from the disk. When OFF data is received, the depth values for all parts other than the part you are playing are set to “0.” This means that unless you change the depth setting, reverb cannot be applied to those parts even if the REVERB indicator is lit. Also, since the effect depth values for all parts other than the part you will be playing are set to “0” before DOC playback is started, you will have to change the depth settings before effects can be applied to those parts, even if the EFFECT indicator is lit. • Since only the ORCH.1 voice is used for the part played on the keyboard in the DOC mode, no ORCH.2 volume control is provided. 45 Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks ■ Muting Specific Parts By turning off (muting) the left- or right-hand melody part, or both, you can practice playing those parts on the PSR-6000 keyboard. The PSR-6000 also makes it possible to mute the rhythm, bass, and accompaniment parts. Sheet music is provided with the Disk Orchestra Collection disks. Press the MUTE LCD button (from the VOLUME display) and use the RHY, BASS, ACC., LEFT, and/or RIGHT LCD dials to set the corresponding part to PLAY, MUTE, or SOLO. PLAY The corresponding part plays normally. MUTE The corresponding part is muted and will not play. SOLO Only the corresponding part will play — all others are muted. Press the VOLUME LCD button when you want to go back to the volume-control display. NOTES • The left and right-hand parts cannot be played separately on some songs. • The appropriate voice for the part you are going to play is automatically selected when you select a song (When “ALL” is selected, the voice for the first song is automatically selected). ■ Octave, Transpose, and Tune The OCTAVE and TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD buttons function in exactly the same way as in the normal play mode (page 17, 18). ■ Other Controls That Function In the DOC Mode • Keyboard. • Voice select buttons (the DOC voice list is different from the normal play mode voice list — the voice group [12] button does not function). • START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function). • REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is automatically turned ON when the DOC mode is engaged). • TEMPO buttons (the recommended tempo can be selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously). • SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1). 46 • PITCH BEND wheel (affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±300 cents). • MODULATION/EFFECT wheel (modulation applies to Orchestra 1). • PAD (fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per normal play mode, and cannot be changed in the DOC mode). • FOOT SWITCH (applies to notes played on the keyboard. Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE). • FOOT CONTROLLER (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Foot Controller Select fixed at Orc1Vol). • FUNCTION buttons (F2 and F8 only — pages 84 and 102). • LIST HOLD button. • HELP button. • MIDI transmission/reception. NOTES • Since octave offset is applied to some voices played via the keyboard in the DOC mode, the pitch of notes played via the keyboard may not match that of those played via MIDI note numbers. Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks General MIDI Disk Playback General MIDI disk playback is essentially the same as Disk Orchestra Collection disk playback, except for the differences listed below. Refer to the Disk Orchestra Collection procedure, above, for operational details. NOTES • Only GM data recorded on 3.5" 2DD IBM-format disks in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 can be played on the PSR-6000 (up to track 17 with format 1). Also note that data that does not comply with GM System Level 1 specifications may not be reproduced. • No measure number appears on the GM mode display. * “IBM” is a registered trademark of International Business Machines. ■ Volume Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. If the volume control display is not showing, press the VOLUME LCD button to recall it. The volume-control LCD dials function in the same way as the volume controls in the normal play mode, each controlling the volume of the corresponding track. Use the Tr1-8 or Tr9-16 LCD button to switch between the track 1-through-8 and track 9through-16 displays, as required. As always, the MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume level. Press the [MIXER] button to access the SONG, PAD, and ORC1 volume controls listed below. The standard TRANSPOSE and TUNE functions can also be accessed from this screen by pressing the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD button. Press the [MIXER] button again, or the [EXIT] button, to return to the main GM mode display. SONG Adjusts the overall volume of song playback. PAD Adjusts the volume of the PSR-6000 pads. ORC1 Adjusts the volume of ORCH.1 played on the keyboard. NOTES • The reverb or other effect can be turned on or off for all parts by using the REVERB or EFFECT button. MIXER LIST HOLD 47 Playing DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) & General MIDI Music Software Disks ■ Muting SpecificTracks .......................................................................................................................................................... Individual tracks can be turned on or off (muted) as required. Press the MUTE LCD button (from the VOLUME display) and use the LCD dials to set the corresponding track to PLAY, MUTE, or SOLO. Use the Tr1-8 or Tr9-16 LCD button to switch between the track 1-through-8 and track 9-through16 displays, as required. PLAY The corresponding track plays normally. MUTE The corresponding track is muted and will not play. SOLO Only the corresponding track will play — all others are muted. Press the VOLUME LCD button when you want to go back to the volume-control display. ■ Octave ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... The OCTAVE LCD button functions in exactly the same way as in the normal play mode (page 18). ■ Other Controls That Function In the General MIDI Mode ................................................................ • Keyboard. • Voice select buttons (the General MIDI voice list is different from the normal play mode voice list — the voice group [12] button does not function). • START and STOP buttons (ABC does not function). • REVERB and EFFECT buttons (REVERB is automatically turned ON when the GM mode is engaged). • TEMPO buttons (the recommended tempo can be selected by pressing both the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously). • SUSTAIN button and pedal (Affects notes played on the keyboard. Sustain Part Select fixed at Orchestra 1). • PITCH BEND wheel (affects notes played on the keyboard. Pitch Bend Select fixed at Orchestra 1. Range fixed at ±300 cents). • MODULATION/EFFECT wheel (modulation applies to Orchestra 1). 48 • PAD (fixed at PERCUSSION. Voices fixed as per normal play mode, and cannot be changed in the GM mode). • FOOT SWITCH (applies to notes played on the keyboard. Footswitch Select fixed at GLIDE). • FOOT CONTROLLER (Applies to notes played on the keyboard. Foot Controller Select fixed at Orc1Vol). • FUNCTION buttons (F2 and F8 only — pages 84 and 102). • LIST HOLD button. • HELP button. • MIDI transmission/reception. NOTES • See the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121 for details on which rhythm voices are played by which note numbers. The Sequencer The PSR-6000 features an 8-track sequencer that allows you to record and play back original musical creations — along with auto accompaniment if required. You can record the accompaniment and orchestra parts separately or at the same time. If, for example, you record the accompaniment first and then record your own performance while listening to playback of the accompaniment, you’re free to use the entire keyboard for your performance rather than being limited to only the upper keyboard area. You can also play back each part independently or in any combination. For even further versatility, the PSR-6000 sequencer allows different songs to be saved to or reloaded from floppy disk. Recording As you become more familiar with the PSR-6000 sequencer you’ll probably develop a recording procedure that best suits your particular musical requirements. Here, to get you started, is the most simple, straightforward way to approach sequencer recording. Z Engage the Sequencer .......................................................................................................................................................... Press the [SEQUENCER] button to engage the sequencer. “SEQUENCER” will appear at the top of the display, the MEASURE number will appear to the right of this, and the top left LCD button will function as the sequencer’s SONG select button. SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 If the sequencer contains previously recorded data, the green PLAY indicators of tracks containing data will light when the sequencer is engaged. Any of these tracks can be muted prior to engaging the record-ready mode (below) by pressing the corresponding track button so that the green PLAY indicator flashes. NOTES • The sequencer can also be engaged by pressing one of the track buttons. X Select a Song Number ........................................................................................................................................................... The PSR-6000 sequencer can record up to 6 separate songs. Use the SONG LCD button to select the song number you want to record. The selected song number is shown to the right of “SONG” on the display. 49 The Sequencer C Set Up All Record Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... Select the accompaniment style you want to record with, voices, orchestration, harmony, and other parameters before actually beginning recording. A list of the parameters that can be recorded by the PSR-6000 sequencer is given below. You may also need to select a specific record mode and other conditions accessible via the sequencer’s METRONOME, HARMONY, and RECORDING TYPE functions, described on page 54. Recordable Parameters Tracks 1 — 7 • Note on/off • Pitch bend • Modulation • Sustain on/off • Orchestra 1 & 2 volume • Voice change (including custom voice on/off) • Tempo (if ACCOMP. track contains no data) • Glide on/off • Percussion pad on/off* • Tempo pad tempo value* • Multi pad on/off (phrase only)* * The pad mode selected when the sequence is played back will be used. Accompaniment Track • Chord & root (note on/off in Manual Bass mode) • Style change (styles with the same time signature only) • Rhythm volume • Bass volume • Chord 1 volume • Chord 2 volume • Tempo • Reverb on/off & depth • Reverb type • Effect on/off & depth • Effect type • Effect control • Harmony on/off and type • Interactive Accompaniment on/off • Interactive Accompaniment section • Interactive Accompaniment mode & sensitivity • Auto Bass Chord mode • Percussion Pad on/off • Pad function (Multi/Tempo/Perc) • Repeat/Synchro/Break on/off • Manual bass on/off, voice • Intro, fill in & ending • Chord pad chord sequence • Tempo pad tempo value * Press the Pad [REC/STOP] button if you want to stop the phrase pad playback in the middle of the song recording. NOTES • If the record and playback pad modes are different, pad on/off events will not be reproduced. • If parameter changes are memorized using the Panel Registration or One Touch Setting features during recording, only those parameters that can be recorded on the current track will be memorized. • The time signature cannot be changed once a song has been recorded. V Select the Record Track(s) ................................................................................................................................................ AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment can only be recorded on the ACCOMP. track. The ORCH.1 and ORCH.2 voices can be recorded on any of the remaining 7 tracks, but only one of these tracks can be recorded at a time if the normal ORCH.1 orchestration is selected. If the ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected, two record tracks must be selected — the ORCH.1 voice will be recorded on the lower-numbered track while the ORCH.2 voice will be recorded on the higher-numbered track. This means that a maximum of three record tracks can be specified when the ORCH.2+1 or ORCH.2v1 orchestration is selected: ACCOMP. and any two numbered tracks. 50 The Sequencer To select the record track(s) and engage the recordready mode, hold the [RECORD] button and press the appropriate track button(s). The red REC indicator for the tracks will flash. Also note that the AUTO BASS CHORD indicator will light automatically when the ACCOMP. track is selected. SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 NOTES • The upper markings on the track buttons apply when the SEQUENCER mode is engaged (1 through 7, and ACCOMP.). The lower markings when the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER described on page 62 is operating. • If you are adding new material to tracks that have already been recorded, the [r] and [f] buttons can be used at this point to move to any measure number from which you want to begin recording. The [r] and [f] buttons will not function once recording has been started. SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER RECORD DELETE EDIT B Start Recording ............................................................................................................................................................................. Recording will start as soon as the [START/RESTART] button is pressed or, if you also press the [SYNCHRO START] button, as soon as any key on the keyboard is pressed. If the ACCOMP. track is selected and you start recording by pressing the [START/RE-START] button, only the rhythm will play until the first chord (FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER) is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard. If you start recording in the SYNCHRO START mode by playing on the right-hand section of the keyboard, a metronome will sound in place of the rhythm and AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment until a key is played on the left-hand section of the keyboard. SOLO SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP NOTES • You can also start recording with an introduction by pressing any of the [INTRO] buttons. • The restart function can not be used while the sequencer mode is engaged. FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 • Previously recorded fill-ins may not always be erased if that section is re-recorded or deleted. 51 The Sequencer N Play ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Play the accompaniment and/or orchestra parts. The current measure number is shown in the upper right corner of the display as you record. M Stop Recording ............................................................................................................................................................................. Press the [STOP] button to stop recording immediately, or the [ENDING/rit.] button to finish off the recording with an appropriate ending. The first measure of the sequence is automatically selected when recording is stopped. FILL IN FILL IN ENDING/ rit. INTRO 1 INTRO 2 INTRO 3 SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP < Record a New Track .................................................................................................................................................................. To record a new track, simply select a new voice and other parameters as required, select a new track as described in step V, then record. All previously recorded tracks will automatically be set to the PLAY mode so you can record the new material while listening to the material you’ve already recorded. Repeat this procedure until your sequence is complete. SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 NOTES • Up to approximately 14,000 notes can be recorded for all six sequencer songs. The exact number of notes that can be recorded, however, will depend on the type of data you record. Deleting Tracks If you make a mistake while recording or simply want to delete a track from your sequence, press the track button corresponding to the track you want to delete while holding the [DELETE] button. NOTES • Tracks cannot be deleted while the record-ready mode is engaged, during recording, or during playback. 52 SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 The Sequencer Playback Z Start Playback ................................................................................................................................................................................. Since tracks are automatically set to the PLAY mode once they have been recorded, and tracks containing data are automatically set to the PLAY mode when the sequencer is initially engaged by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button, all you have to do to play back a sequence is to press the [START/RE-START] button (the green PLAY LEDs of all tracks set to the PLAY mode will be lit). If you first press the [SYNCHRO START] button, sequencer playback can be started by playing any key on the keyboard. Any of the PLAY tracks can be muted before or during playback by pressing the corresponding track button. The PLAY indicator will flash when a track is muted. Normal playback can be restored by pressing the track buttons of muted tracks a second time (the PLAY indicator will light continuously). SOLO SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP EQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 1 CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM NOTES • Before starting playback you can use the [r] and [f] buttons to move to any measure number from which you want to begin playback. The [p] button goes directly to measure number 1. EQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER RECORD DELETE EDIT • If the One Touch Setting SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter (page 89) is turned ON during ACCOMP. track playback, the One Touch Setting section will change in accordance with accompaniment section transitions and the result may be different from the recorded data. X Play along If You Like .............................................................................................................................................................. You can play along with the sequence using the entire PSR6000 keyboard, selecting different voices and changing the tempo as required. NOTES • If any parameter changes are recorded in the sequence, the recorded changes will still take effect even if you manually change the parameters while playing. C Stop Playback ................................................................................................................................................................................. Playback will stop automatically when the end of the sequence is reached. At this point the parameters recorded on the ACCOMP. track will revert to their initial values. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the [STOP] button. SYNCHRO START/ START RE-START STOP V Press [EXIT] When Done ..................................................................................................................................................... Press the [EXIT] button to exit the sequencer mode and return to the normal play mode. The sequencer mode can also be exited by pressing the [SEQUENCER] button. EXIT SEQUENCER PLAY/REC 1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 PLAY/ 2 CHOR 53 The Sequencer Sequence Editing The PSR-6000 sequencer edit mode offers a range of functions that let you modify the recorded data and the way in which it is recorded in a number of ways. Press the [EDIT] button while the sequencer is engaged to enter the sequencer edit mode. When you’re finished editing press the [EDIT] button again or press the [EXIT] button to return to the sequencer. TOM ACCOMPANIMENT PRO EXIT RECORD DELETE EDIT The sequencer edit display has two main “pages” — CONDITION/VOLUME and EDIT — which are selected by using the [ ] and [ ] LCD buttons. The various functions within the selected display page are selected by using the s and t LCD buttons. The corresponding parameters are edited via the appropriate LCD dials. NOTES • The edit functions may not work if a large amount of sequence data has been recorded. ■ CONDITION/VOLUME — CONDITION .................................................................................................................... The CONDITION function actually includes three functions: METRONOME, HARMONY, and RECORDING TYPE. ● METRONOME Allows the recording metronome sound to be turned on or off. Use the METRONOME LCD dial to turn ON or OFF as required. NOTES • The metronome only sounds during recording when no rhythm is playing. ● HARMONY Determines whether harmony will be applied to the keyboard or a track part. Use the HARM LCD dial to select the harmony part — “KEY” or “TR1” through “TR7”. 54 The Sequencer When the “KEY” harmony setting is selected (this is the default setting when the sequencer mode is engaged), harmony will be applied to notes played on the keyboard. If the “TR1” harmony setting is selected, harmony will be applied to the track-1 part. If “TR2” is selected harmony is applied to track 2, and so on. NOTES • If Harmony is not turned on during recording, it will automatically be turned off each time playback is stopped if it is turned on before or during playback. • Harmony can only be applied to tracks that contain data. ● RECORDING TYPE Selects the Replace, Overdub, or Punch record mode. Use either of the TYPE LCD dials to select the REPLACE, OVERDUB, or PUNCH record mode: REPLACE If replace recording is selected, any previous data on the track being recorded will be erased and replaced by the new material. This is the “default” mode which is selected when the sequencer is initially engaged. OVERDUB If overdub recording is selected, previous material on that track will be retained and the new material will be added to it. ■ PUNCH Punch-in recording allows a specified measure or range of measures to be re-recorded (replaced) without affecting previously recorded material before and after the punch-in range. When the Punch mode is selected you must also specify the measure from which playback is to begin prior to the “punch-in” point at which recording will actually begin (use the PLAY START LCD dial), the punch-in measure from which recording is to begin (use the PUNCH IN LCD dial), and the punch-out measure at which recording is to end (use the PUNCH OUT LCD dial). NOTES • It’s generally convenient to set the “PLAY START” measure in the PUNCH mode to just a few measures before the punch-in point. This allows you to get the feel of the music and prepare to start playing at the punch-in point. You can even play along with the material prior to the actual punchin point so you’ll flow naturally into the punch-in recording range. • A footswitch (an optional FC5 footswitch can be used) plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack can also be used to punch-in and punch-out when the footswitch “PUNCH IN/OUT” function is selected via the “FOOT SWITCH” function described on page 88. With the sequencer running in the Punch Record mode, press the footswitch at the point you want to begin recording (i.e. to “punch in”), and again to stop recording (punch out). • Please note that the punch-in record function can only be used on tracks that already contain recorded material. CONDITION/VOLUME — TRACK VOLUME ....................................................................................................... This function lets you independently set the playback volume of each of the sequencer’s seven orchestra tracks. Use the LCD dials — Tr1 through Tr7 — to set the volume of the corresponding tracks to a value between “0” (minimum volume — no sound) and “100” (maximum volume). NOTES • Only tracks that contain data are available for volume control — others are indicated by an asterisk (*). • Any recorded volume changes will override these settings. 55 The Sequencer ■ EDIT — TRACK COPY/MIX ................................................................................................................................................. Copies the data from one recorded track to another, or mixes the data from two recorded tracks (except the ACCOMP. track). Use the SOURCE1 LCD dial to set the first source track, the SOURCE2 LCD dial to set the second source track, and the DESTINATION LCD dial to set the destination track. If “CPY” is selected for the SOURCE2 parameter, only the SOURCE1 track is copied to the destination track. Once the source and destination tracks have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the copy or mixdown operation. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the copy or mixdown if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • The mix function is most useful when you want to record more than 7 individual parts on the seven orchestra-part tracks. Successfully recorded parts can be combined using this function, thus opening up more tracks for further recording. The data in the source tracks is not erased during a mix operation. • If the tracks that are mixed use different voices, the voice of the lower-numbered track will be used. Subsequent recorded voice changes will operate normally. • Please note that only tracks containing data can be specified as the source tracks — tracks containing no data are indicated by an asterisk (*). • Any data in the destination track will be overwritten by data copied from the source 1 and 2 tracks. 56 ● Copy Source track 1 Data Copy to Destination track Data ● Mix Source track 1 Data Source track 2 Data Destination track The Sequencer ■ REMOVE EVENT ........................................................................................................................................................................... Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch bend, modulation wheel, volume, sustain, or program change operations) from the specified measure or range of measures in the specified track (accompaniment track not available). Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track number, the EVENT LCD dials to set type of event to be removed, the TOP LCD dial to set the number of the first measure in the range from which the events are to be removed, and the LAST LCD dial to set the number of the last measure in the range from which the events are to be removed. Once the track, event, and measure numbers have been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button on the right side of the display to actually execute the remove event operation. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the remove event operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing the entire track. • Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. Similarly, if you remove all program change events from the beginning of a track, the voice that was initially selected when the track was recorded will be used. 57 The Sequencer ■ DELETE MEASURE ................................................................................................................................................................... Deletes the specified measure or range of measures from all tracks (including the accompaniment track). Use the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of the first measure in the range to be deleted, and the LAST LCD dial to specify the number of the last measure in the range to be deleted. Once the top and last measure numbers have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to execute the delete operation. The “Are you sure? ” confirmation prompt will appear on the display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with the delete operation, or the NO LCD button to cancel. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. NOTES • It’s important to remember that a Delete Measure operation affects all tracks simultaneously, and that measures following the deleted range are moved back to take the place of the deleted measures. This differentiates the Delete Measure function from the Erase function (described later), which replaces data in the specified range with rests. • Be careful when deleting measures that contain effect on/off events — e.g. pitch bend, modulation, sustain, harmony, etc. If, for example, you delete a measure that contains a pitch bend off event, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. Delete Measures 4 through 6. • The Delete Measure operation has no “undo” function, so be absolutely sure you want to delete the selected material before actually executing the delete operation. Subsequent measures moved back. ■ CREATE MEASURE Inserts a specified number of blank measures in all tracks (including the accompaniment track) at the specified measure number. Use the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of the measure at which the blank measures are to be inserted, and the SIZE LCD dial to specify the number of blank measures to be inserted. Once the top measure number and size have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the insert operation. The “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear on the 58 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 Measure 4 through 6 deleted. 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 The Sequencer display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with the create measure operation, or the NO LCD button to cancel. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Create measure, size 3, at measure 6. 1 3 4 5 6 Measure 6 moved up; 3 blank measures inserted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Result with new measure numbers. 1 NOTES 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Create Measure affects all tracks simultaneously. The specified number of blank measures is inserted before the existing data beginning at the specified measure number. • The create measure operation has no “undo” function. ■ QUANTIZE Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat. Use the TRACK LCD dial to select the track you want to quantize, and the SIZE LCD dial to specify the quantize size. Once the track number and quantize size have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the quantize operation. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the quantize opera executed tion if it was by mistake. The undo func3 tion is only available until the next operation is performed. 3 Sizes are: The Quantize 3 1/4 = 1/4 note 1/6 = 1/4 note triplet 1/8 = 1/8 note 1/12 = 1/8 note triplet 1/16 = 1/16 note 1/24 = 1/16 note triplet 1/32 = 1/32 note One measure of 8th notes before quantization q e e q e e After quantization q e e q e e NOTES • Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at 59 The Sequencer least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining the track. ■ ERASE Erases all note and event (pitch bend, volume changes, etc.) data from the specified measure or range of measures in the specified track (accompaniment track not available), leaving blank measures. Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track number, the TOP LCD dial to set the number of the first measure in the range to be erased, and the LAST LCD dial to set the number of the last measure in the range to be erased. Once the track and measure numbers have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the erase operation. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the erase operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is Erase measures 4 through 6. TRACK 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TRACK 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Measures 4 — 6 “blank, ” containing only rests. only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • An erase operation leaves the specified measures intact but blank. ■ NOTE SHIFT Shifts the pitch of notes in the specified measures of the specified track (accompaniment track not available) up or down by a maximum of two octaves, in semitone increments. Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track number, the SHIFT LCD dials to set the amount of note shift (see “NOTES” below), the TOP LCD dial to set the number of the first measure in the range in which the notes are to be shifted, and the LAST LCD dial to set the number of the last measure in the range 60 The Sequencer in which the notes are to be shifted. Once the track, shift, and measure numbers have been specified, press EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the note shift operation. “Executing.” will appear on the display while the operation is in progress, and “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the note shift operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • The range of “SHIFT” values is from -24 to +24. A setting of “0” produces no note shift. Each increment represents a semitone, so a setting of +4, for example, would shift the pitch of notes in the specified range up by an interval of a third. A setting of -12 would shift the notes down by one octave. • The ability to selectively shift the pitch of specified measures and tracks makes it simple to create “modulations” (key changes) without having to reprogram entire passages, and to create simple harmonies. ■ SONG CLEAR Deletes the entire song — i.e. deletes all data from all sequencer tracks. Use the CLEAR SONG LCD dials to select the song to be cleared (1 … 6), then press the EXECUTE LCD button to execute the song clear operation. The “Are you sure? ” confirmation prompt will appear on the display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with the clear operation, or the NO LCD button to cancel. “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. NOTES • Remember that this function deletes all data from the specified song in one operation. If you think you might want to keep the data for later use or editing, be sure to save it to floppy disk (page 91) before executing the song clear operation. • Be careful with SONG CLEAR — it has no “undo” function! • The amount of sequencer memory used by each song is shown to the right of the song numbers in kilobytes (approximate). The total amount of free sequencer memory remaining is shown in parentheses under “SONG CLEAR” on the display. 61 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer The PSR-6000 CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT feature allows you to create and store up to 24 original accompaniment styles — including rhythm, bass, and chords — in addition to the 50+1 internal preset accompaniment styles (including preset IA style “New Age”). You can even create intro, fill-in, and ending patterns that can be saved with your accompaniment styles. More custom accompaniment styles can be created and saved to floppy disk (page 91). Your original accompaniment styles can be selected and played at any time, just like the presets. Basic Programming Procedure (Normal section) Although many of the steps outlined below do not have to be carried out in the order given, the basic programming procedure presented below will serve as useful guide to get you started. Z Select a Suitable Accompaniment Style ............................................................................................................ Begin by selecting one of the preset accompaniment styles that is close to the type of accompaniment you want to create. For example, select a WALTZ accompaniment style if you want to program a rhythm pattern in 3/4 time. STYLE 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA X Engage the Custom Accompaniment Programmer ............................................................................... Press the [CUSTOM ACCOMP.] button. The CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER display will appear and the selected accompaniment style will begin playing, with accompaniment based on a C major chord. Also, the rhythm track will be set to the record mode (red REC indicator lit) and the Drum Kit voice will be selected. All other tracks containing data will be set to the PLAY mode (green PLAY indicator lit). PLAY tracks can be muted by pressing the corresponding track button (the green PLAY indicator will flash when the track is muted). 62 SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer C Select an Accompaniment Variation ...................................................................................................................... Use the [VERSE 1], [VERSE 2], [CHORUS 1], [CHORUS 2], and [SOLO] buttons to select the accompaniment variation you want to program (variations cannot be selected when a custom style is selected). Intro, fill-in, and ending patterns will be based on the selected variation. If you delete all existing data to program an accompaniment from scratch, and change the time signature (beat), the intro, fillin, and ending patterns cannot be used. VERSE 1 VERSE 2 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 SOLO NOTES • You could select a “section” — INTRO, FILL-IN, or ENDING — at this point instead of a variation. See “CREATING INTRO, FILL-IN, AND ENDING PATTERNS” on page 66. V Program the Rhythm Track ............................................................................................................................................... Since the RHYTHM track is initially set to the REC mode and the Drum Kit voice is selected automatically, you can start programming the RHYTHM track immediately. You could also select the POP DRUM KIT voice using the normal voice selection procedure, and/or set a comfortable recording tempo before you actually start recording. You can add new notes to the rhythm by playing the keys corresponding to the PSR-6000 drums and percussion instruments. The drums and percussion instruments produced are indicated by the symbols immediately above the keys (see the “Keyboard Percussion List” on page 118). Please note that pitch bend can not be applied to the rhythm instruments. If you want to create a totally new rhythm track, press the [RHYTHM] track button while holding the [DELETE] button. This cancels all the instruments in the original rhythm track, leaving only a metronome sound (the metronome sound will not be heard while the rhythm is playing). The rhythm pattern can be up to 8 measures long (see “RECORD — MEASURE/BEAT” on page 69), and the pattern will continue to repeat so you can add new instruments during each repeat, if necessary. SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 63 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ● To Cancel A Single Percussion Instrument Although you can cancel all instruments in the RHYTHM track by pressing the [RHYTHM] track button while holding the [DELETE] button, it is also possible to cancel a single instrument to eradicate a mistake or simply eliminate an unwanted instrument. While holding the CANCEL key (the highest key on the PSR-6000 keyboard), press the percussion key corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel. The selected instrument should now be cleared from the pattern. CANCEL > NOTES • The appropriate voice must be selected in order to cancel individual instruments — if you can’t cancel an instrument even after following the above procedure, select another drum voice (DRUM KIT or POP DRUM KIT) and try again. ● To Add Accents To accent specific beats after recording the rhythm, press the accent key (the second to highest key on the keyboard, with the “>” symbol) at the timing of beats you want to accent. B Program the Bass and Chord Tracks ..................................................................................................................... After the RHYTHM track has been programmed (or it can be left as it is if no changes are required), you can select a bass or chord track for programming by pressing the [BASS] or a [CHORD] track button while holding the [RECORD] button (tracks containing preset data cannot be selected for recording). You can also select the voice you want to record with using the normal voice selection procedure. The RHYTHM track will automatically switch to the PLAY mode when a new REC track is specified. Please remember that only one track can be programmed at a time. You can press the [SYNCHRO START] button to engage the synchro start ready mode if you want to start recording from the first beat of the first measure. Play notes or chords to be added to the existing data, or delete all data on the track (press the track button while holding the [DELETE] button) and start from scratch. The bass and chord tracks must be programmed in the key of C major! 64 SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 SEQUENCER / CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT PROGRAMMER SEQUENCER RECORD DELETE EDIT PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC PLAY/REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACCOMP. CHORD 2 CHORD 3 CHORD 4 CHORD 5 CHORD 6 BASS RHYTHM CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Continue selecting new record tracks, and program until your custom accompaniment is complete. NOTES • Unwanted tracks can be deleted from the accompaniment by holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the appropriate track button. • Although the bass and chord tracks must be programmed in C major, they are automatically re-harmonized when the custom accompaniment style is used in the play mode, and can be used in any key, major or minor. • When programming an accompaniment from scratch, you can select a new voice that will take effect from the beginning of the accompaniment after deleting all tracks. Other voice changes added while programming will take effect from the point at which they are made. • The synchro start, start, and stop functions can be used when recording a custom accompaniment. The re-start function, however, cannot be used. • Pitch bend, modulation, and sustain changes are not recorded if the accompaniment is stopped — the accompaniment must be running for parameter changes to be recorded. • The Custom Accompaniment Programmer memory capacity is limited. When the available memory for the track you are recording is exhausted, the “Work area full !!” display will appear and further recording on that track will be impossible unless existing data is deleted. Further, if the data size is too big when you perform a save operation, “Memory full!! Cannot store data” will appear on the display. • Only the non-percussion and non-dual preset voices in groups 1 through 10 can be used to record bass and chord parts (custom voices cannot be used). N Set a New Default Tempo .................................................................................................................................................... If necessary, set a new default tempo for the custom accompaniment style by using the TEMPO LCD dial or the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. M Give the Finished Accompaniment Style a Name and Assign it to a CUSTOM STYLE Number .................................................................................................................................................... Use the “NAME” function described on page 68 to give your custom accompaniment style an original name, then use the “STORE” function described on page 72 to assign the accompaniment style to a CUSTOM STYLE number. 65 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Creating Intro, Fill-In, & Ending Sections The custom accompaniment programmer allows you to create four sets of intro, fill-in, and ending sections that can be saved and later used with custom accompaniment styles. Programming a Preset Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section Z Select an Intro, Fill-in or Ending Section .......................................................................................................... After selecting a suitable accompaniment style and engaging the Custom Accompaniment Programmer as described in steps Z and X of the “Basic Programming Procedure” (page 62), use the SECTION LCD dials to select the INTRO, FILL IN , or ENDING section for programming. NOTES • If any edits to the NORMAL section data have been made before you do this, the “Edited data not stored!” message will appear — press the YES LCD button to store the edited data and move on to the new section, NO to ignore the edited data and go on to the new section, or CANCEL to return to the last operation. X Program the Selected Section(s) ............................................................................................................................... Program the selected section as described in steps V and B of the “Basic Programming Procedure” (page 63, 64). Select a different section and repeat as necessary. NOTES • The default tempo will be determined by the tempo set for the NORMAL section. • Names cannot be individually programmed for the intro, fill-in, or ending sections. C Assign the Programmed Sections to a Custom Accompaniment Style Group ...... Use the STORE function described on page 72 to assign the programmed section(s) to a custom style group. 66 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer V Determine Whether Your Custom Style Will Use the Preset or Original Intro/Fill/Ending ..................................................................................................................................................... Select the I/F/E SELECT page as described in Custom Accompaniment Editing” (next section) and select “USER” for the custom style numbers with which you want to use your original intro/fill/ ending sections. NOTES • If the custom intro, fill-in, and ending sections have a different time signature than the normal custom accompaniment section, then “USER” cannot be selected in the “I/F/E SELECT” screen. • To prevent differences between the time signatures of the custom intro, fill-in, and ending sections, all the sections for the selected styles are saved simultaneously when any one custom section is saved. For example, if you edit an intro section while a preset style is selected and then save the intro section, the fill-in and ending sections for the selected style will also be saved. If you then edit and save the fill-in section, the intro and ending sections will also be saved, meaning the intro section you just saved will be overwritten. To prevent this, first copy the preset style to a custom style number, and then use this as a basis for your new sections. Of course, you must be careful that you don’t overwrite a previously saved custom accompaniment style when doing this. Editing a Previously Saved User Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section To edit intro, fill-in, and ending sections that you have previously created and saved, simply select the custom accompaniment style to which the user sections are assigned and program as described above. Creating a New Intro, Fill-in, or Ending Section From Scratch After selecting an intro, fill-in, or ending section as described above, use the [DELETE] button to delete all data from all tracks. You can then program a totally new pattern “from scratch”. To create an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern with a different time signature, go to the Custom Accompaniment Programmer RECORD screen MEASURE/BEAT function (page 69) and set the BEAT parameter as required. 67 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Custom Accompaniment Editing The PSR-6000 Custom Accompaniment Programmer offers a range of functions that let you modify the recorded data in a number of ways. The Custom Accompaniment Programmer display has four main “pages” — RECORD, EDIT, STORE, and I/F/E SELECT — which are selected by using the [ ] and [ ] LCD buttons. The various functions within the selected display page are selected by using the s and t LCD buttons. The corresponding parameters are edited via the appropriate LCD dials. ■ RECORD — NAME/SECTION .......................................................................................................................................... This display includes two functions: NAME, which allows a name of up to 8 characters to be assigned to the current custom accompaniment style before it is stored; and SECTION, which allows you to select the normal, intro, fill-in, or ending section for programming (page 68 for intro, fill-in, and ending programming details). ● NAME Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. NOTES • Independent names can not be assigned to INTRO, FILL, and ENDING sections. • Preset style names which are originally longer than 8 characters will be truncated to the first 8 characters when used as the basis for custom accompaniment style programming. ● SECTION Selects the normal, intro, fill-in, or ending section for programming (see page 66 for details). 68 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ■ RECORD — MEASURE/BEAT ........................................................................................................................................ These functions allow the length (in measures) and time signature of the accompaniment to be defined. Use the MEASURE LCD dials to specify the number of measures the accompaniment is to have (from 1 to 8), and the BEAT LCD dials to specify the number of beats per measure — 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4. NOTES • These parameters can only be changed when you’re creating an entirely new pattern from scratch — i.e. you have deleted all tracks from the original accompaniment by holding the [DELETE] button and pressing the buttons of all tracks containing data so that no PLAY indicators remain lit. • All intro, fill-in and ending patterns must be clear in order to change the BEAT parameter of an intro, fill-in, or ending pattern. • FILL patterns can have a maximum length of 1 measure. ■ RECORD — TRACK VOLUME ......................................................................................................................................... Lets you independently set the volume of each of the Custom Accompaniment Programmer’s tracks. Use the LCD dials to set the volume of the corresponding tracks to a value between “0” (minimum volume — no sound) and “100” (maximum volume). In addition to the graphic controls above the respective LCD dials, vertical bar-graphs to the right of each track number in the “TRACK VOLUME” section of the display provide a graphic representation of the track volume levels. 69 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ■ RECORD — FADER ASSIGN ........................................................................................................................................... Assigns the CHD1 and CHD2 volume controls in the main play display to Custom Accompaniment Programmer CHORD tracks 1 through 6, determining which control affects which chord tracks when the accompaniment is played back. Use the CHD1 through CHD6 LCD dials to assign the corresponding Custom Accompaniment Programmer track to the main play display CHD1 or CHD2 control. NOTES • It is a good idea to group the chord tracks according to their musical function. For example, tracks containing basic block chords could be assigned to the CHD1 control while tracks containing more “decorative” chord work could be assigned to the CHD2 control. ■ EDIT — QUANTIZE ..................................................................................................................................................................... Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat. Use the TRACK LCD dials to select the track you want to quantize, and the SIZE LCD dials to specify the quantize size. Once the track number and quantize size have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the quantize operation. “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the quantize operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. The Quantize Sizes are: 1/4 = 1/6 = 1/8 = 1/12 = 1/16 = 1/24 = 1/32 = 70 3 3 3 1/4 note 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note 1/16 note triplet 1/32 note The Custom Accompaniment Programmer NOTES • Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical feel. Always use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the shortest notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th note beats, thus ruining the track. One measure of 8th notes before quantization q e e q e e After quantization q e e q e e • Tracks displayed in small characters (preset) or marked with an asterisk (* — no data) cannot be selected for quantization. ■ EDIT — COPY .................................................................................................................................................................................. Copies a specified measure or range of measures to a different location within the same track. Use the TRACK LCD dials to specify the track number, the TOP LCD dial to specify the number of the first measure of the range to be copied, the LAST LCD dial to specify the number of last measure of the range to be copied, and the DEST. LCD dial to specify the number of the measure to which the data is to be copied. Once the track numbers and measure numbers have been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually execute the copy operation. “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the copy operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • A copy operation overwrites the data from the beginning of the specified destination measure with the data from the source measure(s). Previous data in the overwritten measures is therefore lost. • The COPY function cannot be used with tracks containing preset data. Copy measures 1 through 2 to measure 5 in the same track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 7 8 71 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer ■ EDIT — REMOVE EVENT .................................................................................................................................................... Removes all occurrences of the specified event type (pitch bend, modulation wheel, volume, or sustain operations) from the specified track. Use the TRACK LCD dials to set the track number and the EVENT LCD dials to set type of event to be removed. Once the track and event type have been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button on the right side of the display to actually execute the remove event operation. “Completed.” will appear briefly when the operation has finished. Immediately after execution an “UNDO” LCD button will appear on the left side of the display, and that button can be used to undo the remove event operation if it was executed by mistake. The undo function is only available until the next operation is performed. NOTES • This function is handy if, for example, you’ve played some wild pitch bends that don’t sound right. You can remove only the offending pitch bends without erasing the entire track. • Only the VOLUME event type can be selected when the RHYTHM tracks is selected. • Be careful when removing effect on/off events. If, for example, you remove a pitch bend off event in a specified measure, the pitch bend applied in a previous measure will remain in effect until the next pitch bend event is encountered. ■ • Tracks displayed in small characters (preset) or marked with an asterisk (* — no data) cannot be selected for event removal. STORE ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... This function stores the current custom accompaniment to a specified custom accompaniment style number. Any of the LCD dials can be used to determine to which custom style number the accompaniment will be stored. When saving a normal section, you can select any of the 24 available custom style memory locations: A1 through A12 and B1 through B12. When storing an intro, fill-in, or ending, you can select one of four custom style groups: 1 (A1 … A6), 2 (A7 … A12), 3 (B1 … B6), or 4 (B7 … B12). When the custom style number or group has been selected, press STORE LCD button to store the current custom accompaniment to the specified custom accompaniment style number. The “Are 72 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer you sure? ” confirmation prompt will appear on the display: press the YES LCD button to go ahead with the store operation, or the NO LCD button to cancel. “Completed.” will appear when the operation is complete. NOTES • ■ If during editing you change styles, variations, or sections, the “Edited data not stored ! Store it in memory?” message will appear. Press the YES LCD button to store the data, the NO LCD button to exit, or the CANCEL LCD button to return to the last operation. I/F/E Select .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Determines whether the preset, user-programmed, or no intro, fill-in, and ending sections will be used with each custom accompaniment style. Use the STYLE NUMBER LCD dials to select a custom style number, then the I/F/E SELECT LCD dials to assign either the PRESET or USER intro, fill-in, and ending sections to that style number. Select NO ASSIGN if you want no intro, fill-in, or ending section to be used (see “NOTES” below). NOTES • If you select “PRESET”, then the un-edited intro, fill-in and ending sections of the original preset style will be used with the selected custom style. If you select “NO ASSIGN”, then no intro, fill-in, or ending sections will be used. In this case the [INTRO] button functions in the same way as the [START] button, the [ENDING] button functions in the same way as the [STOP] button, and the [FILL IN] button has no effect. 73 The Custom Accompaniment Programmer Exiting From the Custom Accompaniment Programmer To exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer mode, press either the [CUSTOM ACCOMP.] or [EXIT] button. This will return you to the normal play mode. If you do this after editing any custom accompaniment data and you haven’t already used the STORE function to save the edited data to a custom accompaniment number, the following display will appear: EXIT SEQUENCER Press the YES LCD button if you want to store the accompaniment — you will automatically be taken to the STORE function display described on page 72. Press the NO LCD button if you want to exit from the Custom Accompaniment Programmer without storing the data, or the CANCEL LCD button to cancel the store operation and return to the Custom Accompaniment Programmer if you want to make a few more changes or additions to the accompaniment before storing. PLAY/REC 1 CUSTOM ACCOMP. CHORD 1 PLAY/ 2 CHOR Selecting & Using a Custom Accompaniment Style Once created and stored, your original accompaniment style can be selected and used in the same way as the preset accompaniment styles. Press the [CUSTOM A] or [CUSTOM B] button and then the appropriate STYLE select button (1 … 12) to select a custom accompaniment style. The selected custom accompaniment style can then be operated just like any of the preset accompaniment styles — it can be started and stopped as usual, and can be used in the FINGERED or SINGLE FINGER AUTO BASS CHORD modes. NOTES • Interactive Accompaniment cannot be used with custom accompaniment styles. • The [VERSE 1], [VERSE 2], [CHORUS 1], [CHORUS 2] and [SOLO] buttons cannot be used with custom styles. 74 STYLE 1 DANCE 7 LATIN PRESET 2 ROCK’N’ ROLL 8 LATIN POP USER SET 3 ROCK 9 WALTZ CUSTOM A 4 POP 10 COUNTRY CUSTOM B 5 BALLAD 11 TRADITIONAL 6 JAZZ 12 FOR DISK IA The PSR-6000 “Functions” The PSR-6000 [FUNCTION] button selects 8 groups of functions that access a number of related parameters. Here’s a list of the functions and the manual page numbers on which they are described in detail. [F1] CUSTOM VOICE EDIT ................................................................... 77 [F2] REVERB/EFFECT .......................................................................... 84 [F3] CONTROLLER ............................................................................... 86 [F4] ONE TOUCH SETTING/IA .............................................................. 89 [F5] HARMONY TYPE ........................................................................... 90 [F6] DISK ................................................................................................ 94 [F7] UTILITY .........................................................................................100 [F8] MIDI ...............................................................................................102 General Function Selection & Editing Procedure Press the [FUNCTION] button to engage the function mode. CONTRAST FUNCTION HELP/ LANGUAGE EXIT Each of the function groups is selected by pressing the corresponding LCD button. In some cases all of the parameters included in a function group will be available in a single display “page”, and the various parameters can be accessed via the ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons — as in the F3: CONTROLLER display, below. 75 The PSR-6000 “Functions” In cases where the number of parameters included in the function group is too large to fit on a single display page, several pages may be available, selectable via the and LCD buttons — as in the F8: MIDI display shown to the right. In all cases the selected parameter can be edited via the appropriated labelled or positioned LCD dial(s). ■ The [EXIT] Button ....................................................................................................................................................................... The [EXIT] button can be used at any time to exit from a function and return to the normal play mode. NOTES • Some functions cannot be selected in the Sequencer, Custom Accompaniment Programmer, or DOC/GM mode. • You can return to the main function display from any other function display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button. 76 CONTRAST FUNCTION HELP/ LANGUAGE EXIT F1: Custom Voice Edit The Custom Voice Edit mode allows you to edit any of the PSR-6000 voices to create new sounds that ideally match your own music style. 128 custom voices can be programmed, each based on the corresponding preset voice. After selecting the voice you want to edit (see “NOTES” below), engage the Custom Voice Edit mode by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then the F1 CUSTOM VOICE EDIT LCD button. Use the various editing functions described below to modify the sound to suit your needs. Then press the [EXIT] button when you’re finished editing to return to the normal play mode. Your custom voices can be selected and played by pressing the [CUSTOM VOICE] button and using the VOICE SELECT buttons in the normal way. NOTES • You can also select a different voice while the Custom Voice Edit mode is engaged via the VOICE SELECT buttons. In this case the normal custom voice selection display will appear while the VOICE SELECT buttons are being used, and for a few seconds afterwards. The display will then revert to the previous Custom Voice Edit display page. • Please note that some voices may suddenly shift to a different octave or change in level when played on the highest or lowest keys. There may also be slight tonal changes at one or more points on the keyboard. • Some settings may produce noise or no sound. Standard Voice Edit Functions (voice groups 1 through 10) The following functions are available when editing voice groups 1 through 10. Different edit functions are provided for the PSR-6000 dual voices (group 11 — DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT) and drum voices (group 12 — DRUMS). ■ NAME/CONTROL The NAME/CONTROL page includes the NAME function via which you can give your custom voice an original name, and the TOUCH SENSITIVITY and PITCH BEND parameters which define the operation of the two most fundamental keyboard control features. ● NAME The NAME function allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the voice. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects 77 F1: Custom Voice Edit numbers and special characters. NOTES • It’s a good idea to give your voices names that make them easily identifiable. If you’ve created a new voice that is a variation on the standard piano voice, for example, you could call it something like “PianVar”. • Preset voice names longer than 8 characters will be truncated to 8 characters when used in custom voices. ● CONTROLLER The CONTROLLER section of the display includes two parameters that affect the entire voice. 1 TOUCH SENS. Allows the touch sensitivity of the keyboard to be set to three different levels, or turned off: “1” (OFF), “2” (SOFT) , “3” (MEDIUM), or “4” select as required. ■ COMMON The OCTAVE, PAN, MODULATION, and TONE parameters in this display page affect the entire voice. 1 OCTAVE Shifts the pitch of the voice up one octave (+1) or down one octave (-1). A setting of “0” produces the normal pitch for that voice. Use the 1 LCD dial to set as required. NOTES • Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause sudden pitch changes. 2 PAN Sets the apparent position of the voice in the stereo sound field. The graphic display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. The pan range is from “L7” (full left) through “0” (center) to “R7” (full right). Use the 2 LCD dial to set as required. 78 (HARD). Use the 1 LCD dial to select as required. 2 PITCH BEND Sets the range of the pitch bend wheel to “0” (OFF), “1” (±1 semitone), “2” (±2 semitones), “3” (±3 semitones), or “GLISSAND” (maximum 1-octave glissando in semitone steps). Use the 2 LCD dial to F1: Custom Voice Edit NOTES plus settings produce deeper or faster modulation, respectively. • When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan setting of the selected voice is used, creating a stereo effect with some voices. • Modulation is applied automatically to some voices, and in some cases operating the wheel causes modulation to be applied automatically. ● MODULATION The two parameters provided in this screen are used to adjust the depth and speed of modulation produced by the PSR-6000 MODULATION/EFFECT wheel. ● TONE The BRILLIANCE and RESONANCE parameters provided here make it possible to vary the tone of the voice over a wide range. 3 DEPTH Decreases (-) or increases (+) the depth of modulation produced by the PSR-6000 MODULATION/EFFECT wheel relative to the original modulation depth of the selected voice. Use the 3 LCD dial to set as required. 5 BRILLIANCE This parameter alters the cutoff frequency of the filter applied to the voice, thereby making the sound more or less brilliant. Minus settings reduce brilliance for a rounder, more mellow tone, while plus setting increase brilliance for a sharper tone. Use the 5 LCD dial to set as required. 4 SPEED Decreases (-) or increases (+) the speed of modulation produced by the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel relative to the original modulation speed of the selected voice. Use the 4 LCD dial to set as required. 6 RESONANCE Plus settings increase the height of a resonant peak at the filter cutoff frequency, giving the voice greater presence and sometimes a more “nasal” tone. Minus settings reduce resonance for a “flatter” sound. Use the 6 LCD dial to set as required. NOTES • The maximum range of the depth and speed is from 7 through 0 to +7, although this range is more limited with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. NOTES • The maximum range of both parameters is from -50 through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some • The default modulation depth and speed values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. Minus settings produce gentler or slower modulation, while 79 F1: Custom Voice Edit voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. • The default values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. ■ ENVELOPE The ATTACK, DECAY, RELEASE, and SUSTAIN parameters provided here let you shape the volume envelope of the voice. 1 ATTACK Sets the speed of attack — i.e. how fast the sound reaches maximum level after a key is pressed. “0” sets the normal attack for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower attack, and plus settings produce a faster attack. Use the 1 LCD dials to set as required. 2 DECAY Sets the speed of decay portion of the envelope — i.e. how fast the sound decays from the maximum attack level to its normal level. “0” sets the normal decay for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower decay, and plus settings produce a faster decay. Use the 2 LCD dials to set as required. 3 RELEASE Sets the speed of release — i.e. how fast the sound decays after a key is released when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is off and the sustain pedal is not pressed. “0” sets the normal release for the selected voice, minus settings produce a slower release decay, and plus settings produce a faster release decay. Use the 3 LCD dials to set as required. 4 SUSTAIN Sets the speed of sustain decay — i.e. how fast the sound decays after a key is released when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is on or the sustain 80 pedal is pressed. “0” sets the normal sustain for the selected voice, minus settings produce a longer sustain decay, and plus settings produce a faster sustain decay. Use the 4 LCD dials to set as required. NOTES • The maximum range for all parameters is from -50 through 0 to +50, although this range is more limited with some voices. An exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter when the maximum or minimum allowable setting for the selected voice has been reached. • The default values for the selected voice are produced by settings of “0”. • With voices like STRINGS, in which key velocity (keyboard dynamics) controls the speed of attack, attack speed changes in the same way even if the attack parameter is set to a minus value. • Since PIANO 1 and some other voices already have the F1: Custom Voice Edit Dual Voice Edit Functions (voice group 11) fastest possible attack, no sound will be produced if the Decay parameter for such voices is set to “+50.” • The Decay parameter will have no effect on some sustain-type voices which have no inherent decay. • Changing the envelope parameter setting may have no effect on the sound with some voices. The following functions are available when editing the group 11 voices (DUAL VOICE/SOUND EFFECT). Different edit functions are provided for the PSR-6000 normal voices (groups 1 through 10 — page 77) and drum voices (group 12 — page 83). ■ NAME/VOICE This display page includes the NAME and VOICE functions, letting you assign an original name to your custom dual voice and specify the voices to be used. ● NAME The NAME function allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom dual voice. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. NOTES • Give your dual voice names that identify both the voices used, if possible. If you’ve created a new dual voice that combines piano and organ, for example, you could call it something like “PianOrg”. • Preset voice names longer than 8 characters will be truncated to 8 characters when used in custom voices. ● VOICE This function allows any two of the PSR-6000’s preset and custom voices (groups 1 through 10) to be assigned to the dual voice. 81 F1: Custom Voice Edit Use the GRP. 1 and GRP. 2 LCD dials to select the desired voice groups, and the 1 # and 2 # LCD dials to select the desired voices. NOTES • The pitch bend range for DUAL VOICE is limited to ±1 whole tone. ■ OCT/PAN/VOL./DETUNE In this display screen all parameters have dual settings, one for each of the voices used in the custom dual voice. ● OCTAVE Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be independently shifted up or down one octave. Use the 1 LCD dial to set the octave of the “A” voice, and the 2 LCD dial to set the octave of the “B” voice. NOTES • Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also cause sudden pitch changes. • “0” is the normal setting. ● PAN Independently sets the pan positions of the two voices used in the dual voice. Use the 3 LCD dial to set the pan position of the “A” voice, and the 4 LCD dial to set the pan position of the “B” voice. The graphic displays indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. NOTES • When Pan is set to the center position, the preset pan setting of the selected voice is used, creating a stereo effect with some voices. ● VOLUME Independently adjusts the volumes of the two voices used in the dual voice. Use the 5 LCD dial to set the volume of the “A” 82 voice, and the 6 LCD dial to set the volume of the “B” voice. NOTES • The volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “100” (maximum volume). Use this function to set the optimum balance between the two voices. • When the parameter is set to “0” or “100” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. ● DETUNE Allows the two voices used in the dual voice to be detuned slightly to create a thicker sound. Use the 7 LCD dial to detune the “A” voice, and the 8 LCD dial to detune the “B” voice. A setting of “0” produces the normal pitch of the voice, while positive (+) settings raise the pitch and negative (-) settings lower the pitch of the voice. NOTES • The normal tune value is “0”. This can be tuned down to a maximum setting of -50 or up to a maximum setting of +50. Each increment equals approximately 0.78 cents (a cent is one hundredth of a semitone). The maximum amount of detune that can be set in either direction is therefore 39 cents F1: Custom Voice Edit Drum Voice Edit Functions (Voice group 12) — not quite a quarter tone. • This function can be used by leaving one of the voices set at “0” and detuning the other until the desired effect is achieved. Another approach is to tune one voice down and the other up. • The pitch bend range is always ±200 cents, regardless of the setting of this function. • When the parameter is set to “-50” or “+50” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. The following functions are available when editing the drum voices in group 12. Different edit functions are provided for the PSR-6000 normal voices (groups 1 through 10 — page 77) and dual voices (group 11 — page 81). ■ NAME/PAN/PITCH/SOFTNESS All parameters available for drum voice editing are provided in a signle display screen. ● NAME Allows an 8-character name to be assigned to the custom drum voice. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. NOTES • Give your drum voice names that identify their character. If you’ve created a new drum voice intended for rock music, for example, you could call it something like “RockDrum”. NOTES • Use this function to create the required “stereo image” for your drum voice. View in the drum kit from the audience side, for example, the bass drum is normally in the center, the snare to its right, the tom-toms to the left, and so on. ● PITCH Allows the pitch of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually tuned. Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument you want to edit (an alternative method is to press the key on the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the desired instrument). Then use the 2 LCD dial to set the pitch as required. NOTES ● PAN Allows the pan position of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually adjusted. Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument you want to edit (an alternative method is to press the key on the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the desired instrument). Then use the 1 LCD dial to set the pan position. The pan range is from “L7” (full left) through “C” (center) to “R7” (full right). The graphic PAN display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and right speakers. • The maximum tuning range is from -50 through 0 to +50, with “0” being the normal pitch for the instrument. Each increment equals approximately 6.25 cents (a cent is one hundredth of a semitone), for a total tuning range of about ±312 cents. • When the parameter is set to “-50” or “+50” an exclamation mark (!) will appear next to the parameter indicating that the limit has been reached. ● SOFTNESS Allows the tone (softness) of each instrument in the drum voice to be individually adjusted. Use the 4 LCD dial to select the drum instrument you want to edit (an alternative method is to press the key on the PSR-6000 keyboard corresponding to the desired 83 F2: Reverb/Effect The PSR-6000 has 23 reverb-based effects and 9 other effects that can be selected via the REVERB/EFFECT function display. The selected reverb and effect types are applied to the sound when the [EFFECT] and [REVERB] buttons are used (see page 31). ■ REVERB TYPE & DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................... ● REVERB TYPE Selects the reverb effect to be applied when the [REVERB] button is turned on (page 31). If the REVERB TYPE parameters are not showing on the lower section of the display, press the TYPE LCD button. Use the GROUP LCD dials to select a reverb group, and the TYPE LCD dials to select the desired reverb effect. The Reverb Effects No. Group 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Reverb 1 Reverb 1 Reverb 1 Reverb 2 Reverb 2 Reverb 2 Reverb 3 Reverb 3 Delay 1 Delay 1 Delay 1 Delay 2 Type No. Group Hall Room Plate Church Club Stage Bathroom Metal 13. TempoSync. Short 14. TempoSync. Long Short Medium Long OneShot Type 15. Echo 16. Echo Stereo PingPong 17. Refl.&Gate 18. Refl.&Gate 19. Refl.&Gate Panned Early Gate 20. Delay&Rev 21. Delay&Rev Single Dly. L/R • The “TempoSync” effects produce a delay that is synchronized to the currently selected tempo. “Variation : Distort.” produces a distortion effect. 22. Variation 23. Variation Distort. Tunnel • Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do to your sound. ● REVERB DEPTH Independently sets the depth of the selected reverb effect for the rhythm, bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound. If the REVERB DEPTH parameters are not showing on the lower section of the display, press the DEPTH LCD button. Use the RHY, BASS, CHD2, CHD1, ORC2, and ORC1 LCD dials to set the depth of the reverb effect as required for the corresponding orchestra parts. NOTES • Reverb depth can be adjusted in 8 steps (0 … 7), represented by a vertical bar to the right of each DEPTH parameter in the upper section of the display. The longer the bar, the greater the reverb depth. • If the depth setting is changed while a note is being played, the new depth setting will take effect from the next note played. 84 NOTES F2: Reverb/Effect ■ EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH ...................................................................................................................................................... ● EFFECT TYPE Selects the effect to be applied when the [EFFECT] button is turned on (page 31). If the EFFECT TYPE parameters are not showing on the lower section of the display, press the TYPE LCD button. Use the GROUP LCD dials to select an effect group, and the TYPE LCD dials to select the desired effect. The Effects No. Group Type 1. 2. 3. Tremolo Tremolo Tremolo 1 2 3 4. 5. Chorus Chorus 1 2 6. 7. Flange Flange 1 2 8. 9. Symphonic Symphonic 1 2 NOTES • Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do to your sound. ● EFFECT DEPTH Independently sets the depth of the selected effect for the bass, chord 1, chord 2, orchestra 1, and orchestra 2 sound. If the EFFECT DEPTH parameters are not showing on the lower section of the display, press the DEPTH LCD button. Use the BASS, CHD2, CHD1, ORC2, and ORC1 LCD dials to set the depth of the effect as required for the corresponding orchestra parts. NOTES • Effect depth can be adjusted in 8 steps (0 … 7), represented by a vertical bar to the right of each parameter. The longer the bar, the greater the effect depth. • If the depth setting is changed while a note is being played, the new depth setting will take effect from the next note played. 85 F3: Controller The [F3] function group includes four functions that affect how the PSR-6000 responds to control via the keyboard, a foot controller plugged into the rear-panel FOOT CONTROLLER jack, the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel, the [SUSTAIN] button and SUSTAIN footswitch, the PITCH BEND wheel, and a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack. ■ FOOT CONTROLLER ............................................................................................................................................................... Determines whether a foot controller plugged into the rear-panel FOOT CONTROLLER jack will control master volume, the volume of an individual orchestra part (rhythm, ABC, etc.), or the depth of the selected effect. Use the TYPE LCD dials to select MASTER VOLUME for master volume control, INDIVIDUAL VOLUME for individual part volume control, or EFFECT for effect depth control. Individual part assignment parameters for the RHY, ABC, ORC2 and ORC1 parts will appear when the INDIVIDUAL type is selected. Use the corresponding LCD dials to turn volume control for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required. NOTES • Normally you’ll want to be able to apply expression control to the orchestra voices without affecting the accompaniment and rhythm sound, so the INDIVIDUAL type should be selected and the ORC1 and/or ORC2 part turned on while the remaining parts are turned off. • The EFFECT setting only applies when the panel [EFFECT] button is turned ON. ■ MODULATION/EFFECT WHEEL ................................................................................................................................... Determines whether the MODULATION/EFFECT wheel will control modulation or the selected effect (page 32), and whether it will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. Use the TYPE LCD dials to select either MODULATION or EFFECT operation. If MODULATION is selected the ORC2 and ORC1 assignment parameters will appear: use the corresponding LCD dials to turn modulation wheel operation ON or OFF for the ORC2 and ORC1 parts, as required. 86 F3: Controller NOTES • This function can be used to apply modulation or the selected effect to just one of the voices being played in the split mode (ORCH. 2v1) to emphasize that voice and provide greater contrast with the other voice. • When EFFECT operation is selected, the wheel will function only when the panel [EFFECT] button is turned on. • If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected, no modulation is applied to the ORCH. 2 voice. ■ SUSTAIN PEDAL & PITCH BEND WHEEL ......................................................................................................... ● SUSTAIN PEDAL Determines whether the PSR-6000 sustain effect is to be applied to the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. Use the SUSTAIN PEDAL ORC2 LCD dial to turn sustain on or off for the orchestra 2 voice, and the SUSTAIN PEDAL ORC1 LCD dial to turn sustain on or off for the orchestra 1 voice. NOTES • The sustain effect is applied to the specified orchestra part(s) only when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is turned on or when the sustain pedal is pressed. ● PITCH BEND WHEEL Determines whether the PITCH BEND wheel will affect the orchestra 1 voice, the orchestra 2 voice, or both orchestra voices. Use the PITCH BEND WHEEL ORC2 LCD dial to turn pitch bend on or off for the orchestra 2 voice, and the PITCH BEND WHEEL ORC1 LCD dial to turn pitch bend on or off for the orchestra 1 voice. NOTES • If, for example, you’re using the split mode (ORCH. 2v1) with a bass voice on the left and a sax voice on the right, you’ll want pitch bend to apply only to the right-hand sax voice. In this case simply turn orchestra 1 pitch bend on and orchestra 2 pitch bend off. • If AUTO BASS CHORD is on and the ORCH. 2v1 orchestration mode is selected, no pitch bend is applied to the ORCH. 2 voice. 87 F3: Controller ■ FOOT SWITCH ................................................................................................................................................................................ Determines the function of a footswitch plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack. Use the TYPE LCD dials to select one of the following footswitch functions: NOTES • When the Foot Switch function is set to REGISTRATION+ and a different panel registration memory is recalled either via the panel controls or the footswitch, the Foot Switch setting will not change even if a different setting is included in the recalled panel registration memory (i.e. Foot Switch remains set to REGISTRATION+). 88 START/STOP Same as panel [START] and [STOP] buttons. GLIDE Lower orchestra 1 sound by a semitone while footswitch pressed. ROTARY SPEAKER The footswitch varies the speed of the tremolo effect each time it is pressed: slow m medium m fast m slow, and so on. When ROTARY SPEAKER is selected the panel [EFFECT] button automatically lights, the effect type is set to Tremolo1, and the ORCH.1 and ORCH.2 effect depth are set to maximum, while all other depth parameters are set to “0”. If a different effect is selected via the F2: REVERB/EFFECT display after the ROTARY SPEAKER setting has been selected, the foot switch can be used to change the depth of the selected effect in three stages. HARMONY Harmony occurs only while footswitch pressed. REGISTRATION + Recall next (increment) panel registration. START/RE-START Same as panel [START/RE-START] button. INTRO1/FILL Same as panel [INTRO 1/FILL IN] button. INTRO2/FILL Same as panel [INTRO 2/FILL IN] button. INTRO3/ENDING/rit Same as panel [INTRO 3/ENDING/rit.] button. TAP TEMPO Same as PAD Tap Start function. PERCUSSION 1 Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the DRUM KIT voice. Use the PERCUSSION LCD dials to specify the percussion instrument to be played when the footswitch is pressed. PERCUSSION 2 Footswitch plays a percussion instrument from the POP DRUM KIT voice. Use the PERCUSSION LCD dials to specify the percussion instrument to be played when the footswitch is pressed. PUNCH IN/OUT Sets punch-in and punch-out points when sequencer record mode set to “Punch.” EFFECT Same as panel [EFFECT] button. TENSION Modifies dominant 7th chords in the accompaniment to produce a more consistent sound when playing in a minor key. Also automatically re-harmonizes non-scale tones on chords other than the tonic and 7th. F4: One Touch Setting/IA ■ ONE TOUCH SETTING SYNCHRO CHANGE .................................................................................................. Determines whether One Touch Setting variation switching will occur at the same time as accompaniment style and verse-to-chorus switching. When ON, selecting a different accompaniment style or switching between the VERSE and CHORUS variations while ONE TOUCH SETTING is engaged will cause the ONE TOUCH SETTING settings for that style or variation to be selected automatically. Also, if you change a ONE TOUCH SETTING setting the corresponding ONE TOUCH SETTING indicator will flash to indicate that a change has been made. When OFF no change occurs in the ONE TOUCH SETTING settings when a different style or VERSE/CHORUS variation is selected. Use the 1 LCD dials to turn the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter ON or OFF. ■ NOTES • Turning this function on can provide greater contrast between the chorus and verse variations when using the Accompaniment feature. • When the SYNCHRO CHANGE parameter is OFF, the current ONE TOUCH SETTING indicator will go out if any of the settings it includes is changed. • The default setting is “OFF”. INTERACTIVE ACCOMPANIMENT. .. The parameters in this section of the display select one of two available Interactive Accompaniment modes, turn the AUTO SOLO function on or off, determine the keyboard part on which Interactive Accompaniment will be based, and set the sensitivity of the Interactive Accompaniment function. MODE Use the 2 LCD dial to select the MUTE or ADVANCED MODE. • When the MUTE Interactive Accompaniment mode is selected, accompaniment parts that may interfere with what is played on the keyboard are automatically lowered in volume when the keyboard is being played. When the ADVANCED mode is selected, the above function is combined with automatic muting of interfering parts and automatic switching between VERSE 1 and VERSE 2 or between CHORUS 1 and CHORUS 2 in response to keyboard activity. The default Mode setting is ADVANCED. AUTO SOLO Use the 3 LCD dial to turn AUTO SOLO ON or OFF. • When the AUTO SOLO function is turned ON, the solo accompaniment variations will automatically be activated if nothing is played on the keyboard for a few measures (the actual number of measures depends on the selected style). Further, the solo variations will automatically be de-activated at the end of the current phrase after keyboard performance is resumed. No automatic solo switching occurs when the AUTO SOLO function is turned OFF. The default AutoSolo setting is ON. PART Use the 4 LCD dial to select the keyboard part(s) on which Interactive Accompaniment is to be based. • When the PART parameter is set to R+L, the Interactive Accompaniment system responds to activity (i.e. anything you play) on the entire keyboard. When set to RIGHT only activity on the right-hand section of the keyboard is detected, and when set to LEFT only activity on the left-hand section of the keyboard is detected. The default PART setting is RIGHT. SENSITIVITY Use the 5 LCD dial to set the desired Interactive Accompaniment sensitivity. • The sensitivity range is from 1 to 8. 8 is the highest sensitivity. In this case “sensitivity” refers to how much activity the Interactive Accompaniment system must detect in the specified section(s) of the keyboard before a change in the accompaniment occurs. The default Sensitivity setting is 4. 89 F5: Harmony Type Selects the type of harmony to be applied when the [HARMONY] button is turned on (page 31). There are four groups of harmony types — BASIC, POP, JAZZ, and CLASSIC — which can be selected either by using the GROUP LCD dials or by pressing the corresponding LCD buttons (the LCD buttons beside the arrows corresponding to the title of each group on the display). Once the group containing the desired harmony type has been selected, use the TYPE LCD dials to select the harmony type (you can actually use the TYPE LCD dials to scroll through all type in all groups, without first selecting a group). The Harmony Types No. 90 Group Type 1. 2. 3. Basic Basic Basic Duet Trio 4 Part 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Pop Pop Pop Pop Pop Pop Octave Pop Riff Strings 1 Strings 2 Synth Ensemble Add Vocal 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Jazz Jazz Jazz Jazz Jazz Jazz 4 way Close 4 way Open Vib. Ensemble Sax Ensemble Wind Ensemble Guitar 16. Classic Strings F6: Disk Although the F6: DISK function accesses a range of important disk operations, the most commonly used disk functions — save to disk and load from disk — can also be directly accessed via the [TO DISK] and [FROM DISK] buttons, as described below. Please note that no other PSR-6000 functions will operate while a disk function is in progress. NOTES • For any disk operation an appropriate floppy disk must first be properly inserted into the PSR-6000 disk drive. The PSR-6000 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks. Make sure the disk write protect tab is set to the “write enable” position if you intend to save any data to the disk, and insert the disk with the sliding disk cover facing the disk drive and the disk label facing upward. Before a new disk can be used to save data, it must be formatted using the “FORMAT DISK” function described on page 98. ■ The [TO DISK] Button ............................................................................................................................................................. Press this button when you want to save the current contents of the PSR-6000 memory (see list below) to floppy disk for later re-loading and use. The display shown to the right will appear: DISK IN USE RB EFFECT FROM DISK TO DISK Use any of the LCD dials to select the file to which you want to save the data. The file list at the bottom of the display includes all files which currently exist on the disk and one “NEW” file (named “N-FILE”). Select an existing file if you want to overwrite the file with the new data, or select the “NEW” file if you want to create a new file. With the exception of the “NEW” file, the size of each file will appear to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). If you want to give a new file an original filename or change the name of an existing file prior to saving it to disk, press the NAME LCD button to go to the name display. 91 F6: Disk File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use the < > LCD dial buttons to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. When the file and, if necessary, the file name has been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the save operation — the “Are you sure?” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the save operation press the YES LCD button (or press NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the data is being saved, and the progress of the save operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. You can go back to the file list by pressing the LIST LCD button. The data saved to disk is as follows: • Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/ GM Chain list data). • Disk style data. • Custom voice data. • Custom style data. • Panel registration data. • One touch setting data. • Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion assignments). • Sequencer song data. If you insert a disk that has not been formatted into the drive, the display shown to the right will appear when the [TO DISK] button is pressed: Press the YES LCD button to format the disk (see “FORMAT DISK” on page 98). NOTES • If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the new file name will be canceled. • See page 111 for a list of error messages that may appear during disk save. • The PSR-6000 identifies and handles disk files by number rather than the file name. If you save to a file number that already contains data, the original data will be erased and replaced by the new data. 92 F6: Disk ■ The [FROM DISK] Button .................................................................................................................................................... Press this button when you want to re-load a previously saved file from floppy disk. The data loaded is the same as that saved by the TO DISK operation described above. When the [FROM DISK] button is pressed one of the displays shown to the right will appear, depending on the type of disk currently in the drive: DISK IN USE RB EFFECT FROM DISK TO DISK If normal data is to be loaded, simply use any of the LCD dials to select the file you want to load. The size of each file in the file list will appear to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). If a style disk is loaded the style data disk display will appear. In this case use the left LCD dials to select either I/ A SET or CUSTOM STYLE data, then use the right LCD dials to select the style or style group (A1— A6, A7—A12, B1—B6, or B7—B12). When the file has been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the load operation — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the load operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the data is being loaded, and the progress of the load operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. NOTES • The [FROM DISK] button allows all data in a file to be loaded at once. To load individual data groups use the FROM DISK function described on page 94. • See page 111 for a list of error messages that may appear during a disk load operation. 93 F6: Disk ■ The F6: DISK Functions ....................................................................................................................................................... The F6: DISK function accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data. If you select the F6: DISK when no disk is present in the drive, the “Disk not found. Please insert disk. ” message will appear on the display. ● 1 FROM DISK Loads the specified file from a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-6000 disk drive. If the FILE LIST display shown above is not showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it. Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file to load. The name of the selected file is displayed to the right of the file number, and the size of the file appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). If you want to select a specific type of data to load, press the CONTENTS LCD button. The LCD dials can now be used to select only one type of data to be loaded from the selected file (or “ALL DATA ” to load all of the data types). Some selections provide extra choices, listed in the chart below. Press the LIST LCD button when you want to go back to the FILE LIST display. When the file and other parameters have been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the load operation — the “Are you sure?” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the load operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the data is being loaded, and the progress of the load operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. 94 F6: Disk The following data types can be selected for loading: ALL DATA All of the below. SET UP Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/GM Chain list data). DISK STYLE Disk Style data saved via a TO SAVE operation. CUSTOM VOICE Custom voice data. CUSTOM STYLE Custom style data. Press the GROUP LCD button to go to the group display. Use the left LCD dials to select the group to be loaded from disk, then the right LCD dials to select the custom accompaniment group to which the data is to be loaded. Press the CONTENTS LCD button to go back to the contents screen or the LIST LCD button to go back to the file list. PANEL REGIST Panel registration data. ONE TOUCH S. One touch setting data. PAD DATA Multi, Tempo, and Percussion pad assignment data. SEQUENCER Sequencer song data. Press the INDIVIDUAL LCD button to go to the individual song select display. Use the left LCD dials to select the song to be loaded from disk, then the right LCD dials to select the song number to which the data is to be loaded. Press the CONTENTS LCD button to go back to the contents screen or the LIST LCD button to go back to the file list. NOTES • See page 28 for instructions on loading data from an optional Style Disk by using the FROM DISK function. ● 2 TO DISK Saves the data listed below to a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-6000 disk drive. If the FILE LIST display shown above is not showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it. Use any of the LCD dials to select the file to which you want to save the data. The file list at the bottom of the display includes all files which currently exist on the disk and one “NEW” file (named “N-FILE”). Select an existing file if you want to overwrite the file with the new data, or select the “NEW” file if you want to create a new file. With the exception of the “NEW” file, the size of each file will appear to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). If you want to give a new file an original filename or change the name of an existing file prior to saving it to disk, press the NAME LCD button to go to the name display. 95 F6: Disk File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. When the file and, if necessary, the file name has been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the save operation — the “Are you sure?” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the save operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the data is being saved, and the progress of the save operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. You can go back to the file list by pressing the LIST LCD button. The data saved to disk is as follows: • Instrument setup (condition) data (including DOC/GM Chain list data). • Disk style data. • Custom voice data. • Custom style data. • Panel registration data. • One touch setting data. • Pad assignment data (Multi, Tempo, and Percussion assignments). • Sequencer song data. NOTES • If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the new file name will be canceled. • All data is saved in one operation. Specific data types can not be saved individually. • See page 111 for a list of error messages that may appear during disk save. • The PSR-6000 identifies and handles disk files by number rather than the file name. If you save to a file number that already contains data, the original data will be erased and replaced by the new data. 96 F6: Disk ● 3 RENAME FILE Allows the name of the specified file to be changed as required. If the FILE LIST display shown above is not showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it. Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file you want to rename. The name of the selected file is displayed to the right of the file number, and the size of the file appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). Press the NAME LCD button to go to the name display. File names can be up to 8 characters long. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z or 0~9.. LCD dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters and the 0~9.. LCD dial selects numbers and special characters. When the file and file name have been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the rename operation — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the rename operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the file is being renamed. You can go back to the file list by pressing the LIST LCD button. NOTES • If you press the LIST LCD button to switch displays after entering a file name and pressing the EXECUTE LCD button, but before actually saving the name, the new file name will be canceled. • This function lets you change the name of a file without having to re-load and then re-save the entire file with a new name. • Since the PSR-6000 uses the file number rather than the file name to recognize and manage data files, a file saved with the same number as another file will overwrite that file even if it has a different name. 97 F6: Disk ● 4 DELETE FILE Deletes the specified file from the disk. Use the any of the LCD dials to select the file you want to delete. The name of the selected file is displayed to the right of the file number, and the size of the file appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate). When the file has been specified, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the delete operation — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the delete operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the file is being deleted. NOTES • Files deleted from disk can not be restored (there is no “Undo” function), so be sure you’ve selected the right file before actually executing the delete operation. ● 5 FORMAT DISK Formats a floppy disk for use with the PSR6000. After inserting a new floppy disk into the disk drive, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin the format operation — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. 98 F6: Disk If you want to execute the format operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Do not remove disk! ” will appear while the disk is being formatted, and the progress of the format operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. NOTES • The PSR-6000 uses only 3.5" 2DD type floppy disks. • Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk, so be sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! ● 6 DISK FREE AREA Displays the remaining data capacity of the loaded disk in approximate percent and kilobytes. NOTES • This is a display-only function with no editable parameters. 99 F7: Utility The F7: UTILITY function accesses utility functions that let you turn memory backup on or off, select the Panel Registration freeze function mode, and recall the factory preset data. ■ MEMORY BACKUP & REGISTRATION FREEZE ● MEMORY BACKUP This function turns memory backup on or off. Use the MEMORY BACK UP LCD dials to turn memory backup ON or OFF. Data Backed Up When MEMORY BACKUP is ON • Sequencer Song Data • Custom Style Data • Custom Voice Data • Disk Style Data • Panel Registration Memory Data • Multi Pad Data • Tempo Change Data • Percussion Pad Data • One Touch Setting Data • Voice Part Select • Orchestration • Orchestra 1 Voice • Orchestra 2 Voice • Orchestra 1 Octave • Orchestra 2 Octave • Mixer Display Volume (ORCH1, ORCH2, CHD1, CHD2, BASS, RHY) • Harmony On/Off • Harmony Type • Style • ABC On/Off • ABC Mode • Manual Bass Voice • Transpose Data • Tune • IA On/Off • Accompaniment Variation • Multi Pad Select • Pad Synchro, Break, Repeat, On/Off • Left Hold On/Off • Key Velocity On/Off • Foot Switch Assign Data • Foot Switch Percussion • Foot Controller Assign Data • Sustain On/Off • Sustain Part Select • Pitch Bend Select • Wheel On/Off • Wheel Type • Split Point • IA Mode • Auto Solo On/Off • IA Sensitivity • IA Part • One Touch Setting Mode • Reverb On/Off • Reverb Type & Depth • Effect On/Off • Effect Type & Depth • Memory Backup On/Off • MIDI Transmit Ch • MIDI Receive Ch • MIDI Split Send Ch • MIDI Rhythm Receive Ch • MIDI Sequencer Ch • MIDI Multi Part Ch • MIDI Multi Part Volume • MIDI Multi Part Voice • MIDI Switch (Control Change, Pitch Bend, Program Change, System Exclusive) • MIDI Clock • MIDI Local On/Off • MIDI Transpose Add Note • MIDI Split Send On/Off, Enable • DOC/GM Chain list data * The above data will be retained in memory for about one week even if the power is not turned on. To retain the backed up data for longer periods, turn the power switch ON for a few minutes at least once a week. * The default setting for this parameter is “OFF”. 100 F7: Utility Data Backed Up At All Times (MEMORY BACKUP ON or OFF) • Sequencer Song Data • Custom Style Data • Custom Voice Data • Disk Style Data • Panel Registration Memory Data • Multi Pad Data • Tempo Change Data • Percussion Pad Data • One Touch Setting Data NOTES • The data backed up (retained in memory even when the power is turned off) by the PSR-6000 are listed above. When memory backup is turned OFF, the initial factory settings are automatically recalled whenever the power is turned on. ● REGISTRATION FREEZE Determines whether Panel Registration [FREEZE] button (page 42) freezes the accompaniment or voice settings. Use the REGISTRATION FREEZE LCD dials to select ACCOMP. FREEZE or VOICE FREEZE as required. ■ RECALL PRESET DATA ........................................................................................................................................................ Recalls the specified initial factory settings. Use any of the LCD dials to select the type of factory preset data you want to recall (see list below), then press the EXECUTE LCD button — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. If you want to execute the recall preset data operation press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Executing.” will appear while the data is being initialized, “Completed.” will appear briefly when the job is finished. Data initialized by the RECALL PRESET DATA function: ALL DATA CUSTOM VOICE PANEL REGIST ONE TOUCH S. PAD DATA SPLIT POINT HARMONY TYPE CONTROLLER ABC & IA REVERB EFFECT MIDI All of the below. Custom voice data. Panel registration data. One touch setting data. Multi, Tempo, and Percussion pad assignment data. The split point key. The harmony type. All controller settings (F3 function group). Auto Bass Chord & Interactive Accompaniment data, preset IA style “New Age” (No.12 button). Reverb type, depth. Effect type, depth. All MIDI data. 101 F8: MIDI MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. The PSR-6000 offers a range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used in even sophisticated MIDI systems. The MIDI parameters available on the PSR-6000 are different according to whether the normal play mode or Disk Orchestra/General MIDI mode is selected. Playback of Disk Orchestra Collection and General MIDI music software disks is described on page 43. NOTES • Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. ■ THE NORMAL PLAY MODE .............................................................................................................................................. In the PSR-6000’s normal mode of operation (i.e. when the DOC/GM mode is not selected) key on/off, voice, sustain, volume, pitch bend, and other performance data is transmitted and received without modification directly via the MIDI OUT and MIDI IN connectors. The receive channel is determined by the MIDI channel setting parameter described on page 104. It is also possible to play the rhythm instrument voices via the rhythm channel (page 104). More complex control is available through the Multi Part Setting parameters (page 105), allowing up to 8 different voices to be controlled via different MIDI channels. It is possible, for example, to play a number of melody parts from an external MIDI control device to the accompaniment of the PSR-6000 ABC system. ■ THE DOC MODE ........................................................................................................................................................................... In this mode the PSR-6000 can play Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) software. MIDI data is transmitted and received in accordance with Yamaha DOC specifications. For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 128, the “Voice List” on page 116, and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121. 3 Ways To Select the DOC Mode • Insert a DOC disk (the DOC mode is automatically selected). • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button (the normal, DOC, and General MIDI modes are selected in sequence). • Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To DOC Mode” message from an external MIDI device. 102 F8: MIDI ■ THE GENERAL MIDI (GM) MODE ............................................................................................................................... In this mode MIDI data is received and transmitted in accordance with the General MIDI System Level 1 standard. General MIDI data can be received via the MIDI IN connector and played by the PSR-6000. General MIDI data transmitted via the PSR-6000 MIDI OUT connector can be used to control appropriate tone generators and other MIDI equipment. For details refer to the “MIDI Function Tree” on page 128, the “Voice List” on page 116, and the “GM/DOC Mode Percussion Map” on page 121. 3 Ways To Select the GENERAL MIDI Mode • Insert a General MIDI disk (the GM mode is automatically selected). • Press the [DISK ORCHESTRA/GENERAL MIDI] button. • Receive a MIDI exclusive “Switch To GM Mode” message from an external MIDI device. ❍ ABOUT GENERAL MIDI The existing MIDI protocol allows performance and other data to be transferred between different instruments, even if they are from different manufacturers. This means, for example, that sequence data that was originally created to control a tone generator from manufacturer A can also be used to control a different tone generator from manufacturer B. Since the voice allocation in different devices from different manufacturers is usually different, however, appropriate program change data must be transmitted to select the right voices. The General MIDI protocol was developed to minimize confusion and the need for re-programming when playing software created by one MIDI device on another. This has been achieved by defining a standard voice allocation in which the same or similar voices are accessed by the same program change numbers or MIDI channels. The current standard recognized by the International MIDI Association is known as “GM System Level 1.” The PSR-6000 voice allocation complies with the GM System Level 1 standard when it is switched to the GM mode. See the “Voice List” on page 116 for details. ● Initial General MIDI Mode Settings When the General MIDI mode is selected, the parameters listed below are initialized as shown. General MIDI System Level 1 Mode Initial Settings Program Change# Pitch Bend Volume Pan Modulation Expression Hold (Sustain) Pitch Bend Sense Fine Tune Coarse Tune RPN 0 (Grand Piano) ±0 (Center) 100 Voice Preset 0 (Off) 127 (Max.) 0 (Off) 02H/00H (2 semitones) 40H/00H ±0 40H/00H ±0 NULL 103 F8: MIDI MIDI Channel & Multi Part Settings The contents of this display are different depending on whether the normal play mode or the DOC/GM mode is selected. ■ Normal Play Mode ● CH. SETTING Sets the basic transmit, basic receive, split transmit, and rhythm receive channels. Use the TRANSMIT LCD dials to select the basic transmit channel (1 … 16), and the RECEIVE LCD dials to select the basic receive channel (1 … 16, All). The SPLIT TRANSMIT LCD dials select the split (left-hand) transmit channel (1 … 16), and the RHYTHM RECEIVE LCD dials select the rhythm receive channel (1 … 16). TRANSMIT This setting determines the basic channel on which all PSR-6000 data will be transmitted in the normal play mode. RECEIVE The receive channel is the basic channel on which the PSR-6000 will receive all MIDI data. If set to “All,” data can be received via all 16 MIDI channels. SPLIT TRANSMIT The split transmit channel functions only in the normal play mode. This is the channel on which left-hand performance data (i.e. data produced by playing keys to the left of the split point) will be transmitted. Right-hand performance data is transmitted on the basic transmit channel. RHYTHM RECEIVE This setting specifies an independent MIDI channel via which the PSR-6000’s rhythm (drums and percussion) can be controlled. This means you can, for example, play the selected voice via the basic receive channel while simultaneously playing the rhythm instruments via a different channel 104 NOTES • The rhythm channel cannot be specified in the DOC/GM mode. Channel 15 is reserved for rhythm in the DOC mode, while channel 10 is reserved for rhythm in the GM mode. F8: MIDI (i.e. the RHYTHM RECEIVE channel). ● SEQ. TRACK CH. Individually sets the transmit channels for the sequencer tracks. Use the LCD dials — TR1 through TR7 to set the transmit channels for the corresponding tracks. These settings only apply when the normal play mode is selected. Separate transmit channels can be set for sequencer tracks 1 through 7 (the ACCOMP. track does not transmit) so the PSR-6000 sequencer can be used to drive an external multi-timbre tone generator or multiple tone generators via the specified channels. NOTES • If basic, split, and or sequencer track transmit channels are set to the same MIDI channel number, DUP will appear below the channel number. If the basic and split transmit channels are set to the same number, the data from both the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard will be transmitted on the basic transmit channel (the content of the data to be transmitted can be set via the “SPLIT SEND” function described on page 108). Further, if several sequencer tracks are set to transmit on the same channel, the data from all those tracks will be transmitted on the same channel. • As with the transmit channels described above, if the basic, rhythm, and or multi part (described below) receive channels are set to the same MIDI channel number, DUP will appear below the channel number. In this case the received data will apply to all voices accessed by that channel number. If, for example, the basic, rhythm, and multi part receive channel are all set to the same number, any note data received on that channel will play the orchestra 1, rhythm, and multi part voices simultaneously. ● MULTI PART Allows the receive channel, volume, and voice to be independently specified for 8 separate “parts” to be controlled from an external MIDI device. NOTES • In the DOC mode MIDI reception occurs via channels 1 through 10, and channel 15 (rhythm part). In the GM mode, reception occurs on all channels regardless of these settings. With the MULTI PART CH. parameters selected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through PART8 — to set the MIDI receive channels of the corre- 105 F8: MIDI sponding parts. With the MULTI PART VOL. parameters selected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through PART8 — to set the volume levels of the corresponding parts. With the MULTI PART VOICE parameters selected, use the LCD dials — PART1 through PART8 — to select the voices to be used by the corresponding parts. NOTES • Note that parts that are not required can be turned “OFF” via the “Channel” parameter in the MULTI PART RECEIVE CHANNEL display. • If the channel number of any part is set to the same channel number as another part DUP will appear below both channel numbers, and OFF will appear below the higher-numbered part indicating that the part is turned off. • Any of the preset or custom voices can be specified via the voice parameter in the MULTI PART VOICE display. • If the basic receive channel is set to “All,” a multi part receive channel cannot be assigned (OFF and DUP will appear on the display). ■ DOC/GM Mode Sets the keyboard transmit channel, turns local control on or off, and specifies the transpose type for the DOC/GM mode. Use the KEYBOARD CHANNEL LCD dial to set the transmit channel (1 … 16), the LOCAL CONTROL LCD dials to turn local control on or off 106 F8: MIDI (see description below), and the TRANSPOSE LCD dials to set the transpose type as required (see description below). ● KEYBOARD CHANNEL In addition to accepting MIDI note data on 16 channels (also during disk playback), the PSR-6000 has a separate keyboard note channel. Data on this channel can only be controlled via the PSR-6000 panel controls (when LOCAL CONTROL is ON), and is not affected by MIDI data. This data is transmitted via MIDI OUT, on the KEYBOARD CHANNEL. ● LOCAL CONTROL The “Local” parameter determines whether the PSR-6000 is controlled by its own keyboard or MIDI data received from an external MIDI device. When local control is on, the PSR-6000 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the key- board. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the PSR-6000 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR-6000’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-6000 keyboard. When Local is “ON” voice and controller parameters that can be played via the keyboard are set to the same channel as the transmit channel. ● TRANSPOSE When this parameter is set to RECEIVE, the PSR6000 transpose settings are not applied to transmitted MIDI data. When set to TRANSMIT, the PSR-6000 transpose settings apply to transmitted MIDI data in the same they do to notes played on the PSR-6000 itself. As for received MIDI data, when this parameter is set to MIDI Switch, System Settings, & Data Transmission TRANSMIT the note data is not transposed, and when set to RECEIVE the note data is transposed. ■ MIDI SWITCH (Normal Play Mode Only) Allows reception and transmission of control change, program change, pitch bend, and system exclusive data to be independently turned on or off. Use the appropriate LCD dials to turn CONTROL CHANGE , PROGRAM CHANGE , PITCH BEND, and/or SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE data reception and transmission ON or OFF. NOTES • These “switches” can be used to determine how the PSR-6000 responds to MIDI data received from external equipment. If, for example, you don’t want the PSR6000 voices to be changed by program change messages received from an external device, turn the program change switch “OFF.” • The same applies to transmission from the PSR-6000 — turn off data that you don’t want to be transmitted to 107 F8: MIDI external equipment. • In the DOC/GM mode, all control change data are transmitted and received regardless of the settings on this page. ■ MIDI SYSTEM (Normal Play Mode Only) These functions provide access to a number of important MIDI system “switches” — internal or external clock synchronization, local control on/off, transpose data transmission on/off, and split mode data transmission on/off. Use the appropriate LCD dials to set the CLOCK, LOCAL CONTROL , TRANSPOSE, and SPLIT SEND parameters as required (see descriptions below). ● CLOCK INT (internal) clock setting is the normal setting when the PSR-6000 is being used alone. If you are using the PSR-6000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-6000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to EXT (external). In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PSR-6000 MIDI IN connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. ● LOCAL CONTROL “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-6000 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the PSR6000 keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone 108 generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external sequencer or MIDI computer, for example, plays the PSR-6000’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-6000 keyboard. ● TRANSPOSE When this parameter is set to RECEIVE, the transmitted MIDI note data will not be affected by the PSR-6000 transpose setting. When set to TRANSMIT the transmitted notes will be transposed in accordance with the PSR6000 transpose setting. The reverse is true for reception: when set to TRANSMIT received note data is not transposed; when set to RECEIVE received note data is transposed. ● SPLIT SEND The SPLIT SEND parameter can be set so that MIDI note data from the left-hand (L), right-hand (R), or both sections of the keyboard (L&R) are transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. You could choose to transmit only F8: MIDI the right-hand data so that only notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard are reproduced via an external tone generator, for example. When turned OFF data from the entire keyboard is transmitted on the basic transmit channel. ■ DATA TRANSMIT (Normal Play Mode Only) Transmits the specified PSR-6000 panel or memory data via the MIDI OUT connector. Use any of the LCD dials to select PANEL or MEMORY data (see below), then press the EXECUTE LCD button — the “Are you sure? ” confirmation display will appear. If you want to transmit the selected data press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button to cancel the operation). The progress of the data transmit operation will be indicated by a bar graph at the bottom of the display. The selected data is transmitted as a MIDI bulk dump that can be automatically received by a second PSR-6000 or other compatible MIDI device. PANEL When PANEL is selected all PSR-6000 panel settings are transmitted. MEMORY When MEMORY is selected the following data types are transmitted: • Panel data. 109 F8: MIDI • Panel registration data. • One touch setting data. • Multi, tempo, and percussion pad data. • Custom voice data. • Custom style data. • Sequencer data. ● MIDI Bulk Dump Reception (Memory Data Receive) The PSR-6000 can receive bulk data transmitted by a second PSR-6000 as long as it is not accessing disk data, the Custom Accompaniment Programmer is not engaged, and the DOC/GM mode is not selected. When a bulk dump is received the following display will appear: The bar graph roughly indicates the progress of the bulk dump receive operation. “Completed.” will appear on the display when the data has been successfully received. ● Receiving MIDI Bulk Dump Request Messages When the normal play mode is selected and the PSR-6000 receives a MIDI bulk dump request message from an external device, The display appears and a bulk data transmission is performed. Progress of the transmission is shown in bar-graph form on the display. ● Bulk Dump Error Messages If an error is encountered during bulk reception, a “System Exclusive Error ” error message will appear for a few seconds and the receive operation will be terminated. In most cases the data will be replaced up until the point at which the error occurred. Data being received at the time the error occurred will be initialized. All other data is not affected. NOTES • Broken cables and other external problems can also cause a “System Exclusive Error” message. 110 Error Messages If you attempt to perform an illegal operation or some other problem occurs, the PSR-6000 will usually warn you with an error message that provides an idea of what caused the problem and how it can be rectified. The following are the error messages you’re most likely to see during normal operation. Some of the error displays automatically revert to the previous display after a few seconds, while others require that the CANCEL LCD button be pressed to exit from the error display. If a damaged disk is used the data countdown during FROM DISK or TO DISK operations may stop and the load or save operation may get “hung up.” In this case, eject the disk from the drive even though the DISK IN USE lamp may be on. Discard the damaged disk. ■ ■ ■ Sequencer Errors ........................................................................................................................................................................ Time signature conflict! Playback not possible. You have attempted to play back a sequence using a different time signature from the one with which it was recorded. Data error! Playback stopped. A data error has been encountered during playback which makes continued playback impossible. Memory full! Recording stopped. The sequencer memory is full and no more data can be recorded. You may have to clear songs or data to make room. Save data you want to keep to floppy disk, then clear it from the PSR-6000 memory. Too much data! Operation cancelled. There is too much data for the specified edit operation. Simplify the sequence and try again. Custom Accompaniment Programmer Errors ............................................................................................. Memory full! Cannot store data. Not enough memory is available to store all the data. Simplify the accompaniment to reduce the amount of data, then try storing the data again. Work area full! Recording stopped. The work area memory used during custom accompaniment recording is full and recording cannot continue. Simplify the accompaniment so that it fits in the available work area. Preset track! Cannot record. This message will appear if you attempt to set a track which contains preset data to the record mode. Edited data not stored! You have attempted to exit from the Custom Accompaneiment Programmer or change styles without first saving the edited data. Press the appropriate LCD button to continue. Disk Errors .......................................................................................................................................................................................... Disk error! Cannot continue. A data error has occurred during a save, load, delete, or format operation. Press the CANCEL LCD button to clear this error message. Disk full! Cannot continue. The floppy disk does not have enough remaining capacity to carry out the specified operation. Press the CANCEL LCD button to clear this error message. Bad file name. The file name is all spaces and cannot be recognized by the PSR-6000. 111 Error Messages ■ ■ ■ Not enough memory. Not enough memory to load the specified sequencer file from disk. Not a user disk! Cannot continue. You have attempted to perform a save, rename, delete, format, or disk free area operation while a pre-programmed (non-user) disk is in the drive. Wrong disk type/format! Cannot continue. The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is the wrong type or has the wrong format. The current disk is write protected so no format option is provided with this error message (see below). Wrong disk type/format! Format disk? (All data will be erased!) The disk in the drive has not been formatted or the disk is the wrong type or has the wrong format. In this case the current disk can be written to, so a format option is provided with the error message. Disk write protected! Cannot continue. The disk write protect tab is in the write disable position, so the specified operation cannot be performed. Disk not found. Please insert disk. No disk in drive. Insert an appropriate disk and try again. File not found! The disk does not contain any files saved by the user. MIDI Errors .......................................................................................................................................................................................... System exclusive error. An error has been encountered while receiving MIDI system exclusive data — e.g. during a MIDI bulk dump operation. MIDI receive buffer overflow. The MIDI receive buffer cannot handle the amount of data being received. Reduce the complexity of the data being received and try again. DOC/GM Mode Errors ............................................................................................................................................................. Wrong disk type! (Operation cancelled.) The loaded disk does not contain DOC or GM song files recognizable by the PSR-6000. File not found! (Operation cancelled.) The specified song file cannot be found on the currently loaded disk. Disk load error! Operation cancelled. An error was encountered while loading data from the disk. Other Messages ............................................................................................................................................................................ Back up time limit exceeded! All data was initialized. 112 The PSR-6000 retains all data in memory for up to approximately one week if the power is not turned on during this time. This message will appear if a longer period of time has elapsed since the last time the power was turned on. In this case all data will be initialized to the factory-preset values. This message will also appear when all internal data is initialized by turning on the power while holding the [EXIT] and [DEMO] buttons. Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause/Solution Noise is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is a normal result of the power surge that occurs when the unit is turned on of off. No solution necessary. The volume controls or foot controller are turned all the way down. Set the volume controls and foot controller to a reasonable listening level. No sound. A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Unplug the headphones. MIDI local control is turned OFF. Turn MIDI local control ON. The ABC chord does not change even when a different chord is played. Are you sure you’re playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard? You are using single-finger type fingering in the fingered mode, or viceversa. Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected ABC mode. The disk lamp lights dimly. The PSR-6000 is constantly checking for the presence of a disk. This is not a problem. The style list or voice list does not appear even when a STYLE or VOICE group button is pressed. The [LIST HOLD] button is engaged (its LED is lit). Press the [LIST HOLD] button so that its indicator goes out, then try selecting a style or voice (page 11). Some function menus cannot be selected. The GM/DOC, Sequencer, or Custom Accomp. mode is engaged. All function menus are available in the normal play mode. An intro, fill-in, or ending created using the Custom Accompaniment Programmer cannot be used. PRESET/NO ASSIGN is selected for that intro/fill/ending in the I/F/E display screen. Set to USER and try again (page 73). 113 Index A H a tempo pad ................................... 40 Depth, custom voice ...................... 79 Detune, custom voice, dual ............ 82 ABC modes .................................... 19 accel. pad ....................................... 39 Disk free area function ................... 99 Disk functions ................................. 94 Harmony type ................................. 90 Harmony, sequencer ...................... 54 Accents, adding ............................. 64 Accompaniment ............................. 19 Disk styles ...................................... 28 Display ........................................... 10 Headphones jack ............................. 6 Help function .................................. 11 Accompaniment volume ................. 25 Accompaniment, ways to start ....... 22 DOC and General MIDI disks, playing ...................................... 43 Attack, custom voice ...................... 80 Auto solo ........................................ 27 DOC mode ................................... 102 DOC volume control ....................... 45 Aux in jacks ...................................... 6 Aux out jacks .................................... 6 DOC/GM mode, MIDI ................... 106 Drum voice edit functions ............... 83 Harmony ......................................... 31 I I/F/E select, custom accompaniment ........................ 73 Dual voice edit functions ................ 81 Interactive accompaniment ...... 27, 89 Intro, fill-in, and ending sections, creating ..................................... 66 E K Brilliance, custom voice ................. 79 Effect depth .................................... 85 Effect type ...................................... 85 Key velocity .................................... 18 Keyboard channel, MIDI .............. 107 C Effects ............................................ 31 Envelope, custom voice ................. 80 Keyboard percussion ..................... 14 Channel setting, MIDI .................. 104 Erase, sequencer ........................... 60 Error messages ............................ 111 L EXIT button .................................... 76 Left hold ......................................... 32 B Bass and chord tracks ................... 64 Chord pads .................................... 35 Chord playback .............................. 36 Chord recording ............................. 35 Clock, MIDI ................................... 108 CONTRAST control ........................ 11 Controller functions ........................ 86 F LIST HOLD button ......................... 11 Local control, MIDI ............... 107, 108 Controller, custom voice ................ 78 Copy, custom accompaniment ....... 71 Fader assign, custom accompaniment ........................ 70 faster pad ....................................... 40 M Create measure, sequencer .......... 58 Custom accompaniment editing ..... 68 Fill-ins ............................................. 24 Fingered chord accompaniment .... 19 Measure/beat, custom accompaniment ........................ 69 Custom accompaniment programmer .............................. 62 Floppy disk & drive ........................... 3 Foot controller function .................. 86 Memory backup ............................ 100 Metronome, sequencer .................. 54 Custom accompaniment programmer, exiting ................. 74 Foot controller jack ........................... 7 Foot switch function ....................... 88 MIDI bulk dump error messages .. 110 MIDI bulk dump reception ............ 110 Custom accompaniment style, selecting & using ...................... 74 Custom style number ..................... 65 Footswitch jack ................................. 7 Format disk function ....................... 98 MIDI bulk dump request ............... 110 MIDI channel and multi-part settings ................................... 104 Custom voice edit .......................... 77 D Data backup ..................................... 2 Data initialization ............................ 12 Freeze function .............................. 42 FROM DISK button ........................ 93 From disk function .......................... 94 Function selection and editing, general procedure .................... 75 Functions ........................................ 75 Manual bass mode ......................... 21 MIDI functions .............................. 102 MIDI jacks ........................................ 7 MIDI switch ................................... 107 MIDI switch, system settings, & data transmission ................... 107 MIDI system ................................. 107 Data transmit, MIDI ...................... 109 Decay, custom voice ...................... 80 G MIXER button ................................. 10 Modulation, custom voice .............. 79 Delete file, disk function ................. 98 Delete measure, sequencer ........... 58 General MIDI mode ...................... 103 GM volume control ......................... 47 Modulation/effect wheel ........... 32, 86 Multi pad repeat playback .............. 36 Demo play modes ............................ 9 114 Demo playback ................................ 8 Multi part, MIDI ............................. 105 Index Music stand ...................................... 7 R T Recall preset data ........................ 101 Tap start pad .................................. 39 Record track selection ................... 50 Recording type, sequencer ............ 55 Tempo ............................................ 22 Tempo change pad ........................ 39 Tempo I pad ................................... 39 Tempo synchro function ................. 40 Name, custom voice ...................... 77 Name, custom voice, drum ............ 83 Release, custom voice ................... 80 Remove event, custom accompaniment ........................ 72 Remove event, sequencer ............. 57 Name, custom voice, dual .............. 81 Normal play mode ........................ 102 Rename file, disk function .............. 97 Resonance, custom voice .............. 79 Tone, custom voice ........................ 79 Touch sensitivity, custom voice ..... 78 Note shift, sequencer ..................... 60 Reverb ............................................ 31 Reverb and effect function ............. 84 Track copy/mix, sequencer ............ 56 Track delete ................................... 52 O Reverb depth ................................. 84 Reverb type .................................... 84 Track volume, custom accompaniment ........................ 69 Octave change ............................... 18 Octave, custom voice ..................... 78 Rhythm track .................................. 63 Rhythm-only accompaniment ........ 25 Track volume, sequencer ............... 55 Transpose, MIDI ................... 107, 108 Octave, custom voice, dual ............ 82 One touch setting ........................... 29 rit. pad ............................................ 40 Transposition ................................. 17 Troubleshooting ........................... 113 One touch setting synchro change 89 One touch setting/IA functions ....... 89 S Tuning ............................................ 17 Orchestration .................................. 12 Section selection ............................ 24 U Muting DOC parts .......................... 46 Muting GM parts ............................. 48 N Name, custom accompaniment ..... 68 P Section, custom accompaniment ... 68 Sequence editing ........................... 54 TO DISK button .............................. 91 To disk function .............................. 95 User set style assignment .............. 26 Pads, multi mode ........................... 33 Sequencer playback ...................... 53 Sequencer record parametrers ...... 50 User set voice assignment ............. 15 Utility functions ............................. 100 Pads, perc mode ............................ 37 Pads, tempo mode ......................... 39 Sequencer recording ...................... 49 Sequencer track channel, MIDI .... 105 Pan, custom voice .......................... 78 Pan, custom voice, drum ............... 83 Single finger accompaniment ......... 20 slower pad ...................................... 40 Pan, custom voice, dual ................. 82 Panel registration ........................... 41 Softness, custom voice, drum ........ 83 Solo sections .................................. 24 Voices, selecting ............................ 13 Volume control ............................... 14 Perc break function ........................ 38 Perc pad instrument assignment ... 37 Song clear, sequencer ................... 61 Song number selection .................. 49 Volume, custom voice, dual ........... 82 Percussion instrument cancel ........ 64 Phrase pads ................................... 33 Speed, custom voice ...................... 79 Split point, changing ....................... 16 Phrase recording & playback ......... 34 Pitch bend wheel ...................... 32, 87 Split send, MIDI ............................ 108 Store, custom accompaniment ...... 72 Pitch bend, custom voice ............... 78 Pitch, custom voice, drum .............. 83 Style name ..................................... 65 Style selection ................................ 21 Power supply ................................... 2 Sustain jack ...................................... 7 Sustain pedal function .................... 87 Q Sustain, custom voice .................... 80 Sustain ........................................... 31 V Voice, custom voice, dual .............. 81 Quantize, custom accompaniment . 70 Quantize, sequencer ...................... 59 115